Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D97-0107 - SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE - BUILDING EXTERIOR AND LOBBY ENTRANCE UPGRADECity of Tukwila L Community Development / Public Works • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 WARNING: IF CONSTRUCTION BEGINS BEFORE APPEAL PERIOD EXPIRES, APPLICANT IS PROCEEDING AT THEIR OWN RISK. Parcel No: 262304 -9075 Address: 545 ANDOVER PK W Suite No: Location: BUILDING 1 Category: AOFF. Type: DEVPERM Zoning: CM Const Type: Gas /Elec.: Units: 000 Setbacks: North: Water: N/A Wetlands: Contractor License No: UNIMACC066DM. OCCUPANT SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE 545.ANDOVER PK W, TUKWILA WA 98188 OWNER LOWE NORTHWEST INVESTOR ENT 600 UNIVERSITY ST #2820,;SEATTLE WA 98101 CONTACT RIC ANDERSON Phone: 206- 623 -0200 '600 UNIVERSITY STREET, #2820, SEATTLE, WA .98101 CONTRACTOR ; UNIMARK CONSTRUCTION COMPANY Phone: 206;628 -5076 1325 FOURTH AVENUE #610, SEATTLE, WA 98161 **************.*************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Permit Description: COSMETIC UPGRADE TO BUILDING EXTERIOR AND ENHANCE LOBBY ENTRANCE. ******************************************************* * * * * * * * * * *• * * * * * * * * * * * * * *• * * * ** Construction Valuation: $ 85,000.00 PUBLIC WORKS PERMITS: *(Water Meter Permits Listed Separate) Eng.Appr: SAL Curb Cut %Access /S.idewalk /CSS: N Fire Loop Hydrant: Y Size(in) .00 Flood Control Zone: N Hauling: N Start Time: End Time: Land Altering: N Cut: Fill: Landscape Irrigation: N Moving Oversized Load: N Start Time:. End Time: Sanitary Side Sewer: N No: Sewer Main Extension: N Private: Public: Storm. Drainage: Y Street Use: N Water Main Extension: N Private: , Public: ******************************************************* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *•k TOTAL DEVELOPMENT PERMIT FEES: $ 1,363.78 ***************************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * ** * * * * ** * * * * * * * * * * ** DEVELOPMENT PERMIT .0 South: Sewer: N/A Slopes: N Occupancy: OFFICE UBC: 1994 Fire Protection: SPRINKLERS East: .0 West: .0 No: •Y Permit No: Status: Issued: Expires: Streams: (206) 431 -3670 D97 -0107 ISSUED; 06/03/1997 11/30/1997. Permit Center Authorized Signature z Date: (0 I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the par rmance of work. I am authorized to sign for and obtain this development permit. ( Date: / 2 1 Print Name:_. This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. Project Name/Tenant: Southcenter Corporate Square Existing use: ❑ Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi- family ❑ Warehouse El Hospital ❑ Church Cl Manufacturing El Motel /Hotel ® Office El School /College /University El Other Value of Construction: $85,000 Site Address: City State /Zip: 545 Andover Park West, Tukwila. WA 98188 Tax Parcel Number: 262304 - 9075 - 00 Property Owner: Bat LD'd6 JA/e Lowe Northwest Investor Properties I, LLC City State /Zip: WA 9R1n1 Phone: (206) 623 - 0200 Fax #: (7nF) A7I — (16nn , Street Address: 6nn University Street 47R7n Spat-1-10 Contractor: (to be determined) Phone: Street Address: City State /Zip: Fax #: Architect: 1 1 RJ (Steve McConnell) Phone: (706) 221 -5745 Street Address: City State /Zip: 111 S. Jackson Street. Seattle. WA 9R104 Fax #: (2061 671 -7104 Engineer: CPL : 343 -0460 06 Street Address: City State /Zip: 217 Pine street suite 520 Seattle WA 98101 Fax it: (206) 343 - 5691 Contact Person: Ric Anderson Phone: (206) 623 - 0200 Street Address: 600 University Street, #2820, Seattle, City State /Zip: WA 98101 Fax #: (206) 623 - 0600 Description of work to be done: Cosmetic upgrade to building exterior and enhance lobby entrance. Existing use: ❑ Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi- family ❑ Warehouse El Hospital ❑ Church Cl Manufacturing El Motel /Hotel ® Office El School /College /University El Other Proposed use: El Retail El Restaurant El Multi- family ❑ Warehouse ❑Hospital ❑ Church El Manufacturing El MotelHotel ❑ Office ❑ School /College /University El Other Will there be a change of use? ❑ yes ® no If yes, extent of change: (Attach additional sheet if necessary) Will there be rack storage? El yes ® no Existing fire protection features: ® sprinklers 0 automatic fire alarm El none ❑ other (specify) Building Square Feet: 2 0 , 0 0 0 existing Area of Construction: (sq. ft.) 4 0 0 SF & Bldg Exter io. Will there be storage of flammable /combustible hazardous material Attach list of materials and storage location on separate 8 1/2 in the building? El yes X no X11 paper indicating quantities & Material Safety Data Sheets CITY OF TU'IVILA Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Commercial / Multi - Family Tenant Improvement / Alteration Permit Application Application and plans must be complete In order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mall or facsimile. APPLICANT REQUEST FOR PUBLIC. WORKS:SITE/CIVIL PLAN REVIEW OF TIDE FOLLOWING:: (Additional reviews may be determined by the Public Works Department) ❑ Channelization /Striping El Curb cut/Access /Sidewalk ❑ Flood Control Zone ❑ Hauling El Fire Loop /Hydrant (main to vault) #: Size(s): Cl Land Altering 0 Cut cubic yds. 0 Fill cubic yds. ❑ Landscape Irrigation El Sanitary Side Sewer #: El Sewer Main Extension 0 Private 0 Public El Storm Drainage ❑ Street Use El Water Main Extension 0 Private 0 Public El Water Meter /Exempt #: Size(s) 0 Deduct 0 Water Only El Water Meter /Permanent it Size(s): ❑ Water Meter Temp # Size(s): Est. quantity: gal Schedule: El Miscellaneous Value of Construction - In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review - Applications for which no permit is Issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 107.4 of the Uniform Building Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. CTPERMIT.DOC 1/29/97 Date applicatiqn accepted: C� l� 3 1 Date application expires: Application by: (initials) PLEASE SIGN BACK OF APPLICATION FORM BUILDI 6 OR AUT O ED GENT: Signature: �[; . t� 2/L,�c' ---- -- Phone: 7 3,. Date: #,34 7 Fax it: 7. . Print narfie: i Address u� ,. L�ti r ,�� �' , l r ( fc c 4 .�v City /State /Zip ( th go r / / ALL COMMERCIAUMULTI-FAVSY TENANT IMPROVEMENT /ALT TION PERMIT APPLICATIONS MUMBE SUBMITTED WITH THE POLL ING: ➢ ALL DRAWINGS TO BE STAMPED BY WASHINGTON STATE LICENSED ARCHITECT, STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OR CIVIL ENGINEER ALL DRAWINGS SHALL BE AT A LEGIBLE SCALE AND NEATLY DRAWN y BUILDING SITE PLANS AND UTILITY PLANS ARE TO BE COMBINED N/A SUBMITTED ❑ ❑ Complete Legal Description ❑ ❑ Metro: Non - Residential Sewer Use Certification if there is a change in the amount of plumbing fixtures (Form H -13). Business Declaration required (Form H -10). Four (4) sets of working drawings (five(5) sets for structural work), which include : ❑ ❑ Site Plan (including existing fire hydrant location(s) 1. North arrow and scale 2. Property lines, dimensions, setbacks, names of adjacent roads, any proposed or existing easements 3. Parking Analysis of existing and proposed capacity; proposed stalls with dimensions 4. Location of driveways, parking, loading & service areas 5. Recycle collection location and area calculations (change of use only) 6. Location and screening of outdoor storage (change of use only) 7. Limits of clearing /grading with existing and proposed topography at 2' intervals extending 5' beyond property's boundaries 8. Identify location of sensitive area slopes 20% or greater, wetlands, watercourses and their buffers (change of use only) 9. Identify location and size of existing trees that are located in sensitive areas and buffer (TMC 18.45.040), of those, identify by size and species which are to be removed and saved 10. Landscape plan with irrigation and existing trees to be saved by size and species (exterior changes or change of use only) 11. Location and gross floor area of existing structure with dimensions and setback 12. Lowest finished floor elevation (if in flood control zone) 13. See Public Works Checklist for detailed civil /site plan information required for Public Works Review (Form H- 9). ❑ ❑ Floor plan: show location of tenant space with proposed use of each room labeled ❑ ❑ Overall building floor plan with adjacent tenant use; identify tenant space use and location of storage of any hazardous materials; dimensions of proposed tenant space. ❑ ❑ Vicinity Map showing location of site ❑ ❑ Rack Storage: If adding new racks or altering existing rack storage, provide a floor plan identifying rack layout and all exit doors. Show dimensions of aisles, include dimensions of height, length, and width of rack. Structural calculations are required for rack storage eight feet and over. ❑ ❑ Indicate proposed construction of tenant space or addition and walls being demolished ❑ ❑ Construction details ❑ ❑ Sprinkler details - details of sprinkler hangers, specifically penetrations in structure, i.e., roof; size of water supply to sprinkler vault with documentation from contractor stating supply line will meet or exceed sprinkler system design criteria as identified by the Fire Department. ❑ Cl Washington State Non - Residential Energy Code Data shall be noted on the construction drawings. ❑ Cl SEPA Checklist - if intensification of use (check with Planning Department for thresholds). ❑ ❑ Attach plans, reports or other documentation required to comply with Sensitive Area Ordinance or other land use or SEPA decisions. ❑ ❑ Food service establishments require two (2) sets of stamped approved plans by the Seattle -King County Department of Public Health prior to submitting for building permit application. The Department of Public Health is located at 201 Smith Tower, Seattle, WA or call (206) 296 -4787. (Form H -5) Cl ❑ Copy of Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Valid Contractor's License. If no contractor has been selected at time of application a copy of this license will be required before the permit is issued OR submit Form H -4, "Affidavit in Lieu of Contractor Registration ". Building Owner /Authorized Agent If the applicant is other than the owner, registered architect/engineer, or contractor licensed by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the property owner authorizing the agent to submit this permit application and obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT 1 HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. CTPERMIT.DOC 1/29/97 545 ANDOVER Pk; W Address: Suite Tenant:. Type: ' DEVPERM Parcel #: 262304 -.9075 ermit No: D97-0107 Status: ISSUED, Applied: 04/03/1997 Issued: 06/03/1997 k * *'k k k*******• k* *•k•k **'k'k*•A ** * ** * ***•A*•k•k•k•k**** k* * k k•k•k•k k•k ** k* ** k•k*•k•k *•k•k•k Permit Conditions: 31. Please show existing water meters and water service to each building. Per Tukwila Municipalt..Co,de, each building shall be metered separately Any modifica�t,ion:to existing irrigation. system will r'equi"r`�e an irrigation permit. A water quality devv i ce`` is required for the storm :dra i n system in the parking 'lot °unless proof of ,existi. water ';quality device 'is submitted.. A check valve assembly is required for the fire' lines. (4/7/97 No change;, iii l 1, be made to the' plans -unless , appro . ved by the Architeot Engineer, an'd the Tukwila Building Division E l ectrA ;a'1 permits sha l 1 be "';ob'ta i:ned through-, the. Washington State Division of ,Labor�,a`nd •Industries and all electricai work ti`11 be inspected b2y 'Oat agency (248 -6630) . All , permits' , , inspection° records,,•' "and' approved plans shall 'b'ec ava : 1 l le at the job' site prior to the start of any con =' strudtion :. • ;'These documents ;pare to,b'e maintained and a.vai, . abl'e�Euntil````final inspectionapproval. is granted. A1i1 'structura=l concrete shall 'be.,s.peci,al inspected (UBC Sezk' 306(a)1 Allr trudtural wel shai i', be done > by W.A.B.O. certified welders and special (UBC ',` -Sec. ,306(a)5). Al in hig �t h= srength, b'ting shall be special inspected (UBC' ` e / 3 a , 6 (a } t b y , ` ; ,`: The,..s•peci shall submit a final signed report sta `whether, the work requiring''s'pec inspect>ion'was, to the, best, of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance with.`approved plans and specifications .and ~the applicab'le, workmanship provisions of the UBC. 9. When special inspection i s required either= the owner, architec•t2.or engineer' shall notify the Tukwila Building Division Of' appointment of the inspection agencies' prior to the first inspection. '' Copies of all special inspection reports shall be:_submitted the Building Division in a : ti;mely manner;. . contain address, project name, permi;t. number and type of inspecti on being performed. 10. All construction to be done_ conformance with approved plans and requirements of' the Uniform Building Code (1994 Edition) as amended, Uniform Mechanical Code (1994 Edition), and Washington State Energy Code (1994 Edition). 11. Validity of Permit. The issuance of a permit or approval of plans, specifications, and computations shall not be con- strued to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinance of the .jurisdiction. No permit presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of this code shall be valid. 12. Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. 13. Temporary erosion control measures shall be implemented as the first order of business to prevent sedimentation off- to or info existing st rm: drainage > facil'it_les. .hall be ver?ifi.y{�`�in %wr i.ting to the City ,U tes,` nspector that ":the r e .loop system for the bu sing contains a' State Department of Health approved detector double check `valve ass'emb l v`. This shall be done prior to the F inal.Inspection 11double :check valve assemblies tate : Department of Health. COMPLETE NOT COMPLETE ❑ COMMENTS • REVIEWERS INITIAL APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) REVIEWERS INITIAL CORRECTION DETERMINATION: REVIEWERS INITIAL C:ROUTE -F DATE DATE DATE Ptflrt* C.00v4ir±oy copy PLAN REVLEW / ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0107 DATE 5/09/97 PROJECT NAME SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION , FIRE PREVENTION ❑ PLANNING DIVISION ❑ + due �a,�/ K s- i317 t IT 1131� PUBLI ORKS % STRUCTURAL ❑ PERMIT COORD A OR g 1►J DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) DUE DATE 5/13/97 NOT APPLICABLE ❑ 1 TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE ❑ NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED ❑ ROUTED BY STAFF El (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) DUE DATE 5/27/97 APPROVED n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS ❑ NOT APPROVED (attach comments) ❑ DUE DATE APPROVED ❑ APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS El NOT APPROVED (attach comments) ❑ (Cerdfiadon of occupancy required. PROJECT NAME DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION MI PUBLIC WORKS COMMENTS REVIEWERS INITIAL REVIEWERS INITIAL APPROVED REVIEWERS INITIAL C:ROUTE -F L AVM 14'�'A �?'k Z �' i. L' �. kk�. r' av�: isA��L21��. C• YiCI4 V4,' XSf % ✓.' *lit= g, S PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0107 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE I DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) NOT COMPLETE TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE ROUTED BY STAFF (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) DATE l�J �L� APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) APPROVED I l APPROVED WI CONDITIONS CORRECTION DETERMINATION: FIRE PREVENTION ❑ PLANNING DIVISION E STRUCTURAL ❑ PERMIT COORDINATOR ❑ r A l APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS DATE DATE DUE DATE DATE 5/09/97 NOT APPLICABLE ❑ 5/13/97 NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED ❑ DUE DATE 5/27/97 NOT APPROVED (attach comments) E, Z7 DUE DATE NOT APPROVED (attach comments) ❑ (Certification of occupancy required. ) REVIEWERS INITIAL REVIEWERS INITIAL APPROVED REVIEWERS INITIAL C:ROUTE -F PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER PROJECT NAME DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION PUBLIC WORKS • D97 -0107 1 DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) COMPLETE n NOT COMPLETE COMMENTS TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE IT NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED-9 ROUTED BY STAFF n (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) CORRECTION DETERMINATION: klitif44.7 ?%3+�`.. t %I.�. "4S s a {JQ`'_c `.t glires /,'; .iX .*¢t! SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE FIRE PREVENTION PLANNING DIVISION p STRUCTURAL PERMIT COORDINATOR p DATE DATE DATE 1,4 It - -//3�y7 DUE DATE DATE 5/09/97 5/13/97 NOT APPLICABLE 3 DUE DATE 5/27/97 APPROVED n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS I !. NOT APPROVED (attach comments) DUE DATE APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS p NOT APPROVED (attach comments) p lean;nvaYe nw+¢nyaarnu«n.wo.nr;v (Cerdficadon of occupancy required. ) i,Yyidaz:u; sax BUILDING DIVISION PUBLIC WORKS L 1 PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0107 PROJECT NAME SOUTUCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE DEPARTMENT: 1 DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) COMPLETE RI NOT COMPLETE E COMMENTS TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE C NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED 8 ROUTED BY STAFF fl (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) REVIEWERS INITIAL t 1 APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) APPROVED n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS C NOT APPROVED (attach comments) REVIEWERS INITIAL 1 CORRECTION DETERMINATION: APPROVED C:ROUTE -F STRUCTURAL APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS FIRE PREVENTION DATE DATE C 6//311.7 NOT APPLICABLE Ei DUE DATE REVIEWERS INITIAL DATE �i' id?C16 aMt�E7/ L."' T@ A!/iNM2AeY.hM!1'AaVfelYnwniwfHa DATE 5/09/97 PLANNING DMSION II PERM ERMIT COORDINATOR Q DUEDATE 5/13/97 5/27/97 DUE DATE NOT APPROVED (attach comments) Q (Cerdficadoa of occupancy required. ) j�Y# �' t4' tw" tn d ? r,•gkl.iye&aw` #+i'.�V._.'7$twoh?:N ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0107 UDC PROJECT NAME SOUTRCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION El U PUBLIC WORKS DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) COMPLETE COMMENTS ' PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE ROUTED BY STAFF n (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) REVIEWERS INITIAL I I APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) APPROVED APPROVED REVIEWERS INITIAL DATE 5/3 9 7 I REVIEWERS INITIAL CORRECTION DETERMINATION: `•:ASS' =, -".fiVlY 7: VEVrfI;';4PK �^:iS!u a '•17di�e FIRE PREVENTION E STRUCTURAL C DUE DATE NOT COMPLETE E NOT APPLICABLE - DATE ')/6/ / l cam DATE 5/09/97 PLANNING DIVISION El PERMIT COORDINATOR 5/13/97 NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED DUEDATE 5/27/97 APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS C NOT APPROVED (attach comments) p- f m r\ � Cc2/1 c9 P APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS NOT APPROVED (attach comments) Q DATE (Certifiutioa of occupancy required. • DUE DATE Pivk C.00V'AirOY CcQ9 PLAN REVIEW /ROUTINGS IP ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0107 PROJECT NAME SOUTHCENTR CORPORATE SQUARE — BUILDING 1 DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION C) FIRE PREVENTION ❑ PLANNING DIVISION ❑ PUBLIC WORKS ❑ STRUCTURAL ❑ PERMIT COORDINATOR II DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) COMPLETE ❑ COMMENTS REVIEWERS INITIAL REVIEWERS INITIAL NOT COMPLETE N. L I ' i fl• • 1 et TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE ❑ NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED ❑ ROUTED BY STAFF ❑ (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) APPROVED n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS . NOT APPROVED (attach comments) 0 CORRECTION DETERMINATION: C:ROUTE -F DATE DATE DATE 4/03/97 DUE DATE 4/08/97 NOT APPLICABLE ❑ REVIEWERS INITIAL DATE DUE DATE 4/22/97 DUE DATE APPROVED ❑ APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS ❑ NOT APPROVED (attach comments) ❑ (Certiftadon of occupancy required. t :'a � '°r,` t . l .• ., r.",. a ,'iv59Yy ? i iCY�ii.rn T'K-v .7 •v ". Y!"at'ft ,�t,'�": , gS , w:.Y:'�k1r'�., �iv�,:• Cl #,�:k�"..1H3{taki:.,.'ra.'it' Pik: Sdv. F_ �. crl �it£ r.as�!1.._ PUBLIC WORKS COMPLETE COMMENTS ' REVIEWERS INITIAL I PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0107 PROJECT NAME SOUTHCENTR CORPORATE SQUARE — BUILDING 1 DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION III L FIRE PREVENTION E STRUCTURAL 4' DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) NOT COMPLETE TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE ROUTED BY STAFF El (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) DUE DATE 4/22/97 APPROVED n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS REVIEWERS INITIAL CORRECTION DETERMINATION: REVIEWERS INITIAL C:ROUTE -F DATED' ° v' ` // DATE DATE DUE DATE kbl3itR7'Yn'L'E5 DATE 4/03/97 PLANNING DIVISION PERMIT COORDINATOR ❑ NOT APPLICABLE Q 4/08/97 NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED 1 NOT APPROVED (attach comments) Ei V 4 DUE DATE APPROVED l l APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS E NOT APPROVED (attach comments) Q (Certification of occupancy required. ) �° n'J, Ctj.:.�» _ 'a::•..1: ;�"�.N{;i .: yra". ^.�;Y" ,.i,t+, t.S wr.. 'y�. n " . :A;ei.? h r e . .cy�.. .�r eta p. Fyyq A ^ ��r'N.�t.•.��3Lic,x..+,• ei PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0107 DATE 4/03/97 PROJECT NAME SOUTHCENTR CORPORATE SQUARE — BUILDING 1 DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION El FIRE PREVENTION PLANNING DIVISION ❑ PUBLIC WORKS ❑ STRUCTURAL ❑ PERMIT COORDINATOR ❑ DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) COMPLETE n NOT COMPLETE El COMMENTS TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE n NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED ROUTED BY STAFF [❑ (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) REVIEWERS INITIAL REVIEWERS INITIAL APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) CORRECTION DETERMINATION: APPROVED ' n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS C:ROUTE -F DATE `f�� DATE REVIEWERS INTTIAL DATE eF ::.xV1 Fro'\ s!2AMitOi!giki4YrnvwrAren ato•w DUE DATE 4/08/97 NOT APPLICABLE DUE DATE 4/22/97 APPROVED n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS . NOT APPROVED (attach comments) ❑ 1 DUE DATE NOT APPROVED (attach comments) ❑ (Certification of occupancy required. ) • • • • • • ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0107 PROJECT NAME DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION Cl PUBLIC WORKS COMPLETE [ l COMMENTS ' REVIEWERS INITIAL PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP 4 DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED ❑ ROUTED BY STAFF I l (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) REVIEWERS INITIAL i,I (,r1 I APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) APPROVED n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS 0 . NOT APPROVED (attach comments) CORRECTION DETERMINATION: REVIEWERS INITIAL C:ROUTE -F ism: krxaifY'w�i.A SOUTHCENTR CORPORATE SQUARE — BUILDING 1 DATE 4/03/97 FIRE PREVENTION ❑ PLANNING DIVISION . STRUCTURAL ❑ PERMIT COORDINATOR ❑ NOT COMPLETE ❑ NOT APPLICABLE ❑ DATE l /vk DATE DUE DATE 4/08/97 DUE DATE 4/22/97 Q�S:1tJ7 151 *t DUE DATE APPROVED ❑ APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS fl NOT APPROVED (attach comments) ❑ DATE (Certification of occupancy required. ) ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0107 PROJECT NAME DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION El FIRE PREVENTION E PUBLIC WORKS ■ STRUCTURAL 4 DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) COMPLETE n NOT COMPLETE NOT APPLICABLE Ei COMMENTS Pi 5I2O.J -eZ's Nag N J G✓ . zJ� Q - V -p- - 1,/ '. -f T G b /a' � '` j / S , s , ' > n /ot .X 4j.. Y ! . P_,�r,,i p OC.V - / ' p Are. /ice s TUES /THURS ROUT I PLEASE ROUT NO THER REVIEW REQUIRED ROUTED BY STAFF (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) REVIEWERS INITIAL REVIEWERS INITIAL C:ROUTE -F nfi f`r+ TtWrOT014r � �e h � „ri; +` 4v'>E I u�LC }{ i l�! +'r:n 11" etowriu PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP SOUTHCENTR CORPORATE SQUARE — BUILDING 1 CORRECTION DETERMINATION: APPROVED ' El APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS DATE DATE DATE C DUE DATE DATE 4/03/97 DUE DATE 4/22/97 PLANNING DIVISION PERMIT COORDINATOR Q 4/08/97 REVIEWERS INITIAL APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) APPROVED Ej APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS ❑. NOT APPROVED (attach comments) Q r DUE DATE NOT APPROVED (attach comments) Q (Certification of occupancy required. ) CP, Yf9�M •449D'V'Af {4M.Y.!4YM4ffl1L!K {;{ ****** R** k* * * * *dA *,k .9 F h kk tR'9Farak'9rk k�FEck VIP R * ***A*A* CITY OF: .TUKWIL'A.: WA TRANSMIT * A**** Ir* k'* A**** A* *AAr * *** * * *A **A *.* * * * * * *A *1: ** * * *. * ** *4* * * * * ** :TRANSMIT; NUMber :' `R9700591 Amount.: ' 42.00 06/03/97 15 :50 PRvment, Method .CHECK Notation: SOUTHCENTER CORP In i t.: SLB Per rni :No:. MIS97- 0109...Tvpe: MISC MISC -COPIES/PUBLIC Total. Fees 42.00: :al ALL Pmts: . 42.00 Balance: .00• * * *** * * * * * * ** * * ** * *l ****************A *A * * * *A* * * * * *A* * * * * *AA• * * * * *.. .Account Code . . '. 0esor i pt i on D.00/3416..S08 BUILDING .BOND /DEPOSIT Amount. 42..00. La_vri VP liuo ov erpo`ia . Flea 6e, Ge_funci Cke.o6Q- Send 6 lc-e -e r C-o r p • 6Q 0100 U 5traet 5ui. D %cep (2o,t1e. quo I WU 06/04 /717 TOTAL 3284.00 k *k* * * * * * *** *k * ** ** 4. 4k* kA: k*A k*: 4***• A**** fr* ** *****N ** *t1•k•.44***Air** G.x'7Y or :TUVWILAw WA TRANSMIT *h*'A * *!r * * * * * ** *A *kkk* A TMJ�* * •k * !k — ' * **� * *dl* ** *k*k ***A *k *k * *A * *i*k 4** k *A A,NSMIT Number: R 9700591: 'Amount: 848.00 06/03/97 15:43 vtdent tlethod: CHECK Notation SQUTHCENTER CORP In i t: SLB Permit No D97-0107 Type: DEVPERM DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Parcel No 262304 -9075 Site Address: 545 ANDOVER PK W °:,Location: BUILDING '1 This Payment 848.00 Total. Fees: ,Total ALL Pmts: Balance: 1 1.363.78 .00 ,.. ******* A** r6• '*** * * **k ** ** ** * * * * * ** *AA•k *o1 k *•A** *** * *.* * * *** *y5 * **•A ** ** Account Code Description Amount 000/322.100 BUILDING NONRES 93.50 400/345.630. PLAN CHECK - UTILITY 20,00 000/386.904 STATE BUILDING SURCHARGE 4.50 . 401/342.400 IN•SP FEE -• FLHi LI /WME 15:.00 412 %342.400 INSP FEE - STORM DRAIN 15.00 016 06/04 7717 TOTAL 3284.00 v * * * ** * ** h*. * * * *.% * * **. * * *k k *k *h *k * * *; * * *h * * ***4 *k * *k *** * * *k *k ** * *A CITY OF T IKWILA WA �..:- �.....:� TRANSMIT *** k** * . t: * * k*C ***k * *. ** **.kk *ki4 *" 1F** **** *k ** ** * * **,%*** •k *kk *h* ***4* ; TRNNSMI'T ° Number R970Q561 Amount. 51 04/0 12:40,: Pavrenii``Me:thod'. CHECK 'Notation: RICHARD 'Ai4OERSON Inita KJP. Permit, Ha« D97- .010,7 Tvpe. DEVPCRM DEVE,LQPMEN4 PERMIT Parcel' No a . ,262304- .80,75 : ait.e Add.ressz 345' ANDOVER PI( E Total Pees.. 1,3/.7.13 This P a y ment 515..78 Tots1 AL.L 515.78. . 8alancec.. ,.7.94L.00 *** h********************** *. * * * * *•!o * * * *+. ** * * * * •k * * * *. Accou . nt. :Description Amount `000/3450830 PLAN CHECK - NONRES 51578 9244 04/07 9716 TOTAL 2063.12 Pro'ect: Type pection: dress: A p , , Date Specia instructions: �,, to �' a Date wanted,;.., .._, . ._"CC 1 a.m. P.11-1. l Requester:` • CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. Approved per applicable codes. Inspector: • (206)431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. Date: i ri $47.00 • N REINSPECTI FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: aod , ,5 Type of inspection: SD Address: i g5-4/5- c2-(/ G../ Date called: oa Special instructions: Date wanted: a.m. p.m. Requester: 7C6/1 ,2 Phone No.: ,itUatieta=12.== WarialarAWS7401912244k MAZISMIZMUAC§1, iNspgpTio,N REcopr Reiaiti a cop' per INSPECTION NO. i CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 fli Approved per applicable codes. I I I I COMMENTS: 2 AA- Inspector: 02a) Date: $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to insp cti /on, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: D97-0/°7 PERMIT NO. (206). 431-3670 Corrections required prior to approval. Project: 6 Type of Inspection: Address: UU Date called 1 /00 Special instructions: Date wante Cl. l a.m. p.m. Requester• / SG A IAA // phone. 4'• INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO, CITY OFTUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 COMMENTS: -du . Pecs2AAtrztA f 0 gzi � 1.2 i 5 (0 q, a . Inspector: 0 Approved per applicable codes. PERMIT (2 6)431-3670 C 'erections required prior to approval. Date: 1 / 11 1 0 0 Ei $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: Project: ' So u+hcervi-er Corporate Type of Inspection I L L// are - --; l Address: 5145 Ahclover PI< W Date called: 1- I- 00 Special instructions: , . /3[1 /0 1 a ' - Date wanted: a.m. -00 V2. a p Requester: .-. '.-- NJ i An Phone: 2.0‘, 6 163-72477 COMMENTS: 01 A v tgl.-4 XE) E 1/1 2749 "Me - Vaffie bu ,ca-W4 p . ( 3 .. o II 37v Coy eti.,,. „,) Ad 4.e.al,. , /4 ,r„,, , .4,4 • ii.). 215 /3A. 1, , - AC P', ___ 6+Add t2 e , 4j.a.2• Zazi ,,, , i ".41:tibi: tou4p f b t " 1/ 7d iic.., , 36 9 //vsfoi II 1 'al/ tz su.)/A-e 1 AA osiy (.< 040 / (AA t w o Sa44re /3 ii, ?- //vViiii /4164 14 FIV Pe <4.4 #t4 13,4A , / f ( () .. p ,IA. fet.e., swilzh m esiy / PY Heti AA L4/*. Rd 1 6- 0 e 5141/ Date: ///4/f Inspector: 6V :..ttrwr • .e*As.tnaoo*.......,*—.......mwou..HUkVOtt41tttarArgaV yak • INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA-08188 Li Approved per applicable codes. fl C rections required prior to approval. $47.00 REINFECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: roje t:. Type of Inspec ion: Address: 6 -S (- d, - f/tu) Date called: 'Z` w ��� Special instructions: Date wanted: q Requester: I1rl Pd,VI W / 5 014 -- Phone: 7 100'' Z,S g)0,6 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. b9q-oio1 PERMIT NO. I !� (206)431 -3670 • Corrections required prior to approval. b ),' S / /e - P ./Jo 1.-,1 /.11.t'Gti $47.00 REINSPECTION � REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: Receipt No: frx Pr jec Y Type'of inspecti': • Address: Date called: c I Special instructions: Date wanted: J) - 1 1 7 a.m p.m. Requester: , k,,..d) i2,2:4 L Phone No.: � .�!Lt\ -2 . 'r a 10 ? i INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 COMMENTS: hrori v1/4 6L-1 C c iUc,3 t iKI -• mw CtLr� h,.no .. -bwLOl rJC� ? k ILOV`'aE �,,rCFI S Gzs4 r94nig --- Fo L 1 L- ` ta. PPJ V., y 0E A c Cc!t> i pA ,Ao4' i.j P. P.4v4 t-A. w C.iX , ta.. - Approved per applicable codes. Inspector: [ceiPt No.: INSPECTION RECD Retain a co» with' pe D • bcii_U)O7 PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval,,., Date: il l is ic 9 $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite "100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: Project Name ,56Z C.Ac.Y1S C Ro ci Address S \4r 4 •At. v-' C [. Suite # Retain current inspection schedule Needs shift inspection Approved without correction notice Approved with correction notice issued Sprinklers: 5 Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Halon: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Authorized Signature FINALAPP.FRM . .1.. ::7.r.... -� - -�.••. -�. r 47,7 "' . ?�f • .,v .� � t.� �����u wn•t. � 'Z �r�' atrti'i ,�r.�1•Z1�� �.�� � ?`.17.777...7'.. .s ��w:N : �.:: �;.• 4„ y ° f'�:fw.r . ,r'��`l ^ .tilrlvn'^•� !' 1".. t'�!9''j•S':�.x.y.2�jK'7!K••!. City of .Tukwila Fire Department ta TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM .1' • Permit No. cYn — 6k P') Date T.F.D. Form F.P. 85 1 a. 15\'\1 John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 575-4404 • Fax (206) 575-4439 • ro'ect: . , �/� /� ,^� _& y .k I V�.J:L_1 A. CIE 1 Type • • s • ection: , . w . 4111 ` , S dr s: Da alledt — a� Special instructions :. Datanyed: c " acne R ester: .... Phone bles: COMMENTS: I Receipt No.: INSPECTION RECO Retain a copy with pe INSP CTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, -WA 98188 6'r -i5P P t,. d: Date: t� Approved per applicable codes. I Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector' Date: $42. REINSPECTION . E RE. UIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcente Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Pt �Pro'e-t: Er4 roje w C • smAAR�. Type of inspectio �1► Nft gigs: Date called: Special instructions: Date wanted Q a :m. Requesten FAN bL S hone No trA l0 — 9 S I g [Approved per applicable codes. [Receipt No.: INSPECTION RECO Retain a copy with pe INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 I Ihqri - oio`j PERMIT NO. (206) '431-3670 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector: Date: ct 1.419 F $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: �l. COMMENTS: P �:- - se.4 -c- s ,tecrU i wig► so i•► 1 rJ sr J - ,rr t_ se.. I,As IS ,.icr . c.,,t -Tn ham FO -- f Pri43,su . ST. WILL C.or.+SuL ::=ilk e G2:-. v t' .... ' C, 114-1 S . tLNR4 vt-. • •=,�Z ,A - 7 - �4S A►1 vosri t..-- . I t ; is S N 6,, t i-�- .. C-/ M P (L 7 f-\) S-t I TONE Ti O M 6 t J At S P z- s'AI-hbos � ec 1 g r o ' ' Cearu -� con. S&UP+cKfr- Yp isir t � itlCP TZ /FA A 1ress:ANcR pie_ w Date called: t d 7_ ZS - Ti Date wanted: p _ I � c � tz`7 �' 2 p.m. Special instructions: 5L D&l 4Z 0 17Fe I f P. Requester: DAN RAN Iii -es P K e ('`J g1 INSPECTION RECD Retain a copy with pe •. INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION • .6300. Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 1► V bcn-X101 PERM! 1 / (206) 431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. [e4-Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: Date: / , Q ( M $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. [Receit No.: Date: • Prjc e : ku C! �1 Col.'. SQurtm_ e fins c et' Typ e 4L i � jLE - Et_ A ress: 5 Aiskl Eft- pr. 1nl Date called: - 1- 25 ` - Special instructions: 13LDC'j - 9./4 ft:?. p /IVs FOUR too ` 11 '.o A.At-. wJ PE °it Date wanted: - , . Re uester: q 1 DAPJ FANDLe_S P / MA 8110 *1$ INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 p Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: / NSkC - , ,1v fix- • cc ,eti frt"( j;57 J I ,S ()id S.(11F . Inspector: Date: / f 1 I I $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to Inspection, fee must. be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection, Receipt No.: INSPECTION RECO Retain ;a copy with pe Corrections re uired prior to approval. Date: 511 (206) 431 -3670 re zs; 'ti (. 1r.ritp r A cw - u. eolzp. 50(4AF_ of inspectior /eggs: mtotte.12_ rie..... W Date called: 7 _ 7 - .9 Special instructions: eax.. lki 14L5F56:- i Nsp7e Date wanted: Q 0 _4-7 i , 0 Requester: bA A !Jo "IsIg c g-is- zy- PERMIT NO. .." ck Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECO Retain a copy with pe INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431-3 1 1 $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee'Must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspeotion. r eceipt No.: Date: Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: z .r„( At, / N s/cc-74K. ) SP cJ S ritC" I Inspector: • Date: / 4 Proje INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tuk WA 98188 c • Type of inspectio t S o urlrc�, rn�- L €p. Sa . r C zNST Address: Date called: & /2 5 Special instructions: Date wanted: <a (ash.) 4 �z4 q7 p:m. � 30 Requester: Phone No.: COMMENTS: A1.11-1c iP�it�. INSPECTION RECORkw" Retain a copy with permit Approved per applicable codes. J yi7 -u' o7 (206) 431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. Dater PERMIT NO. $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: 12/07/1999 12:04: 2065751198' .December 7, 1999 Ms. Brenda Holt, Permit Coordinator City of Tukwila 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Dear Ms. Holt, Sincerely, Larry Meyer Facilities Manager CC: Mark Barbieri Ron Greene .LOWE ENTERPRISES .NW As per our conversation on December 6, 1999 I wish to respectfully request an extension to our deadline in order to conduct the research necessary to comply with your requests in your letters of November 29, 1999. The letters we spoke of pertained to some outstanding inspections of buildings at our Southcenter Corporate Square facility. Specifically addressed was the status of permit numbers D97 -0107, D97 -0108, D97 -0109 and D97- 0110. These permits were issued for cosmetic upgrades to addresses 545, 555, 565 and 575 Andover Park West. Additionally, we realized that similar conditions apply to 360 and 370 Andover Park West (permit numbers D97 -0193 and D97- 0192). During our telephone conversation you indicated that you would be willing to extend our time line to January 10, 2000. This will allow us the time to make contact with contractors who were involved with the project. We thank you very much for your assistance with this matter and wish to comply with Department of Community Development requirements in a timely manner. Lowe Enterprises Northwest, Inc. One Union Square 600 University Street, Suite 2820 Seattle, Washington 98101 Telephone: 623 -0200 FAX: (206) 623-0600 1 A Lowe Enterprises Company RECEIVED CITY OF TUK N ILA D EC - 7 1999 PERMIT CENTER '1 November 29, 1999 Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director Ric Anderson 600 University Street, #2820 Seattle, WA 98101 RE: Permit Status D97 -0107 545 Andover Park West Dear Mr. Anderson: In reviewing our current permit files, it appears that your permit for cosmetic upgrade to building exterior and enhance lobby entrance issued on June 3, 1997 has not received a final inspection as of the date of this letter by the City of Tukwila Building Division. Per the Uniform Building Code and/or Uniform Mechanical Code, every permit issued by the building official under the provision of this code shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building or work authorized by such permit is not commenced within 180 days from the date of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work is commenced for a period of 180 days. Based on the above, if a final inspection is not called for within ten (10) business days from the date of this letter, the Permit Center will close your file and the work completed to date will be considered non - complying and not in conformance with the Uniform Building Code and/or Mechanical Code. Please contact the Permit Center at (206)431 -3670 if you wish to schedule a final inspection. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, ( kVA& NaeiF Brenda Holt Permit Coordinator Xc: Permit File No. D97 -0107 Duane Griffin, Building Official John W. Rants, Mayor 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • (206) 431-3670 • Fax. (206) 431-3665 'stripy :t ° ." .r,..S 'i :3.i ," ' :)i',,': .4i gnu$ ?�,g.7,' 'Y.iw;pr •, .;.2�w ., :'.i.ze"'.u.?,,li 1 le r. 1 ;ryfF'r, s �.o PACIFIC TESTING LABORATORIES September 29, 1997 Certificate No. 712 -71048 Building Inspections CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DEPARTMENT 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Project Name Southcenter Corporate Square Project Address 565 Andover_Park. West__ . 5 Permit No. .. --D97 0107,0108,0109,011..0 - We have completed the requested special inspections on the subject project. Our final report, dated September 2, 1997, is numbered FR 11508. WORK REQUIRED Reinforced concrete (cast in place) Structural steel erection To the best of our knowledge, all work inspected conformed to approved plans, specifications, UBC, and related codes, and /or verbal or written instructions from the Engineer of Record. Reviewed by: John F. Vicente, E.I.T., Manager, Seattle Construction Service Sincerely, James C. Fr na, P.E., Senior Vice esident JCF /jl'v cc: Ron Greene • LOWE ENTERPRISES NW 600 University Place, Suite 2820 Seattle, WA 98101 WORK INSPECTED PTUPSI • 3257 16th Avenue West • Seattle, WA 98119 • Phone 206/282-0666 • Fax 206/282-0710 A Division of I�` 0— `""` : " Construction cemwHno • Uelnowi g • Ulf gn Reinforced concrete (cast in place) Structural steel erection S'(a r Information To wild On 12/21/99'' 11:08 FAX 206 869 5824 Page 5 of 6 Completion Date : THE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW CONFORMS: DRW ► T TO (EVES MANUFACTURER NAME) RECCM ENDID a1STALIATTCN PRhcr'ICES AND SECTION(S) or Irmo Es, INC., REFORT NO. 2 . Address of Structure: Souracei.r•rte CAnsmAta So .+& 54.5 ANboyLf Pry i Err , Tut4wr4..a , WA 1$102. A. Substrate Tyne a.d Tolerance B. EIFS 1. Adhesive and/or Fasteners 2. Insulation 3. I einforci g Fabric 4. Base Coat 5. Finish C. The information entered above is offerers in testimony that the EYFS installation conforms with the EIFS manufacturer's installation methods and procedures, and the ELFS man fac_tur er r s ES report. NOTE; An installation card shall be received frcan the Sealant Installer indicating that the sealant installation conforms with the. EIFS evaluation report and sealant manufacturer's installation methods and procedures must aocoany this declaration. EIFS Contractor Company Name and Address: VERTECS — Eau= A— VEItTEGS. C XPc' .AT1e, (EIFS CONIItACZ t NAM) CCINFare Product C cmccnent Names: 1 • 3 1A r Signature of responsible Officer: `f'`* Typed Name and Tit].�e of Officer: Freeman Bo Vice President Telephone N�anber (41.51 PAS-1990 cc: Original: Building Department (Must be submitted with sealant Copy: EIFS Manufactures installer declaration.) 002 /003 8 Adhesive (a) • Fasteners (meth) hl +N wW o4c. Base Ccat Ga crJL %lS, _ R e i n f O r c i r g F a b r i c l N'C e. Mte b ATE I--ESw Finish Coat(s) SAI1bPEBBLC- FINE 44°°1'12% /99 £ � 11 :08 FAX 208 889 5824 02 L4: to FAX yr" Y"q 8824 Pip. $ et • Coapletian Oita Mame et Striates,: .urn _∎∎•∎••._, - U Signature of responsible Misers 'Mud O Ran � 5 3 f t i x: TaIntigest to 3 (2 SEt ‘IR.Trif SEALArrT'S MOW* - DISH t ME) VERTECS VE*TECS A ._ s:r0031003 rAt58 82 it 002 SEALANT INSTALLID It CONJUNCTION WITH AN VCTERIoRINSULATION AND FINISH, SYSTEM (R S) INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS I•10ICATSD BELOW CONFORMS: TD ( i/ Cr MOM ACID (SLUM '$ )00417 REcONMeNDED =WA= PRACTICES AND sa=31(8) _ , Or IC90 13, WC., Male )b. ,Zi• A'ediet Cto ev tamest Pcires(s) L - 12.6o Swans Surd asa Slant )Sataria:s PC r rfr A. di ck ' ard a Multiunit* instsystisas �} B. details � a ' o imixem ..7.�: ._. c. Warta: ir>sulaeian _ aaraulag's tirtairwanits D. Ms ataxm at u W ! arm is *Mind in testl : eri that ti'is Sealant irwtallatiaz =rams vith the sibilant 's itistatllation methods and prozodurss, arid Os X13 uatiatsootrues uvalvatiat >recctt. Sealant Irataller Owar ,1 aes aid Mime: a$oo_ cc: Origihl : building twartmotit clams ba sulaittal with WI copies: centraet= 4aalaratios+. ) Sealant 94 S11icon E AL. MAN4 �ER. • , Post Fax Note 7671 WM/2W /Z 6 Co./Deot. if go/ D il At Jril MOM WarE2211/11111111 Co. Phone I "one* OM' Cr7to 1 N .7_5" jog Fax s • ' ' • COUGHLINP6 NDIP4 . . , t7V ROPERT gumians. , rnzrz rip;":".73.CF:M,11.1011 PP/Y.00 oZtoz • . 07 / 2 1 - .)Er 4 173 P4 4 09 : 351 • • ••••• r-Witt p 4/1 (.11,0z • .Date: ,; • • Project Record Pages: Memorandum Sent Via Far The general notes state that Masonry sho uld aye special inspection. Because the new masonry construction does not consist of primey structure i elements and the design Cleans STE se low, Coughlin Porter Lundeen doer not require h te ma3cary have spacial inspection. It II acceptable that the allowable strain be half of that of miery with special inspection. 17 you have any questiom yr eGtrunents, CzU me. Eric Dann, F.E. Coughlin rot; Lundeen • IPA cc: :Ron Greene Lowe Enterprises . 575-1/98 • ..4,4,■4 •!. „ • ■;.: July 28;1997 N881 111 S. Jackson Seattle, WA 98104 fax 621 2304 icksort Project ' . ?roj tct No: 97-0025-02 yt Eric A, Cum •;: • , 71 7 pimp. %TO tr." r, ;j :in es • rvi r tea . Met 10. • Souchcertter Corporate Square 'rc:raL P Go-SL!WGL+u�an..aavr.«�.w.,� • CITY OF TUKWILA Department of Community Development Building Division - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila, WA 98188 Telephone: (206) 431 -3670 REVISION SUBMITTAL DATE: 4 - 1E9 /'9 PLAN CHECK/PERMIT NUMBER: " 0/ 7 PROJECT NAME: c_)(-4ce4der S L-^e PROJECT ADDRESS: 9/5 n4/49%e.-4 CONTACT PERSON: ;� 4 PLSa" ) PHONE: 0 gv0 REVISION SUMMARY: AO54 7 Sf) D 47/-i r / 662 jurri SHEET NUMBER(S) "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revisions and date revisions. SUBMITTED TO: CITY USE ONLY Bldg. Planning Fire Public: Works 3/19/96 ev+u sr r uisa s rwcia.;.kim awaweamenetn'.a.ttowe .Aedte+A COUGHLINPORTERL DEEN Project Record Date; To: fax 6212304 Attn: Nick Hendrickson Pages: 1 Memorandum Eric Dann, P.E. Coughlin Porter Lundeen 1„ r V July 28, 1997 NBBJ 111 S. Jackson Seattle, WA 98104 CXPIRES 1/22/33 cc: Ron Greene Lowe Enterprises 575 -1198 Project Southcenter Corporate Square Project No: 97- 0025 -02 By; Eric A. Dann. The general notes state that masonry should have special inspection. Because the new masonry construction does not consist of primary stn.:c`.:ral elements and the design stresses are so low, Coughlin Porter Lundeen does not require that the masonry have special inspection. It is acceptable that the allowable stresses be half of that of massonr/ with special inspection. If you have any questions or comments, please call rne. '717 PIMP c *;; T t1:177. rin cc. i rut. ...+. rot bcri -010% 10( - 01 i o -, r " Dv- o10l Dal -olt Sent. Via Fax • • TOTAL P.oi JJS /sal Cat' City of Tukwila Department of Public Works NOTIFICATION OF UTILITY PERMIT ACTION TO: Permit Center FROM: Public Works Engineering DATE: May 30, 1997 SUBJECT: Southcenter Corporate Square 545 Andover Park West - Building 1 Permit No.: D97 -0107 Contact Person: Ric Anderson Phone: (206) 623 -0200 THE FOLLOWING PUBLIC WORKS PERMITS HAVE BEEN APPROVED FOR ISSUANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PLANS APPROVED ON MAY 30, 1997: CF: Development File (with copy of application and plans) PW Utilities Inspector (with copy of application and plans) Finance Department (with a copy of application) PERMIT FEE Fire Loop (DDCVA Only) $25.00 Storm Drainage $25.00 TOTAL: $50.00 Ross A. Eamst, P. E., Director Two copies of the confirmed Utility Permit Application and plans are attached for inclusion in the permit file. 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 433-0179 • Fax (206) 431 REVISION SUBMITTAL a •107 PLAN CHECK/PERMIT NUMBER: t� - 1 - 01 h I n�eV /� C'O(pcfCL � �1'� U 11 PROJECT NAME: fr4 3c/. c 4) DATE: 5 fa � `1 7 CITY OF Department of Community Development Building Division - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila, WA 98188 Telephone: (206) 431 -3670 PROJECT ADDRESS: CONTACT PERSON: PHONE: REVISION SUMMARY: \ -e1) v SHEET NUMBER(S) "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revisions and date revisions. ngs t RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 1L4- PERMIT CENTER ewe d i n r°1 SUBMITTED TO: 3/19/96 '��4 ''V VI.�; 5;`,'y^7 cF :;.Y; }r; ;';y ai Cl!'i !. n..vf �...b'•..r'"i';' PACI fIC 3025 -112th Avenue N.E. P.O. Box C -97304 Bellevue, WA 98009 -9304 May 19, 1997 Mr. Phil Frazier City of Tukwila Storm Water Engineer 6300 Southcenter Blvd. Tukwila, Washington 98188 Re: Southcenter Corporate Square - Lowe Enterprises File No: 3- 1905 -0102 Dear Mr. Frazier: Our client, Lowe Enterprises, is proposing to upgrade 12 office buildings in the Southcenter Corporate Square business park on the northeast quadrant of the intersection of Andover Park West and Minkler Boulevard. As part of the City's sidewalk ordinance, the Owner is required to upgrade their stormwater system to meet the City's water quality treatment standards. Therefore, we are proposing that seven (7) Type II CB -54" FROP Tee Spill Control devices be installed at the discharge locations, as noted in the enclosed plans. However, there are two locations where the depth of the pipe is shallow (1.08' rim to crown at CB #7 and 2.0' at CB #9A) and therefore makes the installation of a Type II CB with a tee not feasible. Therefore, based on discussion with you on May 19, since an approved structure and treatment device can not be installed, we have elected to not install any structure at these locations. Should further development and/or modification of the parking lot take place at these locations in the future, then a re- construction and lowering of the storm drain line can be considered at that time. On behalf of Lowe Enterprises, please let us know if you have any questions or concerns regarding this issue. I can be reached at (425)828 -2828 or call Ron Greene with Lowe Enterprises at 575 -2120. As you know from previous discussions, Lowe Enterprises is ready to begin construction as soon as permits can be secured, so your prompt response will be appreceiated. Sincerely, W &HPACIFIC, INC. 2 Marc J. Servi i, PE Project Engineer M3S:ntja t pt ojeot19050IO2\wpdata\titylett.wpd enclosures cc: Lowe Enterprises (206) 827 -0220 Fax (206) 822 -5341 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA • MAY 2 0 1997 PERMIT CENTER Dqq= 010 b 7 -otO Dc( - loR Dql - HO Planning • Engineering • Surveying • Landscape Design • Environmental Services • SHEET NUMBER(S) C. C- _ "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revisions and date revisions. Bldg: Planning CITY OF` I UKWILA Y' Department of Community Development Building Division - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila, WA 98188 Telephone: (206) 431 -3670 Fire :. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 0 9 1997 PERMIT CENTER REVISION SUBMITTAL DATE: S /c1 l ? PLAN CHECK/PERMIT NUMBER: D q O) 01 PROJECT NAME: 9c \-\- A C PROJECT ADDRESS: S U ,� (DS, 51 S SST' w&dv'Q✓ Quv 03 -- CONTACT PERSON n k, PHONE: 5 S z- \ Z O REVISION SUMMARY: C n!J j R.) \ \ • �os'Lc S SUBMITTED TO: CITY USE ONLY Public,Wo'rks 3/19/96 May 9, 1997 Hand Delivered City of Tukwilla Department of Public Works 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite. #100 Tukwilla, Washington 98188 RE:. Southcenter Corporate Square (Plan Check No.:D97- 0110) Attn.: Joanna Spencer Lowe Enterprises Northwest, inc. One Union Square 600 University, Suite 2820 Seattle, Washington 98101 Telephone: (206) 623 -0200 FAX: (206) 623 -0600 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 0 9 1997 PERMIT CENTER As requested in the letter dated April 7, 1997 we have addressed the following comments and have inserted a civil drawing into our all ready submitted permit package for buildings 1,2,3 & 4. I have addressed each item below: 1. Please show existing water meters and water service to each building per Tukwilla Municipal Code, each building shall be metered separately. Response: Each building has an existing water meter and service line. Our submitted civil drawing will show meter and service line location and size. 2. Any modifications to the existing irrigation system will require an irrigation permit. Response: We are not making any modifications to the irrigation system. 3. A water quality device will be required for the parking lot storm drainage system unless evidence of an existing and adequate water quality device is submitted. Response: We have identified on the submitted civil drawings from W &H Pacific Engineering (11) out fall catch basins to be retrofitted with a Frop -T Oil water separator or similar device, Our plans also indicate and number each catch basin type and line size for your review. A Lowe Enterprises Company On Greene Project Manager A double detector check valve assembly is required for the fire suppression water lines: cc: Ric Anderson, Lowe Enterprises Northwest, Inc. esponse: Our submitted civil plans indicate the vault location and detail of the double check valve assembly we plan on installing pending approval from Public Works Please call me if you have any questions regarding this letter or the submitted civil drawings. April 22, 1997 Dear Mr. Anderson: City of Tukwila Mr. Ric Anderson Lowe Northwest Investor Properties 600 University Street, #2820 Seattle, Washington 98101 Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director SUBJECT: Development Permit Application Number D97 -0107 NOTICE OF INCOMPLETE APPLICATION Southcenter Corporate Square 545 Andover Pk W John W. Rants, Mayor This letter is to inform you that your permit application received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center on April 3, 1997 was determined to be incomplete. Before your permit application can begin the plan review process the enclosed requirements from the Public Works Department must be met The City requires that four (4) complete sets of revised plans be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal a Revision Sheet must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • (206) 4313670 • Fax (206) 431.3665 Mr. Ric Anderson • April 22, 1997 Page 2 • , , ., .: . , ‘ , • - . . ----,:' ' ' ' •• ''' : If you have any 'questions please contact me - at the City of Tukwila Permit Center. at . Permit , . • • .- ..-,: • , . - /., ',,,:' . - • (206) 431-3672. . . Sincerely, Kelcie J. Peterson Permit Coordinator Enclosure Faxed and mailed to Ric Anderson on April 22, File: D97-0107 PRE97-013 DATE: April 7, 1997 PROJECT NAME: Southcenter Corporate Square - Building 1 PLAN CHECK NO.:D97 -0107 City of Tukwila John W. Rants, Mayor Department of Public Works Ross A. Earnst, P. E., Director PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT COMMENTS PLAN REVIEWER: Contact Joanna Spencer at (206) 433 -0179, if you have any questions regarding the following comments. The City of Tukwila Public Works Department has determined that the plan sets submitted on April 3, 1997 are incomplete due to the fact that the building site plans and utility plans are not combined. To expedite plan review, the following items must be addressed: 1) Please show existing water meters and water service to each building. Per Tukwila Municipal Code, each building shall be metered separately. 2) Any modifications to the existing irrigation system will require an irrigation permit. 3) Awater quality device will be required for the parking lot storm drainage system unless evidence of an existing and adequate water quality device is submitted. 4) A double detector check valve assembly is required for the fire suppression water lines. 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 433 • Fax (206) 431.3665 CITY OF TUKWILA Department of Community Development Building Division - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila, WA 98188 Telephone: (206) 431 -3670 REVISION SUBMITTAL PiqC97- 013 DATE: PLAN CHECK/PERMIT NUMBER: De PROJECT NAME: So O+hc er )+er (1)rpora - / - e. 5 °ai PROJECT ADDRESS: 5H5 Rndov-r P k CONTACT PERSON: PHONE: REVISION SUMMARY: SHEET NUMBER(S) "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revisions and date revisions. SUBMITTED TO: CITY USE ONLY Bldg: Planning Fire' Public.Works 3/19/96 is [t x "N.•• ;a:� "W:r•`,a�!!Fi..:r•, City of Tukwila John W. Rants, Mayor Department of Public Works Ross A. Earnst, P. E. Director PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT COMMENTS DATE: April 7, 1997 PROJECT NAME: Southcenter Corporate Square - Building 1 PLAN CHECK NO.:D97 -0107 PLAN REVIEWER: Contact Joanna Spencer at (206) 433 -0179, if you have any questions regarding the following comments. • The City of Tukwila Public Works Department has determined that the plan sets submitted on April 3, 1997 are incomplete due to the fact that the building site plans and utility plans are not combined. To expedite plan review, the following items must be addressed: 1) Please show existing water meters and water service to each building. Per Tukwila Municipal Code, each building shall be metered separately. 2) Any modifications to the existing irrigation system will require an irrigation permit. 3) A water quality device will be required for the parking lot storm drainage system unless evidence of an existing and adequate water quality device is submitted. 4) A double detector check valve assembly is required for the fire suppression water lines. 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 433.0179 • Fax (206) 4313665 }. APR -08 -97 TUE 08:52 LOWE ENTERPRISES Kelsey Peterson City of Tukwila Fax Transmittal FROM: Ric Anderson Lowe Enterprises Northwest RE: Southcenter Corporate Square Cost Estimates DATE: April 7, 1997 • One union Square 600 university, Suite 2820 Seattle, Washington 98101 Telephone: (206) 623.0200 MX: (206) 023 -0000 Pursuant to your request, 1 have outlined the cost estimates for the improvements relating to our Building Permit Application on buildings 1, 2, 3 & 4. Construction Items Exterior - skin, bridgeways, trash enclosures $70,000 per building Exterior lobby enhancements $15.000 per building Total $85,000 per building Assessed property value 1994 - $20,100,000 $1,675,000 per building 1995 - $19,750,000 $1,645,000 per building 1996 - $11,923,000 $ 993,583 per building Thus, 10% of the 1996 assessed value is approximately $94,000. A Lowe Enterprises Company RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA APR 0 81997 PERMIT CENTER ///:Wn' .14/..6ffeli Zer•Wiellial.hrifirialgef LJD sr Pas :7A1,62/G/1-7 - ,E) . ‘, • x • G -4 ". L2E-- ArreeC / At-77 S n • 1. - 51.49aS- ) fr 4.10 t/A- - SETT - 6;e - 4 AGA A16 E29 /7/EGO " CONG CZMJN�C77 /NS Ll. : 1--/A /4/ # ..s /77 . i ,im Ilk 1 1 J i/Aaai '41, r woo RECEIVED AUG 18 1997 TUKWILA PUBLIC WORKS 3/44' g / -4. ro 81.0GS.. K PA .0 L.00I‹ T _ AI . BY SPRINKLER ORIFICE SIZE. TYPE 1. FINISH SYM REVISIONS SPRINKLERS USED QUAN I TEMP MKI DATE A A CONTRACT NAME: :SOUTHCEA1776 ATRIOT P RE PROTECTION Dep-otoT 20044 48th AVENUE CT. E. TACOMA, WA 98424 FAX (206) 922.6150 TEL (206) 926-2290 PATFUFP099CF DESIGNER DATE SHEET JOB NO. Cg /4/9.7 1 -- °/4COX 1E4 0 _ 87a" ..:.-- • - C7 - 1.&7Ce ½ i / FzAit/GE27:.: • .„ /v6 ED _S'Roc)1.-__:._ A //t./ • • / 6 • • CON C.CE TE" r.EA/S. /OA n as . UP: 7 'I 77:1 - COAfAIC-7 . 70 . .(-7e-E74 jS TALL g ) * LA/OrE : _ GJI-/A /4/ _ VA LV 22REAT -- / 2 5.5 /77 o 4.• RECEIVED AUG 18 1997 TUKWILA PUBLIC WORKS • SPECIFICATION S ET MODEL 876/876V / FEB CO / Bac 1 bow Preve ntion DOUBLE CHECK DETECTOR ASSEMBLY Preve Physical Properties Size of Mainline Max. Working Pressure Hydrostatic Test Press. Temperature Range End Connections Materials Main Valve Body Ductile iron ASTM A536 Grade 65 -45 -12 Coating Fusion epoxy coated internal and external AWWA C550 -90 Shut Off Valves OS & Y resilient wedge AWWA C509 gate valves Trim Bronze ASTM B584 Alloy C83600 Elastomer Discs EPDM Spring Stainless steel Installation Views 18" min 8" min - Grooved End Coupling 18" • min 2 3, 4 ", 6 ", 8 ", & 10" 175 PSI (1200 KPa) 350 PSI (2400 KPa) 32° F to 140° F (0° C to 60° C) Flanged ANSI B16.1 Class 125 12" min WAWA h fP Optional Valve Setter 3 FLOW Standard orientation (Model 8761876V) • Note -Model 876 does not include grooved end coupling. Recommended minimum clearances from permanent structures for ease of testing and maintenance. U.S. Patent No. 4,989,635 • U.S. Patent No. 5,107,888 U.S. Patent No. 5,385,166 • U.S. Patent No. 5,226,441 U.S. Patent No. 5,392,803 • MODEL 876V DOUBLE DETECTOR CHECK (Shown in vertical position) MODEL 876 DOUBLE DETECTOR CHECK 18" min FLOW 18" min Vertical orientation (Model 876V) `Vertical Support Adaptor" \_ Pipe Support (furnished by customer) for valve weight only. •' Adaptor supplied with 876V only. ITEM DESCRIPTION MATERIALS ITEM DESCRIPTION MATERIALS 1 Body A536 GR 65-45-12 14 Flange Gasket Rubber /Fabric 2 Cover A536 GR 65-45-12 15 Bearing Socket Acetal Resin 2.1 0-Ring EPDM ASTM D2000 16 Hex Jam Nut (2 1/2 " -8") 18-8 SS 2.2 Cap Screw Plated Steel Capscrew (10") 18-8 SS 2.3 Hex Nut Plated Steel 17 Washer 302 SS 2.4 Expansion Pin 420 SS 18 Flange Bolt Plated Steel 2.5 Cover (w /o hole) A536 GR 65-45-12 18.1 Flange Nut Plated Steel 3 Seat Ring 8584 Alloy C83600 19 Cover B584 Alloy C83600 3.1 Gasket EPDM ASTM D2000 24 Bolt Plated Steel 4 Arm 8584 Alloy C83600 24.1 Washer Plated Stool 4.1 Bushing -Swing Pin Acotal Resin 25 Bolt Plated Steel 4.2 Swing Pin 304 SS 26 Gasket EPDM ASTM D2000 5 Retaining Clip 302 SS 35 0 -Ring EPDM ASTM D2000 5.1 Retaining Clip 302 SS 35.1 Back -Up Ring Acetal Resin 6 Chock Disk (2 1/2 " -8") EPDM Coated GR, 45 36 Cover B584 Alloy C83600 Ductile Iron with typo 40 Ball Valve B584 Alloy C84400 304 SS stem 41 Nipple Brass Seat Disc (10") Silicone ASTM D2000 42 Gate Valve (NRS) AWWA C509 6.1 Disc Holder (10" Only) ASTM A743 304 SS 43 Bulkhead Fitting B584 Alloy C83600 6.2 Disc Retainer (10" only) ASTM A743 304 SS 43.1 Bulkhead Fitting B584 Alloy C83600 6.3 Capscrew (10" only) 18-8 SS 7 Load Pin 304 SS 45 Gasket EPDM ASTM D2000 8 Lwr Spring Retnr B584 Alloy C83600 45.1 Gasket EPDM ASTM 02000 9 Spring Stem 304 SS 46 Washer B36 Alloy 260 9.1 Electric Stop Jam Nut 18-8 SS 46.1 Washer 836 Alloy 260 10 Spring A313 Type 631 SS 47 Nut B584 Alloy C83600 10.2 Spring Shim Acotal Rosin 47.1 Nut B584 Alloy 083600 10.3 Spring Shim Acotal Resin 60 Identification Plato 836 Alloy C26000 11 Spring Guido 8130 Alloy C22000 61 Identification Plate B36 Alloy 026000 12 Upr Spring Rotnr 8584 Alloy C83600 62 Drive Screw Stainless Stool 12.1 Bushing -Spr. Stem Acetal Rosin 70 Clamp (876V ONLY) AWWA C606 13 Pivot Bearing B585 Alloy C83600 00 CD 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 MID ®® • 0©0 0 00 00 00 00 0 00 sin :� = , Mil A III 0 0 000 I — , IMO z w a. 0 A 0 O 0 z W O 41 40 Materials of Construction Model 876/876V Standard Orientation Note: The Model 876V is shipped in the standard (N- Shape) orientation as shown below. Model 876 does not include grooved end coupling. grooved end - 9 J coupling :1E111 III -I I I- '1741l 11,;,11111 r ' Dimensions Model 876V Vertical Orientation [[ :t,��•�uL 1$ : :'Y T---r itr.•) I .7-1,'-';1 Fy` 0fi • K frn '4y FUT O O " " . ° 0 " p "/ El NET OS&Y "WT SIZE A B C Full Open F G K M Approximate 2 1/2" 12 1/2 25 3/4 24 1/4 16 3/8 16 5/8 6 1/4 13 5/8 27 1/4 230 3" 12 1/2 25 3/4 24 3/4 22 1/4 16 5/8 6 1/4 14 1/8 28 1/4 300 4" 14 27 7/8 26 3/4 23 1/4 17 3/4 7 15 1/2 31 330 6" 16 32 1/4 32 1/4 30 1/8 21 5/8 8 18 5/8 37 1/4 520 8" 18 1/2 37 1/2 36 3/8 37 3/4 24 3/4 9 1/4 20 3/4 41 1/2 860 10" 21 42 1/2 40 3/4 48 27 1/2 10 24 48 1460 Weights do not include risers or optional valve setter. Note: Dimensions shown are nominal. Allowances must be made for normal manufacturing tolerances. Refer to Specification Sheet SS VS for details on valve setter. OS & Y Side View Options ❑ Valve Setter with MJ x FL or FL x FL ends Model 876V Sizes 2 -10" • ASSE • ANSI /AWWA C510 -89 • CSA B64.5 • FM* • UL** 20 18 7 EL 14 N 12 010 I 2 20 _18 N16 14 a 12 0 10 a N 6 I 4 2 20 _18 to 16 d 14 H 12 50 100 150 200 GPM 0 100 200 300 400 GPM A- Vertical orientation (model 876V) 6-Standard orientation (model 876) Model 876 Sizes 2 -10" • ASSE • ANSI /AWWA C510 -89 • CSA B64.5 Sizes 2 -8" • Approved by the Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research at the University of Southern California. Model 876/876V Flow Curves 2 1/2" 250 300 350 400 3" 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 GPM 411 500 600 Flow Orientation Standard orientation is inlet flow vertical up, outlet flow vertical down. Vertical orientation is inlet and outlet flow vertical up. Agency Compliance 700 800 Sizes 4,6, & 10 • FM` • UL** 14 —12 a 10 vl • 8 0 - 6 10 4 I 2 14 _ -12 a 10 I,1 • 8 0 j 6 1 4 v I 2 n 10 0 8 6 B 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 GPM A 0 500 1000 1500 GPM 1000 2000 3000 GPM RECEIVE!) CMB Industries, Inc. P.O. Box 8070 • Fresno, California 93747 • Fax: (209) 453 -9030 TUKWILA SS 876/876V 2/96 876- 876V.PM5 PUBLIC WORKS Application Non - Health Hazard Fire Sprinkler Systems "Less gate not FM approved. "Less gate not UL listed unless installed with UL listed gated valves. 2000 2500 6" 8" 10" 3000 4000 5000 The 6 ", 8" and 10" flow curves (B only) include the FEBCO valve setter model 611. AUG 1 8 199? — c ;p p rt Li G L G L COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN A CON5UL1NG STRUCTURAL AND CNLBJGNEERNG CORPORATION Structural Calculations for the Southcenter Corporate Square Building Remodels NBBJ February 27,1997 Project 97- 0025 -02 EXPIRES 1/22/99 I CITY OF TUKWILA APPROVED JUN 3 1997 nu i%I1i w BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA APR 0 31997 PERMIT CENTER Dq� — OICfI ihro tql- 01 I l7 3 •DE51G1.1 MASonIR•( CoLuMPJ 1 N ■1:6 g 1 %C �j •- �' / 9.6- II r Ai I oveRTvkNHNIS MortEi.rr nue m kiIIso (?)( In:( .S)( K•5 / + •S DE.Sio.1 O x le 1 P5F 567 lb ► '0E51 tol Ss' 5 M I C LOAD . 63x2.75 3 � Cc1N SF,>NAT w e A LTev►J A-71V EL = ( ?5)01. o}( WY- 3) ' ,228 kJ u5a; - , 27S W be5161.1 WINO LoAD (1►4x,b2( .4') , 143it'SF • IN 2 e.516n! SAIL AREA = [(5.1:35/01) + -)(e.5)1= 15.25 -P t COLUmtJ Z + Foece _ (05 U IS PS 56i2 , (6 ( II . 54v Lh 4.2 W oVeRTUR►J►1J& F'toME:N i nu6 To seismic .275g 562Y1 1 ►5) + (54o)(g.Bxg,Sf 5.813 Ib • 4 Project: SouTH CENTER CoAP. SsvAR E Designed By: EA P Date: Z • 2 7.97 Project No. Client N 613'5 COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN A CONSULTING STRUCTURAL APO CIVIL ENGINEERING CORPORATION Checked By: Sheet 1 of It 217 Put STFEET•SUITE 520•SEATTLE. WA 9801• P206/343•0460•F206 /343.5691 P.11 f 47. L. Proiect: Project No. Client • ' •.‘•. , • COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN A CONSULTING STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERING CORPORATION .Foo : - • -- - 54,1 l42.. - 581 3 0-t- 1 '‘ Sok. PeeS5uk EAC1totJ tt... 1 assve 65YISSY1,5) S .13 ivr I 15 14 59/7 ( 6. A) 2A P5 F 517)( 3 ) / goo 60 tim-1 e e c c..11? P. SQuIU Designed By: PAD Date: 2.. 27 4 17 Checked By: Sheet 2— of IS 217 P*€ STFEET. SUITE 520 .SEAT TLE WA 9801 • P206/313•0460 F286/343-5691 COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN A CONSULTING STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERING CORPORATION _ NvMr3EaS sL' el o1 r g Project No. i / 1 �.`...._ 3��x tb) - .5xy U. 1 4 5-re-SL C� - IE�iC • SE15M1c.- 33x 1,'S ,Y 10.2) 505tAA C ot:Ff't Ct SO\ 110 - Ford e 1D4 M 1.5 KI In Client % 1.4)(. 61) DI , = lb 1 iRu (2. ,3x1.0, W = . loW Project.: onk C CoY? CNT2 tit) (2.5) + (a.151 ziB) z. Z - 35 tb, + (.413 K, I n) ti)` (, 33x10, pt , b(4.$)• -__i. 1 tJ S ti t3X 21) 3 '{ pLF 6 )( 3,9 ) 2. o k>>uD bov awl d ( k d. ?.5) (6x ` 5) : 13 3 (3)(Z.1,ax,Y.dITO \ ( 3 2 'i) z octet 't'P. A= I" Designed By: g. AD Date: 3.7. 97 t Checked By: Sheet 3 of 211 PINE STPEET•SUITE 520.SEATTI.E. WA 98101 •P•206i343.0460 •F2O6 /343.5691 E 1 E E 3 L 8 COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN A CONSULTING STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERING CORPORATION tik,A0sis • AgeA" . I' 5.36 rz - 4 Try' -114 . Y 1/4 11)) . R p5 f '7 - 2. 3 4 / p $TR e5 le 4.75 50 PO' (AMA L .46 g . e S - P e- t) LOS S. 10 11 It •*7 2 muss c5 .51Atiz) k. 3.0 2.. S2 2_ Project: s ou TER coe f 0 RAfl ScuAR e Designed By: EAD Date: 3.1/. 97 Project No. Client N551 Checked By: Sheet 4 of 1 el 211 PinE STFEET.SWE 520•SEATTLE WA 9601.P206/343-0460. P2061343•5691 f' L r i. r t lL E I ;;; E L Li r 6 e RISA -3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, #520 Seattle, WA 98101 Southcenter Corporate Square Bridge Roof Analysis Units US Standard Steel Code AISC 9th Edition ASD Allowable Stress Increase Factor 1.333 Include Shear Deformation Yes Include Warping Yes No. of Sections for Member Caics 5 Do Redesign Yes P -Delta Analysis Tolerance 0.50% Vertical Axis Y Joint No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Joint No 1 6 Material Label TS Section Label TS3.5 TS1.75 X K /in Reaction X Coordinate ft 0.000 6.750 13.500 20.250 27.000 30.500 0.000 6.750 13.500 20.250 27.000 30.500 Young's Modulus Ksi 29000.00 < Joint Coordinates > Y Coordinate ft 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6.500 6.500 6.500 6.500 6.500 6.500 z Coordinate ft 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 < Boundary Conditions > Translation + + Y z K /in K /in Reaction Reaction Reaction Reaction TS TS < Sections > Database Material As As Shape Label Area yy zz in "2 3.09 1.2 1.2 1.19 1.2 1.2 < Materials > Shear Poisson's Thermal Modulus Ratio Coef. °F 11154.00 0.3000 0.65000 I yy in "4 5.29 1.78 Job : 97- 0025 -07 Page: 14 Date: 3/11/97 Joint Temperature Weight Density K /ft3 0.490 OF 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Rotation + ex ey ez K- ft /rad--- K- ft /rad--- K- ft /rad - -- Yield Stress Ksi 46.00 I Torsion zz J in "4 in "4 - -- 5.29 1.00 0.45 1.00 of tg t -4 t BLC No. 1 RISA -3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, #520 Seattle, WA 98101 Southcenter Corporate Square Bridge Roof Analysis x Axis Section End Releases Offsets Inactive? K Rotate Set I: MMM J: MMM I -End J -End 4 Length xyzxyz - xyzxyz - - -in in ft 1 1 2 TS3.5 6.75 2 2 3 TS3.5 6.75 3 .3 4 TS3.5 6.75 4 4 5 TS3.5 6.75 5 5 6 TS3.5 3.50 6 .7 8 TS3.5 6.75 7 8 9 TS3.5 6.75 8 9 10 TS3.5 6.75 9 10 11 TS3.5 6.75 10 11 12 TS3.5 3.50 11 1 7 TS1.75 6.50 12 2 8 TS1.75 6.50 13 3 9 TS1.75 6.50 14 4 10 TS1.75 6.50 15 5 11 TS1.75 ' 6.50 16 6. 12 TS1.75 Al1PIN Al1PIN 6.50 Member No Joints J 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 8 7 8 9 8 9 10 9 10 11 10 11 12 11 1 7 12 2 8 13 3 9 14 4 10 15 5 11 16 6 12 Job : 97- 0025 -07 Page: 15 Date: 3/11/97 < Members > < AISC Parameters > Memb Joints Lb Lb K K Cm ' Cm Sway No I J yy zz Lcomp yy zz yy zz Cb y z ft ft ft < Basic Load Case Data > Basic Load Case Load Type Totals Description Nodal Point. Dist. _ 5 __ } r L• E r E ,_ EL 1.: L e RISA -3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, *520 Seattle, WA 98101 Southcenter Corporate Square Bridge Roof Analysis < Member Distributed Loads, BLC 1 > ___ Member Joints Load Pattern Pattern Number I J Label Multiplier 6 7 8 UNIFORM 7 8 9 UNIFORM 8 9 10 UNIFORM 9 10 11 UNIFORM 10 11 12 UNIFORM Pattern Label UNIFORM 1 No. Description BLC Fac BLC Fac BLC Fac Joint + No. X in 1 0.000 2 0.000 3 0.001 4 0.001 5 0.001 6 0.001 7 0.091 8 0.091 9 0.090 10 0.090 11 0.089 12 0.089 < Load Magnitudes Dir Start K/ft,F Y -0.050 1 1 Patterns > Dynamics Input: Number of Modes 3 Load Combination Number 1 Acceleration of Gravity...: 32.20 ft /sec "2 Convergence Tolerance 0.001 Converge Work Vectors No < Joint Displacements, Translation + + Y Z in in - 0.000 0.000 - 0.898 0.000 -1.405 0.000 - 1.2.73 0.000 - 0.534 0.000 - 0.000 0.000 -0.001 0.000 -0.899 0.000 - 1.405 0.000 -1.274 0.000 -0.534 0.000 -0.001 0.000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 Job : 97- 0025 -07 Page: 16 Date: 3/11/97 Locations End Start End K /ft,F ft or % ft or % - -- -0.050 0.000 0.000 < Load Combinations > BLC Fac BLC LC 1 : > Rotation X Rotate Y Rotate rad rad 0.00000 ' 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 RWPE Fac SSdv Z Rotate rad - 0.01076 - 0.00917 - 0.00244 0.00540 0.01132 0.01339 - 0.01108 - 0.00908 - 0.00246 0.00539 0.01139 0.01338 7 or 19 Bridge Roof Analysis RISA -3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, #520 Seattle, WA 98101 Southcenter Corporate Square _ -= c Story Drift, LC 1 : > __________ Story + - -- X Direction - - -+ + - -- Y Direction - - -+ + - -- Z Direction - - -. No. Joint Drift % of Ht Joint Drift % of Ht Joint Drift % of Ht in in in No Stories Defined... Joint + Forces + .+ Moments + No. X Y Z Mx My Mz K K K K -ft K -ft K -ft 1 -0.00 0.76 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 6 0.00 0.76 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Totals: -0.00 1.52 0.00 Center of Gravity Coords (X,Y,Z) (ft) : 15.250, 6.500, 0.000 c Member Section Forces, LC 1 : > - Member Joints Shear Shear Moment Moment No. I - J Sec Axial y -y z -z Torque y -y z -z K K K K -ft K -ft K -ft - -- 1 1- 2 1 -0.25 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.81 2 -0.25 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.28 3 -0.25 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.25 4 -0.25 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.78 5 -0.25 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.31 2 c Reactions, LC 1 : > Job : 97- 0025 -07 Page: 17 Date: 3/11/97 3 1 -0.45 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.64 2 -0.45 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.85. 3 -0.45 4 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 - 1.06 4 -0.45 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.27; 5 -0.45 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.48 3 3- 4 1 -0.49 -0.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.37' 2 -0.49 -0.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 - 1.30; 3 -0.49 -0.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 - 1.24` 4 -0.49 -0.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.17 5 -0.49 -0.04 0.00 0.00' 0.00 -1.11 4 4- 5 1 -0.32 -0.21 0.00 0.00 0.00 - 1.65 2 - 0.32... -0.21 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.29 3 -0.32 -0.21 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.93 4 -0.32 -0.21 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.57 5 -0.32 -0.21 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.21 5 5- 6 1 0.00 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.26 2 0.00 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.94 3 0.00 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.63 4 0.00 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.31 5 0.00 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.00 6 7- 8 1 0.25 0.45 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.82 1 6 Bridge Roof Analysis RISA -3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, #520 Seattle, WA 98101 Southcenter Corporate Square < Member Section Forces, LC 1 : > ==- =_as == Member Joints Shear Shear Moment Moment No. I - J Sec Axial y -y z -z Torque y -y z -z K K K K -ft K -ft K -ft - -- 2 0.25 0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.13 3 0.25 0.28 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.41 4 0.25 0.20 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.81 5 0.25 0.11 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.07 7 8- 9 1 0.45 0.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.41 2 0.45 0.22 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.84 3 0.45 0.13 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.14 4 0.45 0.05 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.29 5 0.45 -0.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.30 8 9- 10 1 0.49 0.13 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.19 2 0.49 0.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.34 3 0.49 -0.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.33 4 0.49 -0.13 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.19 5 0.49 -0.21 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.91 9 10- 11 1 0.32 -0.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.45 2 0.32 -0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.32 3 0.32 -0.21 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.04 4 0.32 . -0.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.62 5 0.32 -0.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.06 10 11- 12 1 0.00 ' -0.23 0.00 2 0.00 -0.27 0.00 3 0.00 -0.32 0.00 4 0.00 -0.36 0.00 5 0.00 -0.40 0.00 11 1- 7 1 2 3 4 5 12 2 8 1 2 3 4 5 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.19• 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 -0.25 - 0.25 -0.25 -0.25 -0.25 - 0.20 - 0.20 -0.20 -0.20 -0.20 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 ' 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Job : 97- 0025 -07 Page: 18 Date: 3/11/97 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 13 3 9 1 0.16 -0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.11 2 0.16 -0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.05 3 0.16 -0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 0.16 -0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.05 5 0.16 -0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.11 - 1.11 - 0.89 -0.63 - 0.33 - 0.00 - 0.81 - 0.40 0.00 0.41 0.82 - 0.67 - 0.33 - 0.00 0.33 0.66 vF 19 ■■• 14 4- 10 1 2 3 4 5 15 16 2 1 2 3 4 5 -0.15 -0.15 -0.15 -0.15 -0.15 RISA -3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, #520 Seattle, WA 98101 Southcenter Corporate Square Bridge Roof Analysis - _______ _ < Member Section Forces, LC 1 . >_____ Member Joints Shear Shear No. I - J Sec Axial y -y z -z K K K 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Moment Torque y -y K -ft K -ft 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Job : 97- 0025 -07 Page: 19 Date: 3/11/97 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 11 1 0.15 0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 0.15 0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 0.15 0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 0.15 0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 0.15 0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 12 1 0.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 0.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 0.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 0.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 0.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 =_ = = = = == Moment z -z K -ft - -- 0.55 0.27 0.00 -0.27 - 0.55 1.04 0.52 - 0.00 - 0.52 - 1.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 _ < Member Stresses, LC 1 : > Member Shear Shear + Bending + No. Sec Axial y -y z -z y -top y -bot z -top z -bot Ksi Ksi ' Ksi Ksi Ksi Ksi Ksi-- - 1 1 -0.08 0.12 0.00 - No Calc - 2 -0.08 0.12 0.00 3 -0.08 0.12 0.00 4 -0.08 0.12 0.00 5 -0.08 0.12 0.00 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 ... 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 1 -0.16 -0.01 0.00 2 -0.16 -0.01 0.00 3 -0.16 -0.01 0.00 4 -0.16 -0.01 0.00 5 -0.16 -0.01 0.00 4 1 -0.10 -0.08 0.00 2 -0.10 -0.08 0.00 3 -0.10 -0.08 0.00 4 -0.10 -0.08 0.00 - No Calc- - No Calc- - No Calc- 10 OF kg RISA -3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, #520 Seattle, WA 98101 Southcenter Corporate Square < Member Stresses, LC 1 : > 'Member Shear Shear + Bending + No. Sec Axial y -y z -z y -top y -bot z -top z -bot Ksi Ksi Ksi Ksi Ksi Ksi Ksi-- - 5 -0.10 -0.08 0.00 5 1 0.00 -0.14 0.00 2 0.00 -0.14 0.00 3 0.00 -0.14 0.00 4 0.00 -0.14 0.00 5 0.00 -0.14 0.00 6 1 0.08 0.17 0.00 2 0.08 0.14 0.00 3 0.08 0.11 0.00 4 0.08 0.08 0.00 5 0.08 0.04 0.00 7 1 0.15 0.12 0.00 2 0.15 0.08 0.00 3 0.15 0.05 0.00 4. 0.15 0.02 0.00 5 0.15 -0.01 0.00 8 1 0.16 0.05 0.00 2 0.16 0.02 0.00 3 0.16 -0.02 0.00 4 0.16 -0.05 ' 0.00 5 0.16 -0.08 0.00 9 1 0.10 -0.01 0.00 2 0.10 -0.05 0.00 3 0.10 -0.08 0.00 4 0.10 -0.11 0.00 5 0.10 -0.15 0.00 10 1 0.00 -0.09 0.00 2 0.00 -0.11 0.00 3 0.00 -0.12. 0.00 4 0.00 • -0.14 0.00 5 0.00 -0.16 0.00 11 1 0.38 -0.25 0.00 2 0.38 -0.25 0.00 3 0.38 -0.25 0.00 4 0.38 -0.25 0.00 5 0.38 -0.25 0.00 12 1 2 0.16 -0.21 0.16 -0.21 0.00 - No Calc- - No Calc- - No Calc- - No Calc- - No Calc- - No Calc- - No Calc- 0.00 - No Calc Job 97- 0025 -07 Page: 20 Date: 3/11/97 \1 OF IS RISA -3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, #520 Seattle, WA 98101 Member No. Sec Axial Ksi 3 0.16 4 0.16 5 0.16 13 1 2 3 4 5 14 1 2 3 4 5 15 1 2 3 4 5 16 1 2 3 4 5 Member + No. Sec 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 2 3 4 5 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34 x in 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0%000 0.001 0.001 e Member Stresses, LC 1 > Shear Shear y Ksi - 0.21 -0.21 - 0.21 - 0.03 - 0.03 -0.03 - 0.03 - 0.03 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.00 0.00 ' 0.00 0.00 0.00 in 0.000 - 0.228 -0:465 - 0.694 - 0.898 - 0.898 - 1.073 -1.220 - 1.332 -1.405 3 1 0.001 -1.405 z -z Ksi 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Translation ++ z in 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 y -top Ksi - No Calc- - No Calc- - No Calc- - No Calc- Member Deflections, LC 1 : > Rotation x Rotate 'y Rotate rad rad 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 Job : 97- 0025 -07 Page: 21 Date: 3/11/97 Bending y -bot z -top Ksi Ksi 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 + z -bot Ksi - -- z Rotate rad---- 6 -0.01162 - 0.01164 - 0.01082 -0.00917 - 0.00917 - 0.00798 - 0.00646 - 0.00462 - 0.00244 0.000 0.00000 0.00000 - 0.00244 1Z OF RISA -3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, #520 Seattle, WA 98101 Southcenter Corporate Square Bridge Roof Analysis < Member Deflections, LC 1 > Member + Translation ++ No. Sec x y z in in in 2 0.001 -1.432 0.000 3 0.001 -1.419 0.000 4 0.001 -1.365 0.000 5 0.001 -1.273 0.000 4 1 0.001 -1.273 2 0.001 -1.139 3 0.001 -0.964 4 0.001 -0.758 5 0.001 -0.534 5 1 0.001 -0.534 2 0.001 -0.410 3 0.001 -0.278 4 0.001 -0.140 5 0.001 0.000 6 1 0.091 -0.001 2 0.091 -0.235 3 0.091 -0.473 4 0.091 - 0.699. 5 0.091 -0.899 7 1 0.091 . -0.89 2 0.090 -1.074 3 0.090 -1.222 4 0.090 -1.334 5 0.090 -1.405 8 1 0.090 -1.405 2 0.090 -1.435 3 0.090 -1.422 4 0.090 -1.367 5 0.090 -1.274 9 1 0.090 -1.274 2 0.090 -1.142 3 0.090 -0.968 4 0.090 -0.761 5 0.089 -0.534 10 1 0.089 -0.534 2 0.089 -0.410 3 0.089 -0.278 4 0.089 -0.141 5 0.089 -0.001 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Job : 97- 0025 -07 Page: 22 Date: 3/11/97 Rotation x Rotate y Rotate rad rad 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 z Rotate rad - - -- - 0.00033 0.00169 0.00360 0.00540 0.00540 0.00774 0.00950 0.01070 0.01132 0.01132 0.01223 0.01287 0.01326 0.01339 - 0.01108 - 0.01181 - 0.01157 - 0.01059 - 0.00908 - 0.00908 - 0.00807 - 0.00648 - 0.00454 - 0.00246 - 0.00246 - 0.00044 0.00169 0.00371 0.00539 0.00539 0.00760 0.00949 0.01083 0.01139 0.01139 0.01221 0.01284 0.01324 0.01338 9 0 1s 5 -0.534 16 1 0.000 2 -0.000 3 -0.000 4 -0.001 5 -0.001 -0.001 - 0.032 - 0.045 - 0.058 -0.090 - 0.001 0.025 - 0.045 - 0.115 - 0.090 -0.001 0.067 - 0.046 - 0.159 - 0.089 - 0.001 -0.023 -0.045 -0.067 - 0:089 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 a.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0_.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 < Member Section Torsion, LC 1 : > Member Joints Torsion Warp Shear No. I - J Sec Torque Shear y -y z -z K -ft Ksi Ksi • Ksi 1 1- 2 1 0.00 0.00 - No Warping - 2 0.00 0.00 3 0.00 0.00 4 0.00 0.00 Job : 97- 0025 -07 Page: 23 Date: 3/11/97 Rotation y Rotate rad 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 4 z Rotate rad - - -- - 0.01076 0.00011 0.00368 - 0.00005 - 0.01108 - 0.00917 - 0.00021 0.00280 - 0.00016 - 0.00908 - 0.00244 - 0.00098 - 0.00050 - 0.00099 - 0.00246 0.00540 - 0.00193 - 0.00438 - 0.00194 0.00539 0.01132 - 0.00267 - 0.00733 - 0.00264 0.01139 - 0.00113 0.00250 0.00612 0.00975 0.01338 Warp Bending z -top z -bot Ksi Ksi - -- 14 or \ Bridge Roof Analysis r L RISA -3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, #520 Seattle, WA 98101 Southcenter Corporate Square Member Joints No. I - J Sec Torque K -ft 5 0.00 3 1 2 3 4 5 4. 1 2 3 4 5 4- 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 5- 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7- 8 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 8 9- 10 1 2 3 4 5 9 10- 11 1 2 c Member Section Torsion, LC 1 : > Torsion Warp Shear Shear y -y Ksi Ksi 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00' 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0:00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 z -z Ksi No Warping - - No Warping - - No Warping - - No Warping - - No Warping - - No Warping - - No Warping - 0.00 0.00 - No Warping - 0.00 0.00 Job : 97- 0025 -07 Page: 24 Date: 3/11/97 Warp Bending z -top z -bot Ksi Ksi - -- 1S or 18 '�1 RISA -3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, #520 Seattle, WA 98101 Southcenter Corporate Square Bridge Roof Analysis < Member Section Torsion, LC 1 : > ________ Member Joints Torsion Warp Shear Warp Bending No. I - J Sec Torque Shear y -y z -z z -top z -bot K -ft Ksi Ksi Ksi Ksi Ksi-- - 3 0.00 0.00 4 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 10 11- 12 1 0.00 0.00 2 0.00 0.00 3 0.00 0.00 4 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 11 1- 7 1 2 3 4 5 12 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 8 1 0.00 0.00 2 0.00 0.00 3 0.00 0.00 4 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 - No Warping - - No Warping - - No Warping 13 3- 9 1 0.00 0.00 - No Warping - 2 0.00' 0.00 3 0.00 0.00 4 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 - 0.00 14 4- 10 1 0.00 0.00 - No Warping - 2 0.00 0.00 3 0.00 0.00 4 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 15 5- 11 1 0.00 0.00 - No Warping - 2 0:00 0.00 3 0.00 0.00 4 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 16 6- 12 1 0.00 0.00 - No Warping - 2 0.00 0.00 3 0.00 0.00 4 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 Job : 97- 0025 -07 Page: 25 Date: 3/11/97 lb or 19 Fs RISA-3D (R) Version 2.00 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen 217 Pine Street, *520 Seattle, WA 98101 Southcenter Corporate Square Bridge Roof Analysis < Member AISC Unity Checks, LC 1 P! 'Member Joints Unity Shear Fb Fb Cm Cm t. • No. I - J Chk Loc Chk Loc Fa yy zz Cb yy zz Eqn. Ksi Ksi -Ksi 1 1 2 - Unity check not calculated - F7 2 • 2 3 - Unity check not calculated - 3 3 4 - Unity check not calculated - 4 4 5 - Unity check not calculated - .5 5 6 - Unity check not calculated - i., 6 • 7 8 - Unity check not calculated - 7 8 9 - Unity check not calculated - [ • 8 9 10 - Unity check not calculated - 9 10 11 - Unity check not calculated - • • 10 11 12 - Unity check not calculated - 11 1 7 - Unity check not calculated - • E 13 3 9 - Unity check not calculated - 12 2 8 - Unity check not calculated - 14 4 10 - Unity check not calculated [ 15 5 11 - Unity check not calculated 16 6 12 - Unity check not calculated Section Set 1st Choice Redesign not performed.... < Redesign Shapes, LC 1 : > Suggested Alternate Shapes 2nd Choice 3rd Choice Job : 97-0025-07 Page: 26 Date: 3/11/97 4th Choice = • z < Material Takeoff, LC 1 > . == Section Database Total Total , Set Shape Length Weight ft K , TS3.5 61.00 0.64 TS1.75 39.00 0.16 , , 1 V1 of I 2) • • .; • .• • 1". • • , ' • • , .• . .• • • . ' • ./ ": • thvoeg piwa (1.4 6. Or E.JT ThJ .-- 2 r-66 TO (A,4 4 m 9xl,si = `id ' ( 60(q.$) a. c Apr, c t I I Is' (4 40i 1.., lb " 1 Igo + loS + s ' k' 02. e' 7 (i6Y1s) " 00" .016.5 cts.czbidez = k =-- f "if ( is) s a eLF get..w oS" /7 FL. cow W JALL 190 PLF 4 10 300 ft. r • 01(2'7 Project: Project No. 40t rri46E t•J COO Saknk Client N f3t3 COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN A CONSULTING STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERING CORPORATION Designed By: Al P-.D Date: 3. 12 .1 7 Checked By: Sheet of i 217 Pot STREET•surre 520•SEATTLE. WA 980 • P206/343-0460 • P2061343•5691 SPECIFICATIONS FOR: Proposed Facilities Improvements and Remodel of outhcenter Corporate Square Tukwila, Washington Owner: Lowe Enterprises Northwest, Inc. 600 University Street, Suite 2820 Seattle WA 98101 Prepared by: NBBJ Architects 111 S. Jackson St. Seattle, WA 98104 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen Structural Engineers 217 Pine Street, Suite 520 Seattle, WA 98101 Sperling Electrical Engineers 720 Olive Way, Suite 1100 Seattle, WA 98101 RECEIVED Job No. 24646.00 cm OF TUKWIU% March 31, 1997 APR 0 3 1997 PERMIT CENTER • CITY OF TUKWILA •APPROVED JUN 3 1997 • • BUILDING DIVISION W1 R LI i 4 h t , JR, STATE OE ASHINGT L .-------- ". q010 +hry OciliP0110 • Division 03300 03450 Division 05120 05500 05721 Division 06100. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE. TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS' Section Number,: Title :PRODUCT:SPECIFICATIONS 'Division 2 - Sitework 02070 Selective Demolition 02513 Asphalt Concrete Paving 3 - Concrete Cast -In -Place Concrete Architectural Precast Concrete .Division' : 4 - Masonry 04230 Reinforced Unit Masonry 5 - Metals Structural Steel Metal Fabrications Building Address Numerals 6 - Wood: and Plastics Rough Carpentry Division .7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07180 Water Repellents 07240 Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems 07250 Sprayed -On Fireproofing 07275 Firestopping 07460 Siding 07525 Built -Up Roofing Repairs 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07820 Translucent Panel Skylights 07900 Joint Sealers Division 8 - Doors and Windows 08415 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront 08700 Builders' Hardware 08800 Glass and Glazing Division 9 - Finishes 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09311 ' Ceramic Mosaic Tile 09680 Carpet 09900 Painting .Division 10 - Specialties Not Used Division 11 - Equipment Not Used Division 12 - Furnishings Not Used Division 13 Special Construction Not Used 24646.00 00010 - 1 SOU'THCENTER CORPORATE' SQUARE "TUKWILA, .WASHINGTON SECTION 00010 • TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 15 - Mechanical Division 16 - Electrical 16010 General Provisions . 16030 Testing 16100 Basic Materials and Methods 16110 Raceways 16120 Conductors and Terminations 16500 Lighting 16930 Lighting Control Equipment . 16999 Project Closeout END OF SECTION 24646.00 00010 - 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Section Includes: 1. The work includes selective demolition within the existing buildings. 2. The general extent of selective demolition work is indicated on the drawings where new construction interfaces with existing building. 3. Elsewhere within the existing building, the drawings do not necessarily indicate items which are required to be removed; however, drawings of these areas do show new rooms and new area layouts, new finishes, etc.; based on new construction shown within existing building, Contractor shall determine the extent of selective demolition to accommodate the new work. 4 The Contractor is responsible for determining scope and extent of demolition in order to allow for remodeling as shown on the Drawings. Specific demolition notes are indicated on the Drawings which are in addition to the General Contractors required scope to accommodate the new work. 5. Contractor is warned that there may be unknown alterations and unforeseen or unknown conditions above existing ceilings, behind existing wall furring, below concrete floor slabs, and within existing walls, and partitions. 6. Refer to Electrical drawings and specifications for additional requirements. 7 Demolition work includes protection of existing construction to remain, as well as removal and disposal of demolished materials 8 Demolition work includes saw cutting exterior concrete. Use double cutting technique to prevent spalling. B. Salvage: Owner will mark and retain salvageable items as determined with the Contractor. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable requirements of rules, regulations, laws, ordinances of governing authorities. B. Cutting and Patching: Do not cut and patch work exposed on the building exterior or in it's occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, result in lessening the building aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut and patch work. Saw cut exterior concrete so that intersecting cuts meet precisely without cut extending beyond corner. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Occupancy: Owner may be occupying areas of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Coordinate with Owner. Conduct demolition work in a manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal operations. B. Existing Building Exits: Contractor's materials and activities shall not block any exit or impair floor to floor separation while the building is occupied. 24646.00 02070 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION C. Partial Removal: Items of salvaged value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from site as they are removed. Storage of removed items on site will not be permitted. D. Fire Protection: All practical measures shall be taken to ensure fire protection during all phases of the work. This shall include expediting construction of fire division walls, temporary cross hallway fire stop at the division walls, and securing the building from unauthorized entry. No flammable liquids, welding /cutting equipment, or compressed gases shall be used, except under specific Fire Department Permit and approval from the Owner. E. Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition. 1. Provide protective measures as required to ensure free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of the building. 2. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished, and adjacent facilities or work to remain. 4. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. 5. floors with suitable coverings when necessary. 6. Construct temporary dust proof partitions to separate areas where noisy or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dust proof doors and security locks, if required. 7. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces, and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing buildings 8. Remove protections at completion of work and restore effected finishes. F. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work at no cost to Owner. G. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure minimum interference with streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close, block or otherwise obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. H. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect against damage during demolition operations. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction and the Owner. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities. 24646.00 02070 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide all materials, equipment, tools, and methods required for the completion of demolition work as indicated and specified hereinafter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be performed. Document existing conditions of structure, surfaces, equipment or to surrounding properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition work; file with Owner prior to starting. 3.2 PREPARATION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support of building components to prevent movement or collapse during demolition. Cease operations and notify the Owner immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. B. Erect and maintain dust -proof partitions and closures as necessary to prevent spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building. 1. Where selective demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct dust -proof partitions. 2. Provide weather -proof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work. 3.3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING ROOFING MATERIALS A. Remove existing roofing materials as indicated down to substrate. Schedule work in such a manner so as to maintain the waterproof integrity of the building at all times. If required, provide temporary roofing in order to maintain the waterproof integrity of the building. B. Remove asphalt which remains on the existing substrate. The extent of removal shall be such to enable maximum penetration of asphalt primer and complete adhesion of the new roofing system. C. Dispose of materials collected in the removal operations. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated or required. B. Contractor shall first remove gypsum wallboard from existing walls to be removed, ceiling tiles, gypsum wallboard from existing ceilings to be removed to allow inspection of existing plumbing, HVAC ducts and other mechanical and electrical items. 1. After mechanical and electrical items have been uncovered, Contractor shall notify the Owner if there are any questions or if it is unclear as to the future status of these items (ie. remove, cap or reroute). 24646.00 02070 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA 'WASHINGTON SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION • • Where partitions are 'designated or required to be , remoyedremoveelil doors, frames, relites , equipment and associated mechanical and electrical items. Patch floors, walls, columns, and ceilings to remain where they intersect with ' walls to be removed. Patch, repair, or ,inf existing suspended ceiling grids 'which are designated or , • ' required to be removed. , - Remove wall base from walls and columns wherever walls intersect areas Scheduled to receive new carpet. . • • . _ . unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elenients,:which conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and : measure both nature and extent of conflict. Submit report to Owner. in written, accurate detail. Pending, receipt of directive from ' Owner, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary continue overall job progress without , delay. 3,5 • REMOVALS A. . Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition, operations from building on a daily. basis . - _Transport and legallIv: dispose of material off - _ 24646.00 02070 - 4 t is r. 1.L L 1_ i 1 'PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 02513 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING A. Section Includes: 1. Asphalt concrete paving /patching. 2. Traffic markings. 3. Extruded curbs. A. Asphalt Mix: Submit proposed job -mix formula for the bituminous mixture, or certificate showing compliance with specifications. B. Certificates: Furnish material certificates for asphalt signed by the materials producer certifying compliance with specified requirements. A. Qualifications: Work is subject to the following qualifications. 1. Producer /Installer: Provide materials produced by bulk asphalt concrete producer regularly engaged in the production of hot -mix, hot -laid asphalt concrete. Installer must be experienced in the installation of asphaltic concrete paving with adequate plant, equipment, and personnel for the completion of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Base Materials for Asphalt Concrete Paving: Provide aggregate base course materials in accordance with WSDOT standard specifications and as follows. 1. Asphalt: In accordance with WSDOT Standard Specification, Section 5 -04, Class "B" mix. Asphalt shall be viscosity grade AR -4000. B. Hot Tack: AR4000 or AR8000 Tack. C. Tack Coat: CSS -1 in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specification, Paragraph 9- 02.1(6). Apply to all vertical surfaces to which "ACP" abuts. D. Extruded Cement Concrete Curbs: In accordance with WSDOT Standard Specification, Section 8 -04.3 (1)A. E. Other Materials: Provide all accessory and incidental materials, equipment, tools, and methods required for completion of work. F. Pavement Striping: Provide zone and traffic markings in accordance with Pittsburgh Paint Specification #14d, "Traffic and Zone Marking Paint 11 Line ". Apply in 2 coats at 5.0 MWF per coat. Color to match existing striping. 24646.00 02513 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 PAVING INSTALLATION 3.3 PAVEMENT PATCHING SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 02513 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING A. General: Remove all existing fill, debris, vegetation, and other perishable materials from areas to be paved. Bring areas requiring fills to rough grade elevations. Install wood headers and benders to true lines as indicated and securely staked to prevent movement or displacement during paving operations. Remove upon completion. B. Aggregate Base Course: Place in accordance with the requirements of WSDOT Standard Specification Section 4 -04 and to the thickness shown or to match existing depth, whichever is greater. Materials shall be graded and compacted in 4 -inch maximum layers to at least 98 percent of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method D. A. Tack Coat: All contact surfaces, curbs and cold pavement joints shall be painted with asphalt emulsion before the surfacing is laid. All longitudinal and transverse joints shall be fully compressed by the spreading machine and be free from surface irregularities. B. Asphalt Concrete Paving: Provide asphalt concrete, Class B, consisting of mineral aggregate, uniformly mixed with bituminous material in a central plant. Provide all labor, equipment and materials required to complete the work. All asphalt concrete pavement work shall conform to the requirements of WSDOT Standard Specification, Paragraph 5 -04.3. Use minimum of 3- to 5 -ton roller . for asphalt patches. C. Surface Smoothness: The completed surface shall not vary more than 1/8" from the lower edge of a 10 -foot straightedge on the surface. Depressions exceeding 1/4" shall be corrected. A. Patching Bituminous Pavement: Replace the existing pavement with Class "B" asphalt concrete pavement and compacted aggregate base course to the same thickness as the existing "ACP" and base, except the minimum replacement pavement section shall be 2 inches of "ACP" on 6 inches of compacted aggregate base. 3.4 EXTRUDED CEMENT CONCRETE CURB INSTALLATION A. Extruded curbs: Provide extruded concrete curbs in sizes and configurations shown; install per drawings. 3.5 TRAFFIC MARKINGS A. Traffic Markings: The pavement striping and stall markings shall be in accordance with the drawings. Apply paint when the surface to receive paint is clean and dry. The lines shall be laid out accurate and uniform and neat and sharp. All contaminants within the area to receive paint shall be removed. Paint shall be applied in one or more coats in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including coverage and drying time between coats. Any visual "show through" of the asphalt surface painted will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 24646.00 02513 - 2 PART 1'- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast -in -place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 2. Formwork accessories. 3. Form stripping. 4. Reinforcing steel for cast -in -place concrete. 5. Cast -in -place concrete, including concrete for the following: a. Foundations, footings. b. Slabs on grade. c. Foundation walls. 6. Integral colored concrete. 7. Concrete curing. 8. Concrete sealing. 1.2 DEFINITIONS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Unexposed Finish: A general -use finish, with no appearance criteria, applicable to all formed concrete concealed from view after completion of construction. Exposed Finish: A general -use finish applicable to all formed concrete exposed to view and including surfaces which may receive a paint coating (if any) . 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals: Submit to the Owner the following information related to quality assurance requirements specified: 1. Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete operations begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been selected. a. For mix designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results, standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f'c calculations. b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results, and graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f'c. c. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete. d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required. 2. Certifications: Provide certification from an independent testing agency that mechanical connectors for reinforcing steel comply with specified requirements. 3. Submit batch tickets complying with ASTM C 685 or delivery tickets complying with ASTM C 94, as applicable, for each load of concrete used in the work. 4. Cold weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 5. Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following documents, except where requirements of the contract documents or of governing codes and governing authorities are more stringent: 1. ACI 301. 24646.00 03300 - 1 2. ACI 318. 3. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings. 1. • Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or rust. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weathertight location. Maintain accurate records of shipment and use. C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile. D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold- Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the Owner of planned protective measures including but not limited to heating of materials, heated enclosures, and insulating blankets. B. Hot- Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the Owner of planned protective measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during mixing, placement during evening to dawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing, shading, and windbreaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA,.WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Facing Materials: 1. Unexposed finish concrete: Any standard form materials that produce structurally sound concrete. 2. Exposed finish concrete: Materials selected to offer optimum smooth, stain -free final appearance and minimum number of joints. Provide materials with sufficient strength to resist hydrostatic head without bow or deflection in excess of allowable tolerances, and as follows: a. Overlaid plywood: PS -1 "B -B High Density Concrete Form Overlay," Class I. 24646.00 03300 - 2 ,.J t B. Formwork Accessories: 1. Form coating: Form release agent that will not adversely affect concrete surfaces or prevent subsequent application of concrete coatings. 2. Metal ties: Commercially manufactured types; cone snap ties, taper removable bolt, or other type which will leave no metal closer than 1 -1/2 inches from surface of concrete when forms are removed, leaving not more than a 1- inch - diameter hole in concrete surface. 3. Fillets: Wood or plastic fillets for chamfered corners, in maximum lengths possible. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where otherwise indicated: 1. ASTM A 615, Grade 40. B. Provide mechanical connections for reinforcement splices of the type indicated and capable of developing at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength of the bar when tested in tension and compression. C. Provide end bearing splices complying with ACI 318 and of the type indicated. D. Reinforcing Accessories: 1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16 -1/2 gage or heavier. 2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." a. Class 1 (plastic protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to weather. b. Class 1 (plastic protected) or Class 2 (stainless steel protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to view but not to weather. c. Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of concrete or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be cast against earth. Concrete masonry units will not be accepted. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows: 1. Type I, except where other type is specifically permitted or required. a. Type I may be replaced by Type III (high early strength) for concrete placed during cold weather. B. Water: Potable. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE C. Aggregates: 1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33. a. Class 5M. 2. Maximum size of coarse aggregates, whichever is least: a. One -fifth narrowest dimension between sides of forms. b. One -third of depth of slabs. c. Three - fourths of minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars or between bars and side of form. d. Columns and piers: Two - thirds of minimum clear distance between bars. D. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride ions by weight of cement are prohibited. 24646.00 03300 - 3 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with other mix components. 1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Air Mix "; The Euclid Chemical Company. b. "Sika -Aer "; Sika Corporation. c. "Micro- Air "; Master Builders, Inc. d. "Darex AEA "; W. R. Grace & Co. e. "Burke 2001" or "Burke 2002 "; The Burke Company. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "WRDA Hycol "; W. R. Grace & Co. b. "Eucon WR -75 "; The Euclid Chemical Company. c. "Pozzolith Normal "; Master Builders, Inc. d. "Plastocrete 161 "; Sika Corporation. e. "Prokrete N "; Master Builders, Inc. (former Conchem product). Water - Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Pozzolith Retarder "; Master Builders, Inc. b. "Eucon Retarder 75 "; The Euclid Chemical Company. c. "Daratard -17 "; W. R. Grace & Co. d. "Plastiment "; Sika Corporation. e. "Protard "; Master Builders, Inc. (former Conchem product). H. Water- Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E. I. High -Range Water - Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G. 1 Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "WRDA 19" or "Daracem -100 "; W. R. Grace & Co. b. "PSP Superplasticizer"; Master Builders, Inc. (former Conchem product). c. "Sikament 300 "; Sika Corporation. d. " Eucon 37 "; The Euclid Chemical Company. e. "Rheobuild "; Master Builders, Inc. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107. 1. Type: Provide metallic type only. 2. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Metallic type: (1) "Vibro -Foil Neutral ";. A. C. Horn, Inc. (2) "Metallic Spec. Grout "; The Burke Company. (3) "Embeco 885 "; Master Builders, Inc. (4) "Hi -Mod Grout "; The Euclid Chemical Company. (5) "Ferro- Grout "; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. (6) "Supreme Plus "; Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Nonmetallic type: (1) "Masterflow 928 "; Master Builders, Inc. (2) "Sonogrout 14k "; Sonneborn Building Products 03300 - 4 (3) (4) (5) SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Division /ChemRex, Inc. "Euco N -S Grout "; The Euclid Chemical Company. "Crystex "; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "588 Grout "; W. R. Meadows, Inc. B. Color Pigments: Frank D. Davis, L. M. Scoffield, or approved synthetic mineral oxide, sunlight and alkali -fast, conforming to ASTM C979, and certified to be resistant to lime and other alkalies and be compatible with other admixtures specified. 1. Colors: a. "CONC -1 ": Davis "Light Gray ". b. "CONC -2 ": Davis "Taupe ". C. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth. D. Moisture - Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows: 1. Curing paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap - polyethylene sheeting. E. Bonding Compound: Non - redispersable acrylic bonding 1059, Type II. F. Epoxy Bonding Systems: ASTM C 881; type, grade, and for project conditions. G. Concrete Sealer: Prosoco "Enviroseal 20 ", or approved. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN 24646.00 03300 - 5 admixture, ASTM C class as required A. Review: Do not begin concrete operations until proposed mix has been reviewed by the Owner. B. Proportioning of Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with recommendations of ACI 211.1. C. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on the basis of either field experience or trial mixtures as specified in ACI 301, and proportion mixes accordingly. If trial mixtures method is used, employ an independent testing agency acceptable to the Owner for preparing and reporting proposed mix design. D. Specified compressive strength f'(c) at 28 days: 2500 psi. E. Admixtures: 1. Air - entraining admixture: Use in mixes for exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise specifically indicated. Add at rate to achieve total air content in accordance with Table 1.4.3 of ACI 201.2. For concrete not exposed to exterior, add at rate to achieve total air content between 2 percent and 4 percent. a. Do not use in slabs -on -grade scheduled to receive topping, unless manufacturer of topping recommends use over air - entrained concrete. 2. Water - reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability. 3. Water - reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F. 4. Water - reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. 5. High -range water- reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Add as required for placement and workability. 6. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved. F. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to Owner is involved, Contractor may submit for Owner's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur. Include laboratory test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests. 2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD C. 2.7 A. A. Slump: A tolerance of up to 1 inch above approved design mix slump will be permitted for 1 batch in 5 consecutive batches tested. Concrete of lower slump than that specified may be used, provided proper placing and consolidation is obtained. B. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1 -1/2 percent of approved design mix air content will be allowed for field measurements. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances. CONCRETE MIXING On -Site Equipment: Mix concrete materials machine mixer, in compliance with ASTM C 6 1 -1/2 minutes and maximum of 5 minutes Clean thoroughly at end of day and before B. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of ASTM C 94. 1. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. 2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION B. C. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 in appropriate drum type batch 85. Mix each batch minimum of before discharging concrete. changing concrete type. A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The Contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its timely removal. Earth Forms: Earth forms are not permitted. Design: Design and fabricate forms for easy removal, without impact, shock, or damage to concrete surfaces or other portions of the work. Design to support all applied loads until concrete is adequately cured, within allowable tolerances and deflection limits. D. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by contract documents, with all elements properly located and free of distortion. Provide for necessary openings, inserts, anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required. 1. Joints: Minimize form joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of concrete. a. Align joints symmetrically at exposed conditions. 2. Chamfers: Provide chamfered edges and corners at exposed locations, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. Permanent openings: Provide openings to accommodate work of other trades, sized and located accurately. Securely support items built 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE into forms; provide additional bracing at openings and discontinuities in formwork. 4. Temporary openings: Provide temporary openings for cleaning and inspection in most inconspicuous locations at base of forms, closed with tight- fitting panels designed to minimize appearance of joints in finished concrete work. E. Tolerances for Formed Surfaces: Comply with minimum tolerances established in ACI 117, unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings. F. Release Agent: Provide either form materials with factory - applied nonabsorptive liner or field- applied form coating. If field- applied coating is employed, thoroughly clean and recondition formwork and reapply coating before each use. Rust on form surfaces is unacceptable. 3.2 CONNECTION TO EXISTING CONCRETE A. Preparation: At locations where new concrete is to join existing concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with wire brush' and applying bonding compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Doweled Connections: At locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels with premanufactured cardboard sleeves. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified. B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which adversely affect bond with concrete. C. Placement: Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required for protection. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Provide Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. Do not field -bend partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved. 1. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. Tack welding of reinforcing is not permitted. 2. Wire fabric: Install in maximum lengths possible, lapping adjoining pieces not less than one full mesh. Offset end laps to prevent continuous laps in either direction, and splice laps with tie wire. D. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on drawings. If construction joints are not indicated, locate in manner which will not impair strength and will have least impact on appearance, as acceptable to the Owner. 1. Keyways: Provide keyways not less than 1 -1/2 inches deep. 2. Reinforcement: Continue reinforcement across and perpendicular to construction joints, unless details specifically indicate otherwise. B. Control Joints: Construct contraction joints in slabs poured on grade to form panels of sizes indicated on drawings, but not more than 15 feet apart in either direction. 1. Use tooled joints with 1/4 -inch round at all exterior slabs. 03300 - 7 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 3 6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set anchorage devices and other items required for other work connected to or supported by cast -in -place concrete, using templates, setting drawings, and instructions from suppliers of items to be embedded. 1. Edge Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screeds as necessary to achieve final elevations indicated for finished slab surfaces. A. Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete. B. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed. 1. Wood forms: Moisten immediately before placing concrete in locations where form coatings are not used. C. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows: 1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints. 2. Provide construction joints if concrete for a particular element or component cannot be placed in a continuous operation. 3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation. D. Placement in Forms: Limit horizontal layers to depths which can be properly consolidated, but in no event greater than 24 inches. 1. Consolidate concrete by means of mechanical vibrators, inserted vertically in freshly placed concrete in a systematic pattern at close intervals. Penetrate previously placed concrete to ensure that separate concrete layers are knitted together. 2. Vibrate concrete sufficiently to achieve consistent consolidation without segregation of coarse aggregates. 3. Do not use vibrators to move concrete laterally. E. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned construction joints. 1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items, using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable to Owner. 2. Strike off and level concrete slab surfaces, using highway straightedges, darbies, or bull floats before bleed water can collect on surface. Do not work concrete further until finishing operations are commenced. F. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before concrete has cured. 1. Do not use frozen or ice -laden materials. 2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates. G. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R when ambient temperature before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or when combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind speed are such that the rate of evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 24646.00 03300 - 8 L pounds per square foot per hour. 1. Do not add water to approved concrete mixes under hot weather conditions. 2. Provide mixing water at lowest feasible temperature, and provide adequate protection of poured concrete to reduce rate of evaporation. 3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork and reinforcing steel immediately prior to placing concrete. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Repairs, General: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. 1. Remove honeycombed areas and other defective concrete down to sound concrete, cutting perpendicular to surface or slightly undercutting. Dampen patch location and area immediately surrounding it prior to applying bonding compound or patching mortar. 2. Before bonding compound has dried, apply patching mixture matching original concrete in materials and mix except for omission of coarse aggregate, and using a blend of white and normal portland cement as necessary to achieve color match. Consolidate thoroughly and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Repair tie holes and patch defective areas. Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas exceeding 1/4 inch height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. 1. Smooth rubbed finish: Apply to surfaces indicated no later than 24 hours after form removal. a. Wet concrete surfaces to be finished and rub with Carborundum brick or other abrasive until uniform color and texture are achieved. b. Do not apply separate grout mixture. 2. Contiguous unformed surfaces: Strike smooth and float to a similar texture tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and other unformed surfaces adjacent to or contiguous with formed surfaces. Continue final finish of formed surfaces across unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specifically indicated. 3.8 FINISHING SLABS A. Finishing Operations - General: 1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement. 2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R. 3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic. 4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. 5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4 -inch indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness. 6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. 7. Troweling: Trowel immediately following final floating. Apply first troweling with power trowel except in confined areas, and apply subsequent trowelings with hand trowels. Wait between 24646.00 03300 - 9 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE trowelings to allow concrete to harden. Do not overtrowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over it. Consolidate concrete surface by final troweling operation. Completed surface shall be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and within surface tolerance specified. B. Coordinate appearance and texture of required final finishes with the Owner before application. C. Broomed Float Finish: After floating and when water sheen has practically disappeared, apply uniform transverse corrugations approximately 1/16 inch deep, without tearing surface. D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Follow trowel finishing operation immediately with fine brooming to achieve slightly scarified surface. E. Colored Finish: 1. Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer for intended service and color. 2. Apply trowel finish to complete installation. 3. Apply curing compound recommended by color pigment manufacturer immediately after final finishing. Do not use moisture cover or moisture curing methods. F. Slab Surface Tolerances: 1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains and to adjacent areas. Provide positive drainage to drainage areas. 2. Floated finishes: Depressions between high spots shall not exceed 5/16 inch under a 10 -foot straightedge. 3. Troweled finishes: Achieve level surface plane so that depressions between high spots do not exceed the following dimension, using a 10 -foot straightedge: a. 1/8 inch. G. Slab Finish Schedule: Apply finishes in the following typical locations and as otherwise shown on the drawings: 1. Broomed float: a. Sidewalks. b. Exterior slabs not otherwise scheduled. 2. Trowel and fine broom: a. Exposed interior floors not otherwise scheduled. 3. Colored finish: In locations shown on the drawings. H. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows: 1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days. 2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the Owner. 3. Crazed or cracked areas: Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts. Dampen exposed concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix, place, compact, and finish patching concrete to match adjacent concrete. 4. Isolated cracks and holes: Groove top of cracks and cut out holes not over 1 inch in diameter. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound; place dry pack or proprietary repair compound acceptable to Owner while bonding compound is still active: 24646.00 03300 - 10 3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE a. Dry -pack mix: One part portland cement to 2 -1/2 parts fine aggregate and enough water as required for handling and placing. b. Install patching mixture and consolidate thoroughly, striking off level with and matching surrounding surface. Do not allow patched areas to dry out prematurely. I. Concrete Sealing: Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. A. General: 1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold or hot temperatures until concrete has cured. 2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service conditions and type of applied finish in each case. B. Curing Period: 1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes. 2. Not less than 4 days for high early strength concrete using Type III cement. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. 1. Keep wooden or metal forms moist when exposed to heat of the sun. 2. If forms are removed prior to completion of curing process, continue curing by one of the applicable methods specified. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry. 2. Keep continuously moist for not less than 3 days by uninterrupted use of any of the following: a. Water ponding. b. Water - saturated sand. c. Water -fog spray. d. Saturated burlap: Provide 4 -inch minimum overlap at joints. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. a. Moisture - retaining cover: Lap not less than 3 inches at edges and ends, and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive. Repair holes or tears during curing period with same tape or adhesive. Maintain covering in intimate contact with concrete surface. Secure to avoid displacement. (1) Extend covering past slab edges at least twice the thickness of slab. (2) Do not use plastic sheeting on surfaces which will be exposed to view when in service. 4. Continue final curing to end of curing period. E. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period. F. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air in excess of 5 degrees F per hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust protective measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface. A. Non - Load - Bearing Formwork: Provided that concrete has hardened 24646.00 03300 - 11 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS 3.12 CONCRETE REPAIRS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA; WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE sufficiently that it will not be damaged, forms not actually supporting weight of concrete or weight of soffit forms may be removed after concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours. Maintain curing and protection operations after form removal. A. Fill -in: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades after such work is in place. Place such fill -in concrete to blend with existing construction, using same mix and curing methods. A. Perform cosmetic repairs of concrete surfaces as specified under concrete application. B. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of the Owner for method and procedure, using epoxy bonding systems. The Owner's approval is required for repair methods using materials other than those specified. 3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31. 1. Take samples at point of discharge. 2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein at point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same frequency at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used for acceptance of concrete. B. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per batch. 1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94. C. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test per strength test performed on air - entrained concrete. D. Concrete Temperature: 1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below. 2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above. 3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. 1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test required. 2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as- delivered concrete: a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis. b. Minimum frequency: (1) One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. (2) One set per 3500 square feet of slab or wall area or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. (3) When less than 5 cubic yards is placed in one day, the Owner may, at Owner's option, waive laboratory testing of specimens if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. (Molding and curing of these specimens is not waived.) (4) When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete 24646.00 03300 - 12 • 1 1 WOR 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE during the project, conduct testing from not less than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5. c. Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is required. d. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens. If one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the test result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such evidence, discard the test result and inform the Owner. e. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required. f. Strength potential of as- delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of the following criteria are met: (1) No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. (2) Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified compressive strength f'(c). (3) Average of any 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds specified compressive strength f'(c). Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action when strength results for field -cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test values for companion laboratory -cured specimens. F. Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to Owner and Contractor within 24 hours of test. 1. Test reports shall contain the following data: a. Project name, number, and other identification. b. Name of concrete testing agency. c. Date and time of sampling. d. Concrete type and class. e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work. f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods. 2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at Owner's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 3. The testing agency shall make additional tests of in -place concrete as directed by the Owner when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete characteristics have not been attained. a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or tests as directed. b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the Contractor when unacceptable concrete has been verified. END OF SECTION 03300 - 13 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Precast concrete caps. 2. Connection devices. 3. Grout packing. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE. SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL. PRECAST CONCRETE B. Products furnished but not installed under this section: 1. Anchors for connecting precast concrete elements to structural framing. C. Related Sections: 1. Cast -in -place concrete: Elsewhere in Division 3. 2. Joint sealers: Division 7. 3. Precast Concrete Painting: Section 09900. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include complete information essential to proper fabrication and installation of precast units. Show dimensions, fabrication tolerances, and reinforcement sizes and locations, including locations and types of lifting devices required. 1. Show location of precast units and identification of each, corresponding to planned sequence of installation. 2. Designate welded connections by means of standard AWS symbols. 3. Provide locations and details of anchorages for installation in other work; furnish templates if required for accuracy. 4. Provide design calculations prepared by a professional structural engineer registered in the State of Washington. B. Samples: Precast concrete panels not less than 12 inches square, illustrating finish color, quality, and texture. 1:3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, except where exceeded by other requirements of the contract documents or of governing authorities: 1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 318. 3. ANSI /AWS D1.4. 4. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 5. PCI MNL -116. 6. PCI MNL -117. B. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. Not less than 5 years of successful experience in fabrication of units similar to those required for this project, and sufficient capacity to produce required units without causing construction delay. 2. Producer member of the Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI). 24646.00 03450 - 1 C. Fabrication Requirements: 1. Design units to support loads indicated and as required by applicable code requirements. 2. Site - produced units are acceptable if procedures and conditions for quality control are maintained equivalent to plant production. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER.CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE Erector Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years of experience in the successful erection of precast units comparable to those specified. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. General: Construct forms accurately: to size, mortar - tight, and of sufficient strength to withstand all fabrication operations without distortion of precast units. B. Tolerances: Maintain formwork to provide finished units within fabrication tolerances specified in PCI MNL -116. C. Facing Materials, General: Provide form facings of metal, plastic, or other nonreactive material that will produce required concrete finish. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed except where plain bars are indicated. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain cold - drawn. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, plain cold -drawn steel. D. Reinforcing Accessories: 1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16 -1/2 gage or heavier. 2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specification of CRSI's Manual of Standard Practice. a. Class 1 (plastic protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to weather. b. Class 1 (plastic protected) or Class 2 (stainless steel protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to view but not to weather. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows: 1. Type I or Type III, except where other type is specifically permitted or required by the contract documents. B. Aggregates: 1. Normal weight: ASTM C 33. C. Water: Potable. D. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride ions by weight of cement are prohibited. E. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures specified. 03450 - 2 L. A. Deliver precast concrete units to ensure continuity of installation. Store to prevent damage such as cracking, distortion, or staining, and to maintain visibility of markings. Handle and support units using only designated lift points and lifting devices. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade C. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE F. Water- Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2.4 CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Steel Welding Plates: ASTM A 283; Grade C, structural quality. B. Steel Finish: Hot -dip galvanize after fabrication components that will be exposed to weather, in accordance with ASTM A 153. Components that are cast into precast units and exposed to view but not to . weather may be cadmium coated, electro- galvanized, or hot -dip galvanized. Other steel components may be coated with fabricator's standard rust inhibitor paint. D. Miscellaneous Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts. E. Accessories: Hangers, clips, and other items required for installation of precast units and support of related construction. 2.5 GROUT MATERIALS A. Cement Grout: One part portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I) to 3 parts clean, natural sand (ASTM C 404), mixed with minimum amount of water for hydration and placement. 2.6 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. General: Prepare design mix of concrete on the basis of experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. B. Review: Do not begin concrete production until proposed reviewed by the Owner. C. Mix: Design mix to achieve properties of concrete as follows: 1. Compressive strength: 4000 psi minimum at 28 days. D. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to Owner is involved, Contractor may submit for Owner's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur. Include laboratory test data substantiating performance characteristics with mix adjustment requests. either field mix has been E. Admixtures: 1. Air - entraining admixture: Use in accordance with ACI 301 for maximum size of coarse aggregate. 2. Water - reducing admixtures: Use in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions and in amounts suitable for weather conditions prevailing at time of placement. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate architectural precast concrete units in compliance with PCI MNL -117. Adequately reinforce units to resist stresses due to transporting and handling. B. Site Casting: Use ready -mixed concrete complying with ASTM C 94 for units produced at the project location. 1. Do not add water to concrete with insufficient slump. 2. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. 24646.00 03450 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 3. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. C. Built -in Anchorages: Locate accurately and secure to formwork. Position to avoid interference with main reinforcement or placement of concrete; do not relocate without the Owner's approval. D. Openings: Cast openings with minimum dimension of 10 inches or larger. Smaller openings may be field cut as required, with the Owner's prior approval. E. Release Agent: Provide either form materials with permanent factory - applied nonabsorptive liner or form coating. If form coating is used, thoroughly clean and recondition formwork and reapply coating before each use. Rust on form surfaces is unacceptable. F. Reinforcement: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which adversely affect bond with concrete. Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required for protection, and accurately position, secure, and support against displacement. Set wire ties completely embedded in concrete without contact with or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. G. Concrete: Place continuously for each unit, complying with requirements of ACI 304. Consolidate concrete by vibration while avoiding damage to or dislocation of reinforcement, anchorages, and built -in accessories. H. Identification: Mark units to identify pickup points and final orientation, corresponding to final shop drawings. Imprint fabrication date on each unit in concealed location. I. Architectural Finish: Fabricate exposed faces of architectural precast concrete units to achieve finish as follows: 1. Smooth, off - the -form finish, free of pockets, sand streaks, and other surface blemishes. 2. Match Owner's control samples. J. Provide as -cast or float finish for surfaces which will be concealed. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Non - Conforming Work: Replace precast concrete units which do not conform to specified requirements, as directed by the Owner, and pay for corrections to other work necessitated by such replacement. 1. Dimensions: Precast concrete units smaller than allowed by specified tolerances will be rejected. Units larger than specified tolerances will be rejected if they interfere with other construction or if, in the opinion of the Owner, the appearance of the work is adversely affected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with erection recommendations of PCI MNL -127. Provide temporary shoring, bracing, and connections as required to maintain stability of structure and precast units during construction, arranged to avoid interference with subsequent precast unit installation. 24646.00 03450 - 4 L t. 3.3 CLEANING 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE Anchor Bolts: Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly. Set precast units accurately, using wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. After tightening anchor bolts and ensuring that members are plumb, grout solidly between plates and bearing surfaces. C. Bolting: At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nut. •D. Erection Tolerances: Do not exceed tolerance limits specified in PCI MNL-127. Grouting Joints: Grout open joints after precast units have been placed, properly aligned, and permanently secured in position. Use formwork if required to avoid leaks and maintain grout in proper position until it has cured. Strike off unformed grout surfaces flush with adjacent surfaces. Do not allow grout to dry prematurely. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Conduct inspections, perform testing, and make repairs or replace unsatisfactory precast units as required. The Owner may reject architectural precast panels for any of the following reasons: 1. Specified tolerances exceeded. 2. Damage to panels. 3. Surface finish deficiencies in exposed faces. 4. Other defects as listed in PCI MNL-117. A. Clean exposed faces of precast units after all joint treatment has been completed, following recommendations of precast fabricator. • Provide protection to adjacent surfaces which could be damaged by cleaning materials or methods END OF SECTION 03450 - 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1 A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Precast concrete trim: Division 3. 2. Joint sealers: Division 7. ,, 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit published data from manufacturers of products and accessories specified, indicating compliance with requirements. B. Verification Samples: Submit mock -up panels comprised of the following actual materials; include no fewer than four masonry unit samples displaying extremes of color and texture variation to be anticipated in the completed construction: 1. Decorative concrete masonry units. 2. Include mortar and grout samples as part of submittal. 1.3 A. Source Control: Obtain exposed masonry units from one manufacturer, with texture and color uniform or of a uniform blend acceptable to the Owner. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1 ._ • A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means which will prevent mechanical damage and deterioration due to moisture, temperature changes, and contamination by other materials. 1. Provide protection which will limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units to the maximum percentage specified for Type I units at a relative humidity which is normal for the project site. J B. Protect cementitious materials from precipitation and absorption of ground moisture. C. Store masonry accessories to prevent corrosion, dirt accumulation, and L other deterioration. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS - A. Construction Protection: Cover tops of incomplete masonry elements with waterproof sheet material at end of each work day and when masonry work is not under way. 1. Secure weather protection in place with weights or by use of temporary fasteners. 2. Immediately remove mortar, soil, and other such materials from exposed masonry faces to prevent staining. ` 3. Prevent splashing and soiling of masonry near ground level by L spreading sheet material to cover soil or masonry faces. 4. Protect horizontal masonry elements from mortar droppings. t 1 24646.00 QUALITY ASSURANCE SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 042'30 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON. SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Loading Protection: Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours, or concentrated loads for at least 3 days, after completion of masonry elements. Cold Weather Protection: Do not lay masonry units when outside air temperature is below 40 degrees F. 1. Grouted construction: On any day when minimum anticipated nighttime temperature is 32 degrees F or less, in addition to complying with general procedures above, heat grout materials to 90 degrees F to produce in -place grout temperature of not less than 70 degrees F at end of work day. Retain protective blankets or enclosures for not less than 48 hours. a. Period of protection may be reduced to 24 hours when Type III portland cement is used for grout. 2. Water: Do not heat water for mortar or grout to more than 160 degrees F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY .UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards for types required, and as follows: 1. Special shapes: Provide special block types where required for corners, control joints, headers, lintels, and other special conditions, whether or not specifically indicated on the drawings as special. a. Outside corners: Bullnose units except where otherwise indicated. 2. Hollow load- bearing units: ASTM C 90, and as follows: a. Type I: Moisture - controlled units. b. Medium weight. c. Exposed faces: Special color and texture, as follows: (1) Wilamette Grey Stone "Goldenrod ", P7489, 2'. (a) Finish: Special aggregate, ground finish. 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Type III may be substituted during cold - weather construction. 2. Provide portland cement of color required to produce approved mortar sample. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. Colored mortar aggregates: Ground stone, in colors required to match exposed faces. D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. E. Water: Potable. F. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for cold weather mortar mixes, in proportion recommended by manufacturer. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 40, deformed, except as specifically indicated otherwise. 24646.00 04230 - 2 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 24646.00 04230 - 3 1. Bending: Reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. 2. Galvanized reinforcing bars: ASTM A 767, Class I, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and bending. a. When bars are cut after galvanizing, coat the sheared ends with a zinc -rich coating. B. Joint. Reinforcement and Anchorage Materials: Comply with the following general requirements for materials required in joint reinforcement and anchorage devices: 1. Steel wire: ASTM A 82. a. Hot -dip galvanizing (after fabrication): ASTM A 153, Class B -2. (1) Use: Exterior locations or in contact with earth. 2. Zinc - coated steel sheet: ASTM A 525 carbon steel, with G90 zinc coating. a. Use: Dovetail slots and similar applications. 3. Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 635 or ASTM A 366; galvanizing in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class B. a. Use: Anchors and miscellaneous sheet metal in masonry accessories at exterior exposures. C. Joint Reinforcement: Welded -wire units prefabricated into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods. 1. Width: Approximately two inches less than nominal wall width, providing not less than 5/8 inch mortar coverage on exterior exposures and 1/2 inch elsewhere. 2. Wire sizes: a. Side rod diameter: 0.1483 inch. b. Cross rod diameter: 0.1483 inch. 3. Configuration: a. Applications of single unit width: Ladder design, cross rods at not more than 16 inches on center. b. Corners: Prefabricated L- and T- shaped units. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Bond Breaker Strips: ASTM D 226, Type I; No. 15 asphalt felt. B. Sealant and Backer Rod: As specified in Division 7. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures unless indicated as acceptable in the contract documents. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout mixture. B. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced ASTM standards. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Limit cementitious materials to lime and portland cement. 2. Reinforced masonry: Type S. 3. Applications as follows: Type N. a. Locations for which another mortar type has not been specifically indicated. D. Mortar Colored with Aggregates: Produce required mortar color by use of colored aggregates in combination with selected cementitious materials. 1. Mix to match grout. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY E. Grout: ASTM C 476; provide consistency required at time of placement to fill completely all spaces indicated to be grouted. 1. Use fine grout in spaces less than 2 inches in least horizontal dimension. 2. Use coarse grout in spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension. 3. Grout Color: Davis "51127" at 2 lbs per 94 lbs gray cement. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES A. Concrete Masonry Units: Do not wet concrete masonry units prior to laying. B. Reinforcement and Anchorage: Before placing metal masonry accessories, remove loose rust, dirt, and other coatings. C. Masonry Thickness: Build masonry elements to full thickness shown. D. Chases and Recesses: Build masonry to accommodate the work of other trades, including chases and recesses as shown or required. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between jambs of openings and chases and recesses. E. Openings for Equipment and Services: Leave openings in masonry as required for subsequent installation of equipment and services. Make openings in designated locations and in exact size required, if known; otherwise, leave rough openings in approximate size required and complete masonry work after installation of equipment, matching adjoining masonry. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances in vertical elements, including surfaces of walls, columns, and arrises: 1. 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances for bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous horizontal elements: 1. 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum. C. Variation from Plan Lines: Do not exceed the following horizontal construction tolerances for related portions of columns, walls, and partitions: 1. 1/8 inch in 20 feet maximum. D. Variation in Cross Section: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances for thickness of walls and other masonry elements: 1. Minus 1/8 inch. 2. Plus 1/8 inch. E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances for thickness of mortar joints: 1. Bed joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 2. Head joints: Minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch. 24646.00 04230 - 4 24646.00 3.3 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL 3.4 LAYING MASONRY UNITS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Layout: Lay out masonry for accurate pattern bond, for uniform joint widths, and for accurate location of specific features before beginning actual construction.. Avoid use of masonry units of less than 1/2 size. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners and jambs. B. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in running bond except where other bonds are indicated at special features. 1. Lay concealed masonry in running bond, or lap units at least 2 inches. 2. Interlock wythes at corners and offsets in each course with masonry bond. Stopping Work: Lay masonry in proper sequence to avoid toothing. Rack walls back in each course at end of each work day. Before resuming, clean exposed surfaces and remove loose masonry units and mortar. D. Built -in Work: As work progresses, build in items indicated for installation in masonry, filling around built -in items solidly with masonry. 1. Fill joints between masonry and metal frames solidly with mortar, unless specific conditions are otherwise detailed. 2. At locations where built -in items are to be connected to hollow unit masonry, solidly grout cores to provide adequate anchorage.. 3. Unless other conditions are specifically detailed, solidly grout cores for at least 24 inches below bearing plates, lintels, and similar features and conditions. A. Hollow Masonry Units: Install so that face shells are solidly mortared, horizontally and vertically. Bed webs solidly in mortar at starting course. 1. Bed webs solidly in mortar at cores to be grouted. B. Joints: Make mortar joints visually and dimensionally consistent. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, maintain mortar joint widths of 1/2 inch. C. Concealed Joints: Cut flush, unless otherwise detailed. D. Exposed Joints: Using concave jointer slightly larger than joint width, tool exposed joints before mortar has assumed final set. E. Resetting: Do not pound, tap, or otherwise attempt to adjust masonry units after initial set has occurred. Remove units which require adjusting, clean thoroughly, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, SINGLE -WYTHE WALLS A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement for all masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. B. Vertical Spacing: Not more than 16 inches on center. C. Continuity: Use prefabricated L- shaped and T- shaped sections at corners and intersections. Do not span movement joints with reinforcement. 04230 - 5 3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY A. Structural Framing Anchorage: Anchor masonry to at points of adjacency, and as follows: 1. Maintain open space of 1 inch or more member and masonry elements. 2. Fasten anchors to structure and embed is laid. 3. Space anchors at maximum of 36 inches 24 inches on center vertically. 3.8 GROUTING 3.9 REPAIRING MASONRY 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 6 between in mortar on center structural framework face of framing joints as masonry horizontally and 3.7 INSTALLING REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Preparation: Clean reinforcement bars of loose rust; do not use bars which have rusted excessively or which have bends or kinks not shown on drawings. B. Placing Reinforcement: Secure reinforcement accurately at locations indicated and to avoid displacement; minimum spacing between bars or to masonry surfaces shall be bar diameter or 1/4 inch for fine grout and 1/2 inch for coarse grout, whichever is greater. C. Splicing: Provide lapped splices of minimum size indicated or permitted by governing code at locations shown; other methods or locations must be approved by the Owner. D. Mortar Joints: Where reinforcement other than prefabricated joint reinforcement is required in mortar joints, adjust joint thickness to provide not less than 1/4 inch of mortar between reinforcement and masonry surfaces. E. Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry: Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities to be grouted. Keep cavities clear of mortar, including bed area of first course, to provide minimum clear dimension indicated, to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars, and to provide direct grout contact with supporting surfaces. 1. At bond beams or other horizontally reinforced masonry, provide special masonry units or saw units to accommodate reinforcement. 2. Contractor option: Fill all cores with grout in lieu of closing core spaces below bond beams and providing mortar bedding of masonry cross webs. A. Grouting Standard: Grout reinforced masonry in accordance with requirements of ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 /TMS 602. 1. Do not pour grout until mortar has cured sufficiently to withstand grout pressure. A. Replacement: Carefully remove areas of damaged masonry and replace with matching, undamaged units using mortar which matches original work. B. Pointing: As joints are being tooled, remove mortar with visible holes or mortar which cannot be compacted properly because of hidden voids, and replace with fresh mortar, filling each joint completely and tooling to match adjacent work. 4 . . . • • . . . .-' SOUTHCENTERCORPORATE;SQOARE .TUKWITJA,VASHINGTONfl. ... .: SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT' MASONRY . . : AND PROTECTION . . -. .- .•, • -.. . . . . . ,., • . .y - , :,.. . . , „.. .. A'.::Ciean masonry after mortar is thoroughly Set' and '::..I. '-.Scrape off adhered mortar particles by hand, using non-metallic . ::.;.. tools:: 2. Comply with directions of concrete unitmasOnry manufacturer and NCMA Tek Bulletin No 45 for cleaning CMU: .-•.,,, . . . — . ..:.protection: Institute protective measures as requirecLto,.ensure-that .. cmat.maaOnry work will be clean and undamaged at substantial_ • cOmpletiOn..,:: 24646.00 04230 - 7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.4 SUBMITTALS 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 A. Section Includes: 1. Fabrication and erection of structural steel framing members, as defined in AISC Code and as indicated on the drawings. 2. Fabrication and erection of architecturally exposed structural steel 3. Welding. 4. Shop painting. B. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section: 1. Steel anchorages cast in concrete. 2. Steel anchorages embedded in masonry. Related Sections: 1. Miscellaneous metal fabrications: Elsewhere in Division 5. 2. Touch -up shop primer: Division 9. A. Structural Steel: Items as listed in 2.1 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and excluding steel, iron, or other metal items not listed, even if attached to the structural framing. A. General: Unless otherwise specifically approved in writing, furnish exact sections, weights, and kinds of material specified, using details and dimensions shown. 1. Not all connections are detailed; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Contact the Owner promptly to verify design of members or connections in any situation where design requirements are unclear. A. Product Data: Producer's or manufacturer's information for products as follows, including sufficient data to show compliance with specified requirements: 1. Specifications for primer paint, including manufacturer's data on chemical composition, adhesion of spray fireproofing, and dry film thickness per applied coat. 2. Specifications for nonshrink grout. B. Shop Drawings: Complete drawings for structural steel, including information on location, type, and size of all connections, distinguishing between those made in the shop and those made in the field. 1. Indicate weld lengths and sizes, using standard American Welding Society (AWS) welding symbols. 2. Include setting drawings and templates for anchorages to be installed by others. 3. Prepare shop drawings under the seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the State of Washington. C. Welder Qualifications: Evidence that welders employed in the work are currently certified under American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL B. Storage: Protect steel and other materials of this section from damage and corrosion. If temporary storage at the project site is required, keep steel members off the ground, using platforms or pallets, in location easily accessible for inspection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS A. AESS Materials - General: For members which will be exposed in the finished work and have been identified as AESS on the drawings, provide only materials which are free of surface blemishes such as pitting, roller marks, rolled trade names, and surface roughness. B. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A 36. C. Structural Tubing, Cold- Formed: ASTM A 500. D. Mild to Medium - Strength Carbon -Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65 -35. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Carbon steel, Grade C; ASTM A 36 steel plate washer; galvanized. F. Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. 1. AESS: Provide hexagonal bolt heads and nuts at all exposed 24646.00 05120 - 2 A. Welding Procedures: Establish that joint welding procedures are prequalified or test in accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. B. Welder Qualifications: Welders must be currently certified under American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. C. Regulatory Requirements: Unless other requirements of governing authorities or particular requirements of this specification are more stringent, comply with provisions of the following: 1. RISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," with Commentary and Supplements. 3. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Testing and Inspection Agency: The Owner will engage an independent testing and inspection agency to perform testing, inspect and evaluate connections, and prepare test reports. 1. Correct deficiencies in the structural steel work identified by the testing and inspection agency at no additional expense to the Owner. Subsequent tests to confirm the adequacy of corrected work will be at the Contractor's expense. A. Shipping: Deliver steel in timely fashion, to permit the most efficient and economical flow of work. Deliver steel members properly marked for field assembly and erection. 1. Deliver anchor bolts, washers, and other anchorage devices to be built into other work in time to avoid delays and permit their proper installation. L.: L c C L L L L L i connections. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Welding Electrodes and Fluxes: AWS D1.1; types as required by materials being welded. B. Nonshrink Grout: Prepackaged material requiring only the addition of water and complying with ASTM C 1107, and as follows: 1. Metallic type. C. Shop Primer: Zinc -rich urethane; Tnemec "90 -97" or approved. 1. Salt spray resistance at minimum recommended thickness: 4000 hours per ASTM B117. 2. AISC rated "Class B" for use on faying surfaces. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly - General: Comply with requirements of AISC Specifications. Shop fabricate and assemble to maximum degree possible. 1. AESS: Comply with requirements of AISC Code for architecturally exposed structural steel. a. Appearance: Cut, fit, and assemble units with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free from cutting marks, shear distortion, burrs, and nicks. b. Tolerances: As specified in AISC Code for AESS, unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform all thermal cutting by machine. 1. Plane thermally cut edges which are to be welded. C. Connections: 1. Shop connections: Welded or bolted, as required. 2. Field connections: Welded or bolted, as required. 3. Welds: Comply with requirements of AWS Code for welding procedures and quality of welds, including appearance. a. Built -up sections: Assemble components and weld using procedures which will maintain proper alignment of finished section. b. AESS: Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment to be employed will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Surface bleed of back -side welding on exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. (1) Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger. (2) Grind flush butt welds. (3) Dress all exposed welds. D. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members which must transmit loads in bearing. E. Holes in Steel Members: Make all holes by means of cutting, drilling, or punching at right angles to surface of metal. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. 1. Provide holes in steel members as required to permit connection of work by others. 2.4 SHOP COATING - PAINT A. Shop prime all steel members, except: 1. Galvanized steel members. 2. Steel members to receive sprayed -on fireproofing 24646.00 05120 - 3 Painting: As soon as possible after cleaning, apply specified primer paint in accordance with instructions of paint manufacturer, at a rate sufficient to provide a finished thickness of not less than 1.5 mils and an average thickness of 2.0 mils. 2.5 SHOP QUALITY CONTROL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA,'WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 3. Steel members which are not to receive a finish paint system. 4. Do not paint the following surfaces: a. Machined or milled surfaces. b. Surfaces adjacent to field welds. c. Faying surfaces of bolted connections. B. Preparation: Thoroughly clean steel surfaces to be shop primed, removing loose rust, loose mill scale, dirt, oil, and grease. .Clean steel in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows: 1. Prepare for application of special coatings as specified elsewhere. A. Testing and Inspection: 1. General: Provide access to testing and inspection agency so that specified testing and inspection can be safely accomplished. 2. Shop bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 3. Shop welded connections: Inspect and test shop- fabricated welds as follows: a. Visually inspect all welds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions for erection of structural steel and verify that the work may properly proceed. Do not commence erection of structural steel until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or fabricated steel components have been adjusted with the Owner's agreement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary guys, braces, falsework, cribbing, or other elements required to secure the steel framing against loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove such temporary support only when permanent connections have been made and the steel framing is fully capable of supporting design loads, including any temporary construction loads. 3.3 ERECTION A. General: Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC Code and Specifications. 1. AESS: Comply with erection requirements of AISC Code dealing with architecturally exposed structural steel. B. Assembly: 1. Set structural members accurately to locations and elevations indicated, within tolerances established in AISC Code, before making final connections. 2. Do not use thermal cutting to correct fabrication errors on any major structural member. 24646.00 05120 - 4 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Thermal cutting of secondary members may be permitted by the Owner upon request, but only when members involved are not loaded. C Columns and Bearing Surfaces: 1. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly. Slightly roughen concrete and masonry surfaces to improve bond. 2. Set base and bearing plates accurately, using metal wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 3 After tightening anchor bolts and ensuring that structure is plumb, grout solidly between plates and bearing surfaces. a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. D. Bolting: 1. Carbon steel bolts: Use only for temporary bracing during erection, unless otherwise specifically permitted by contract documents. E. Welding: 1. Do not perform field welding when ambient temperature is at 0 degrees F or below, or when surfaces are wet, exposed to rain, snow, or high wind. 2. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 3. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in field - welded construction. a. AESS: Verify that weld sizes, erection sequence, and equipment to be employed will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Surface bleed of back -side welding on exposed surfaces is not acceptable. (1) Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger. (2) Grind flush butt welds. (3) Dress all exposed welds. (4) Remove erection bolts, plug -weld bolt holes, and grind smooth. F. Touch -up Painting: Requirements of touch -up painting are included as part of the painting specification in Division 9. A. Testing and Inspection: 1. General: Provide access to testing and inspection agency so that specified testing and inspection can be safely accomplished. 2. Field- bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 3. Field- welded connections: Inspect and test field- fabricated welds as follows: a. Visually inspect all field welds. END OF SECTION 05120 - 5 1 L PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA; WASHINGTON SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Section Includes: 1. Ladders. 2. Miscellaneous metal fabrications. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5. 1.2 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordination with Masonry and Concrete Work: Where fabricated items or their anchors are to be embedded into concrete and masonry work, deliver such items to those performing the installation, together with coordination drawings and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - METALS A. Steel Shapes: 1. Plates, bars, angles, channels, and H- sections: ASTM A 36. 2. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanizing after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. B. Galvanizing for Steel Rough Hardware Fabrications: Hot -dip galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A 153. 2.2 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS A. Fasteners: Use fasteners suitable for the material being fastened and for the type of connection required. 1. For exterior use or built into exterior walls: Nonferrous stainless steel, zinc coated or cadmium plated. 2. Use fasteners of same material as items being fastened unless otherwise indicated. 3. Bolts and studs: ASTM A 307. 4. Nuts: ASTM A 563. 5. Plain washers: FS FF -W -92. 6. Lock washers: FS FF -W -84. 7. Expansion shields: FS FF -S -325. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Zinc dust paint complying with SSPC -Paint 20 or MIL P- 21035B, Type I or II. 2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Fabricate and shop - assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. 1. Prepare and reinforce fabrications as required to receive applied items. 2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 3. Make exposed joints tight, flush, and hairline. B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners if possible. 1. Exposed fasteners: Flathead, countersunk type unless otherwise indicated. 24646.00 05500 - 1 D. Welding:' 1. Provide continuous welds at welded corners. and seams., 2. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth. 2.4 .FABRICATION - LADDERS Fixed Ladders: Construct as indicated. 1 All steel:construction. a. Where other handholds are not indicated: (1) Make rails extend at:least 42 abOyethetOp rung;. return to wall. , ,Weld side rails, on:centerline..:. ,,Smooth sharp edges and remove burrs fronLside rails. PART 3 L-EXECUTION INSTALLATION - GENERAL Anchor metal fabrications to substrates indicated; provide all fasteners required. • • . Perform all field fabrication required for 1. Fit joints tightly. 2. Weld joints as indicated. a. Weld in accordance with AWS code. • b. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth. C. Install items in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or, . • warp. A. D. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required. . 24646.00 • . . . SOUTECENTER.CORPORATESQUARE..„ TUKNILAWASHINGTON :; .:• : • SECTION .'METAL FABRICATIONS Anchors: Fabricate to suit conditions indicated; use anchors of same material and finish as item except where specifically indicated otherwise. END OF SECTION 05500 - 2 , ' • IJ L L 1 1 • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Building address numerals. 1.2 2.2 B. Related Sections: 1. Metal Fabrications: Elsewhere in Division 5. SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: For each fabricated item, show the following: 1. Elevations. 2. Connections to building. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 A. Address Numerals: 1. Style as indicated on drawings. • 2. Steel. 3. Finish: Duranar/Fluropon (70t resin); Metallic (3 coat system). • 4. Color: Duranar "Silver Metallic". Fasteners: Use fasteners suitable for the material being fastened and for the type of connection required. 1. For exterior use: Nonferrous stainless steel, zinc coated or cadmium plated. A. B. A. Fabricate and shop-assemble for delivery to site. B. C. D. PART 3 3.1 A. B. 24646.00 MATERIALS - METALS FABRICATION - GENERAL 'SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE, TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 05721 .•BUILDING ADDRESS NUMERALS Prepare fabrications as required to receive specified finish. Smooth off exposed edges Anchors: Fabricate to suit anchors indicated; use anchors of same material and finish as item except where specifically indicated otherwise. EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install numerals in correct location, plumb and level. Anchor to substrates indicated; provide all fasteners required. END OF SECTION 05721 - 1 PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY .SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Section Includes: 1. Carpentry work not specified as part of other generally is not exposed, except as otherwise 2. Rough carpentry for: a. Wood framing. b. Miscellaneous lumber for attachment and support of other work. c. Sheathing. 3. Preservative treatment. B. Related Sections: 1. Finish carpentry: Elsewhere in Division 6. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply. with NIST PS 20 and approved inspection agencies. B. Inspection Agencies: 1. WCLB: West Coast Lumber Inspection C. Grade Stamps for Concealed Lumber: Each inspection agency and showing compliance requirement. D. Construction Panels: Comply with NBS PS specified; comply with APA PRP -108 where specified; bearing APA trademark showing specified requirement. 1.3 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER Bureau. sections and which indicated. grading rules and piece of lumber, applied by with each specified 1 where veneer plywood is APA rated panels are compliance with each A. Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional changes. Support stacks at several uniformly spaced points to prevent deformation. Store stacks raised above ground. Cover to protect from rain and snow. Select and arrange cover to allow air circulation under and all around stacks to prevent condensation. Maintain and restore displaced coverings. Remove from the site any wood products that have been subjected to moisture or that do not comply with the specified moisture requirements. A. Size: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with NIST PS 20 except where actual sizes are specifically required. 1. Surfacing: Dressed lumber (S4S). 2. Moisture content: S -dry or MC19 (19 percent maximum moisture content). B. Stud Framing -- 2 x 2 through 4 x 4 and 2 x 6: 1. Species: a. Any wood species /species group listed in National Design Specification Supplement. 2. Grade: No. 1 (Structural Light Framing). 24646.00 06100 - 1 Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide dimension lumber and boards necessary . for the support of work specified in other sections, whether or not specifically indicated, and including but not limited to blocking, nailers, etc. 1. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum (S -dry). 2. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or standard grade. 3. Boards: Construction, 2 common, or No. 2 grade. A. B. C. D. E. 2.3 A. 24646.00 Joist and Small Beam Framing -- 2 x 6 through 4 x 16: 1. Species: a. Any wood species listed in National Design Specification Supplement. 2. Grade: No. 1. 2.2 BOARDS - LESS THAN 2 INCHES THICKNESS Moisture Content: S -dry (19 percent maximum). Surfacing: S4S. Grading Agency: 1. WCLB. Species: 1. Douglas Fir. 2. Hem -Fir. Grade: No. 3, 3 common, or standard boards. CONSTRUCTION PANELS Roof Sheathing: 1. APA rated sheathing: a. Exterior exposure b. 24/16 span rated. c. Tongue and groove 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS B. Framing Connectors hot -dip galvanized required; approved C. Building Paper: 30- I (nonperforated). SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY class. edges. A. Fasteners: Provide as required by applicable codes and as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153) for treated lumber and where wood is in ground contact, subjected to high relative humidity, or exposed to weather. 2.5 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS and Supports: Prefabricated, formed steel units; finish unless otherwise indicated; type and size as by applicable codes. lb. felt; asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D 226, Type A. Aboveground Lumber: AWPB LP -2 (waterborne preservatives). 1. Kiln dried after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content. 2. Treat the following: a. Wood within 18 inches of grade. b. Other members indicated. B. Fasteners for Preservative Treated Wood: Hot -dip galvanized steel (ASTM A153). 06100 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1• INSTALLATION - GENERAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Arrange work to use full length pieces except where lengths would exceed commercially available lengths. Discard pieces with defects that would lower the required strength or appearance of the work. B. Cut and fit members accurately. Install plumb and true to line and level. C. Fasten carpentry in accordance with applicable codes and recognized standards. D. Where exposed, countersink nails and fill flush with suitable wood filler. E. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. 3.2 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY A. Provide miscellaneous blocking, nailers, grounds, and framing as shown and as required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Cut and shape to the required size. Provide in locations required by other work. B. Use countersunk fasteners appropriate to applied loading. 3.3 WOOD FRAMING - GENERAL A. Comply with sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated. Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable codes and NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction." Splice members only,where specifically indicated or approved. B. Space fasteners as indicated. Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable codes and the "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction" and "National Design Specification for Wood Construction." 3.4 BOARD SHEATHING A. Locate end joints over supports unless end matched boards are used. Separate joints in adjacent boards by at least one joist or stud space. Separate joints over the same support by at least two boards. Nail 6- inch -wide boards using two 8d nails at intermediate supports and three at diaphragm boundaries. Nail 8 -inch and wider boards using three 8d nails at intermediate supports and four at diaphragm boundaries. B. Install building paper weatherboard fashion, free of tears or gaps; lap edges at least 2 inches and ends at least 6 inches. Fasten with roofing nails. 24646.00 06100 - 3 SOUTRCENTER..:CORPORATEL: SQUARE" TUKWILA, ,:i. WASHINGTON SECTION..? 06100. ROUGR... CARPENTRY INSTALLATION . OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS . ,,. . . ' Employ the,f011owing fastening methods: 1 Nail roof sheathing to framing. Staples not peinitted. , . . a ' At panel edges, provide one panel Clip per Span.. ..'.• b. ,.' Provide solid blocking under panel edges other than intact tongue and groove'.edges. 24646.00 06100 - 4 1 L L l i t 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Application of clear water repellent coating to the following exposed surfaces: a. Exterior: (1) Precast concrete. (2) Concrete unit masonry. Section Does Not Include: Application of water repellents to horizontal traffic surfaces. C. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Mansonry Units: Division 4. 2. Precast Concrete: Division 3. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Provide water repellent manufactured by a firm having not. less• than 5 years' successful experience in manufacturing water repellents of the type required. B. A company installing products of this section and whose installations have performed in a satisfactory manner under comparable conditions for a period of 5 years. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of the pollution control regulatory agency having jurisdiction in the project locale regarding use of hydrocarbon solvents. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's unopened original containers. B. Store materials in dry, well - ventilated space. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Proceed with work of this section only after substrate construction and sealant installation have been completed. B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations regarding condition of substrate to receive water repellent, weather conditions before and during installation, and protection of the installed water - repellent coating. 1.6 WARRANTY 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA,.WASHINGTON SECTION 07180 WATER REPELLENTS A. Furnish warranty to provide materials and labor required to repair or replace materials which fail to perform properly due to defective materials or workmanship. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the contract documents. 07180 - 1 PART.3 - EXECUTION 3.2 INSTALLATION 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07180 WATER REPELLENTS 1. Warranty period is 5 years after date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEAR WATER REPELLENTS A. General: Provide products recommended by the manufacturer for compatibility and proper performance when applied to the substrates indicated to receive water repellent treatment. B. products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Silane -- 20 percent active ingredients: Ethanol based, water based, or solvent based polymerized silane solution: a. "Chem -Trete BSM -20 "; Huls America Inc. b. "Pentane "; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. "Hydrozo Enviroseal 20 "; Hydrozo Inc. d. "Klere -Seal 920S"; Pecora Corporation. 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not proceed with application of water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces to receive water repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Water repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work. Clean substrate, removing substances deleterious to penetration or performance of water repellents. C. Moisture Content: Test cleaned substrates according to manufacturer's instructions before applying water repellents. D. Protection: 1. Mask off and cover adjacent surfaces to prevent contamination by water repellents whether by spray, drift, drip, or spillage. 2. Take special care to protect aluminum, glass, and live plant or turf surfaces. 3. Should contamination occur, clean surfaces immediately, following manufacturer's instructions. A. Comply with manufacturer's written application instructions. B. Unless specifically contraindicated by manufacturer's instructions, use low pressure spray equipment to apply a heavy saturation coat to substrate followed by a second saturation coat after the manufacturer's recommended drying time has elapsed. C. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 07180 - 2 1 r t PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Class PB Type A exterior insulation and finish system. 2. Provide alternate price for heavy duty fabric as shown on Drawings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Uniform Building Code; International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO); 1994. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Class PB Type A Exterior Insulation and Finish System: 1. The materials forming the outer thermal and weathertight envelope of a building, excluding doors and windows, and comprising rigid thermal insulation, protective and decorative coatings, means of fastening to the supporting substrate, and related accessories as specified herein. 2. Class PB designates a base coating of the characteristics as defined by the Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association. 3. Type A designates that the protective coating is reinforced with a fabric mesh of the type indicated. B. System Manufacturer: The manufacturer of the base and finish coatings. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a Class PB Type A exterior insulation and finish system, including the following materials specified in this section: 1. Thermal insulation board. 2. Materials used for attachment of insulation board to substrates. 3. Protective coatings applied sequentially to insulation board. 4. Reinforcing fabrics. 5. Rigid joint trim. 6. Accessories necessary for a complete system. B. Provide system complying with the following requirements: 1. Fire tests: a. Tests performed on foam plastics shall have been performed using not less than the maximum thickness required by the project. b. Flame spread index (ASTM E 84) of foam plastic insulation: 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS Section Does Not Include: 1. Construction or installation of substrates. Contractor shall confirm with Owner that existing plywood siding is adequate for Exterior Insulation and Finish System. Related Sections: 1. Building paper: Division 6. 2. Joint sealants: Elsewhere in Division 7. 3. Flashing: Elsewhere in Division 7. 4. Siding: Section 07460. Uniform Building Code Standards; International Conference of Building Code Officials (ICBO); 1994. 07240 - 1 75, maximum. c. Smoke - developed index (ASTM E 84) of foam plastic insulation: 450, maximum. d. Insulation board and coatings and facings (each tested separately): (1) Flame spread index (ASTM E 84): 25, maximum. (2) Smoke developed index (ASTM E 84): 450, maximum. e. Specifically approved for use by the authorities having jurisdiction under paragraph 2602 of the Uniform Building Code. f. For those portions of the system applied to walls having a fire- resistive rating, system shall have been tested and shall have met the conditions of acceptance of Uniform Building Code Standard No. 7 -1. g. Potential heat of building materials (Uniform Building Code Standard No. 26 -1): 6000 Btu per square foot, maximum. h. Uniform Building Code Standard No. 26 -4: Wall system shall meet acceptance criteria. i. Systems not complying with one or more of the above requirements shall have been specifically approved for use by the authorities having jurisdiction under paragraph 1713(f) of the Uniform Building Code. C. Attachment Requirements: 1. Where indicated, secure insulation board to substrate using mechanical attachment. 1.5 SUBMITTALS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS A. Product Data: 1. Product data for each material specified. 2. Manufacturer's detailed storage, mixing, and installation instructions. 3. International Conference of Building Officials Evaluation Report demonstrating acceptance of system. a. Submit reports issued by code organization which are acceptable to governing authorities and which demonstrate compliance with the referenced building code. b. Reports submitted shall have been issued within the time period stated thereon for reevaluation or shall be accompanied by the code organization's current reapproval listing. 4. Independent laboratory test reports or certificates demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. 5. Warranty draft. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Details of mechanical attachment system, including spacing of fasteners. 2. Details of each edge and joint condition, including adjacent construction. C. Certificates Signed by Manufacturer: 1. Submit to Owner. 2. Installers are approved by system manufacturer for installation of the system. 3. Substrates indicated are approved for system. 4. These specifications and the details shown on the drawings conform to manufacturer's recommendations. D. Reports: 1. Installer's report of inspection of substrate and conditions 24646.00 07240 - 2 t 0 to 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's representative shall visit the site to verify suitability of substrate preparation and to verify acceptability of system installation methods and workmanship. 1. Required visits: a. At the beginning of system installation. b. Twice during installation. c. Upon completion of the work. B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Approved by system manufacturer. 2. Installers shall have at least 10 years' successful experience in applications similar to those required for the project. C. Manufacturer's Requirements: 1. System manufacturer shall certify that the system is suitable for use with substrates indicated herein and on the drawings. 2. System manufacturer shall review and certify that this specification and the details shown on the drawings conform to the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provide a system that conforms to the fire and code requirements enumerated under the paragraph titled "System Description" and the labeling requirements enumerated under the paragraph titled "Delivery, Storage, and Handling." E. Mock -up for First Building: 1. Construct mock -up of each system configuration and texture. Include typical edge, joint, sealant, and openings conditions. 2. Notify the Owner before constructing mock -ups. 3. Do not install system on project without the Owner's approval of mock -up. 4. Remove and dispose of mock -ups with the consent of the Owner only after substantial completion of work of this section is achieved. F. Preinstallation Conference: 1. Conduct conference at project site for purposes of a final review of the contract documents, manufacturer's instructions, and materials to be used. 2. The Contractor, the installer, the system manufacturer's representative, other trades as deemed appropriate by the Contractor, and the Owner shall be present. 3. Examine actual conditions of substrates to determine whether they are satisfactory for installation of system. 4. Examine the contract documents relating to system and compare with system manufacturer's current printed recommendations. 1 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original packaging. 1. Materials shall bear manufacturer's name, brand name, description of contents, and identifying markings in the form required by this specification. Materials not so labeled will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the site. a. Foam plastic insulation shall be listed by an independent testing agency acceptable to the authorities having 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS affecting work. 2. Manufacturer's representative's inspection report. 07240 - 3 1.8 SOUTHCENTER'CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA', WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS jurisdiction. b. Edge or face of each piece of insulation board shall bear the following identifying markings: (1) Inspection agency name. (2) Product for which the insulation is listed. (3) Identification of insulation manufacturer. (4) Flame spread and smoke - developed indexes. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Storage area: Clean, dry, well - ventilated; protected from sunlight and excessive heat. 2. Coating materials susceptible to frost damage: Store above 40 degrees F. 3. Insulation board: a. Do not expose to flame or other ignition source. b. Cover with opaque, light - colored tarps to shield from sunlight when exposed for extended periods. c. Do not expose to sunlight for more than 5 days before covering with base coat. d. Do not expose to temperatures exceeding 165 degrees F. e. Store flat and at least 8 inches off the ground. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Minimum Temperature of Ambient Air and Substrates: 40 degrees F or above and steady or rising at time of installation and curing of coating materials and for at least 24 hours thereafter. B. Hot - Weather Limits: As recommended by system manufacturer and depending upon air temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and exposure to sun. C. Do not install coatings when conditions are outside of specified limits. D. Partially completed work or work not fully cured that is exposed to the elements in excess of manufacturer's recommendations may be rejected. 1.9 WARRANTY A. System manufacturer's standard 5 -year labor and material warranty. B. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the contract documents. C. Contractor's Warranty Period: 5 years from the date of substantial completion. D. Provide alternate bid for manufacturer's 10 -year labor and material warranty. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Prior to substantial completion, deliver the following materials to the location designated by the Owner: 1. 25 anchors of each type used. 2. 50 square feet of each type of reinforcing mesh. 3. One unopened pail of each system coating component used on the project. 24646.00 07240 - 4 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products complying with requirements of the contract documents and made by one of the following: 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 2. Senergy, Inc. B. Single- Source Responsibility: 1. Provide only materials that are manufactured by or specifically approved by system manufacturer for use in specified system. 2. When required by system manufacturer, insulation board fabricated (by other than system manufacturer) for use with this system shall be labeled as required by system manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Mechanical Attachment Materials: 1. Manufacturer's standard system. 2. Fasteners: Permanent, corrosion- resistant fasteners capable of resisting design loads. a. Length as necessary to accommodate thickness of insulation and to provide required embedment in substrate. B. Insulation Board: 1. Expanded polystyrene board complying with ASTM C 578, Type I and with system manufacturer's additional requirements. 2. Thickness as shown on drawings. C. Reinforcing Fabric: 1. Alkali- resistant glass -fiber fabric manufactured especially for use in exterior insulation and finish system. 2. Intermediate duty fabric up to first reveal. 3. Standard duty above first reveal. 4. Alternate Number 1: Heavy Duty Reinforcing Fabric: Dryvit "Panzer Mesh," heavy duty glass fabric reinforcing. D. Base Coat: 1. Acrylic -based material, factory -mixed with sand and alkali- resistant glass fibers, mixed on site with portland cement. E. Finish Coat: 1. Factory- mixed, textured, integrally colored finish coating. 2. Acrylic -based material. 3. Colors: a. "EIFS -1 ": Match Dryvit "449 Buckskin SWS -SPF7- 0109 ". b. "EIFS -2 ": Match Dryvit "440 Clover SWS -SPF6- 3387 ". c. "EIFS -3 ": Match Dryvit "452 Stormy Night SWS- SPF7 - 0093 ". 4. Texture: a. Sandpebble Fine. F. Trim Accessories: As supplied by system manufacturer. 1. Plastic Components as shown on Drawings. 2. Custom: As shown on Drawings. 3. Vents: As shown on Drawings. G. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide primers, intermediate coatings, accessories, etc., not otherwise specified herein if recommended by system manufacturer as necessary for a complete installation. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07240 - 5 2.3 MIXING PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.1 EXAMINATION 3.3 INSULATION BOARD SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS A. Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using only manufacturer - approved materials in the instructed quantities. Use only freshly mixed materials. Apply materials within the time prescribed by the manufacturer and without.retempering, unless specifically approved. A. Examine substrates with installer and manufacturer's representative present. B. Determine whether or not substrate conditions are acceptable. C. Obtain approval of substrates by manufacturer's representative. D. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with installation of system. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Protect adjacent surfaces from contamination during application of coatings. 2. Schedule flashing and system installation as necessary to produce an integrated, water -tight envelope. 3. Substrates shall be free of water, moisture, and frost. 4. Nail any loose existing siding to achieve firm substrate. A. Use mechanical attachment over the following substrates: 1. Existing sheathing or siding. B. Mechanical Attachment: 1. Shim where necessary due to unevenness of substrate to achieve a level, plumb, planar, finished surface. 2. Do not over -drive fasteners. 3. Sheathing substrates: a. Drive fasteners squarely into framing members, achieving required embedment. b. Fasteners driven into sheathing only will not be accepted and shall be removed. C. Insulation Boards: 1. Arrange layout of insulation joints such that joints do not coincide with sheathing joints. 2. Form tightly butted, flush surfaced joints between adjacent boards and adjacent courses. Fill any gaps with precisely fitted insulation. Do not use adhesive to secure filler pieces. 3. Rasp joints where necessary to produce a smooth, even, flush surface. 4. Precisely fit insulation at openings and edges. Ensure that edge of insulation conforms to required edge details. 5. Interrupt insulation and form joints where indicated. 6. Construct joints as required for sealant application. a. Width of gap as needed for application of sealant after encapsulation of board edges with base coat, reinforcing 24646.00 07240 - 6 r is 3.5 BASE COAT 3.6 FINISH COAT 3.7 CLEANING 3.8 PROTECTION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS fabric, and finish coat. Apply base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat to exposed edges of insulation board including those forming substrates of sealed joints. Return base coat into joints. 3.4 COATINGS - GENERAL A. Complete each coating in sections by working from joint to joint, from edge to edge, from corner to corner, or according to other such divisions in the surface. B. Work materials keeping a wet edge. C. Complete each application before initial set occurs. D. Allow each coating to cure before proceeding with subsequent operations. E. Remove excess coatings from joint trim while still wet. F. Protect each coating from damage and excessive heat, cold, water, and moisture while curing. G. Install miscellaneous profiles where shown on drawings and where recommended by system manufacturer. A. Apply a uniform thickness of base coat to insulation. 1. Thickness within system manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum. B. Reinforcing Fabric: 1. Fully embed reinforcing fabrics in base coat while still plastic in order to produce smooth, evenly- coated installation. After embedment, pattern of fabric shall not be visible. 2. Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for lapping or wrapping fabric edges and for reinforcement at corners, edges, and joints. A. Apply finish coat; minimum 1/8 -inch thickness, maximum thickness as recommended by manufacture. B. Color and texture shall match approved mock -up. A. Clean finished surfaces in a timely manner if required in order to prevent permanent discoloration. B. If discoloration or contamination occurs and cannot be removed, or if system suffers damage prior to substantial completion, then restore, or remove and replace, affected portions (reworking entire planar surfaces as necessary to conceal reworked area), using manufacturer's recommended restoration coatings or new materials meeting the requirements of this specification, as acceptable to the Owner. A. Protection of Work in Progress: 24646.00 07240.- 7 EPUTFICENTER.:.CORPORATESQUARE. .. .: •i'..!IIIKWILA.i.WASHINGTON,:: '..,* -, • , ::. SECTIONJ)7240: .: FINISH SYSTEMS •: H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . 1. Provide temporary covering and other protectionas necedsaryto. -... ..:Iprevent spattering of materials on other Work: .: temporary protection for tops ofwalle and Othei - locations until permanent construction is'A.nstalled: .: Protect system and substrates from inclement weather during '::::_. • -. ,,,;. .installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behinct:System and , :', • ,:, ' deterioration of substrates. _ , .Provide temporary protectionof.incomplete work at theenctof each ...„ ....;:. ,,:•.,: ,"... „ • Working day and whenever work is not in progress.' B . Remove temporary coverings when no longer" needed. -' C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions until substantial completion. 24646.00 07240. - 8 1) I 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07250 SPRAYED -ON FIREPROOFING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fireproofing of structural steel at elevator shaft. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Fireproofing Shop Drawings: Submit fireproofing shop drawings to the. Owner for preliminary review; after Owner's review, submit shop drawings to the Building Department for their approval prior to fireproofing application. 1. Shop drawings must conform to the Building Department requirements, identifying primary and secondary framing members. 2. Shop drawings must include the type of fireproofing material, number of ICBO evaluation report or UL Design number, hourly ratings, and a clear method for identifying thicknesses and densities required for designated primary and secondary members and floor and roof assemblies (ie. color code or other acceptable method). 3. Submit a minimum of three (3) complete sets of fireproofing shop drawings to Building Department for approval. 4 After receiving Building Department approval, submit two (2) copies of approved fireproofing shop drawings to Owner for record purposes. B. Evidence of Acceptable Testing: Submit for each fire - resistance rated assembly to be constructed. Listing of the assembly to be used in the current edition of the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. "Fire Resistance Directory" will be considered evidence of acceptable testing. In lieu of such a directory listing, official printed notification from Underwriters Laboratories Inc., stating that the assembly in question has been tested and approved, will also be considered evidence of acceptable testing. C. Product Data: Submit complete product and system description, including installation instructions and limitations on use. D. Test Reports: Submit results of field quality control tests indicated in Part 3 of this section. E. Certificate of Acceptability of Substrates: Submit fireproofing manufacturer's certification that substrates to receive fireproofing are acceptable to fireproofing manufacturer. Where fireproofing manufacturer recommends use of a bonding agent to ensure adequate bond for fireproofing, follow manufacturer's instructions. F. Certificate of Compliance with Asbestos Requirements: Submit fireproofing manufacturer's certification of compliance with all asbestos requirements specified under "Quality Assurance." A. Asbestos and Mineral Wool Limitations: Comply with all current federal, state, and local regulations. 24646.00 07250 - 1 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER`CORPORATE SQUARE t_ r TUKWILA, WASHINGTON j SECTION 07250 { SPRAYED -ON FIREPROOFING I A. Store products in dry, protected area in manufacturer's original shipping containers bearing labels which include UL fire resistance ratings, manufacturer's name, product name, date of manufacture, and shelf life instructions where required. B. Do not use products beyond manufacturer's indicated shelf life. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Minimum ambient and substrate temperatures for 24 hours immediately preceding, during, and for 24 hours after fireproofing installation: 40 degrees F. 2 Provide adequate air circulation to ensure proper curing of fireproofing materials. Coordinate work of this section with other work as required to ensure that installed materials are not damaged during construction period and that fire resistance ratings are not compromised by work of other trades. B. Schedule fireproofing installation sufficiently in advance of other work to permit field quality control testing and any required corrective procedures to be completed before construction which might interfere with these operations is started. C Do not begin to install fireproofing on underside of metal roof decking until roofing installation is finished; do not allow traffic on roof during fireproofing installation and drying period. A. Sprayed Cementitious Fireproofing: Provide one of the following: 1. "Zonolite Mk VI "; W.R. Grace & Co. 2. "Cafco 300 "; Isolatek International. B. Accessory Products: Provide products which strictly comply with UL requirements for fire resistance rated assemblies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates are in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing. B. Verify that items required to penetrate fireproofing are in place and properly fastened C. Perform fireproofing manufacturer's recommended test procedures wherever substances which might affect adhesion of fireproofing are suspected on substrates. 07250 - 2 c C 1_ t 1. 1 .. 1 Notify the Owner in writing of any substrate conditions requiring correction by other than normal cleaning methods, prior to installation of fireproofing. E. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; commencement of fireproofing installation indicates acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07250 SPRAYED -ON FIREPROOFING A. Provide drop cloths, masking, or other suitable coverings for materials not to receive fireproofing. B. Take necessary precautions to protect workmen, the public, and the environment during installation. C Prepare substrates as required to result in permanent bonding of fireproofing material. Strictly follow fireproofing manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and preparation of substrates. D. Primed Steel: Where required by fireproofing manufacturer for proper bond, apply fireproofing manufacturer's recommended bonding agent /substrate primer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) "Fire Resistance Directory" instructions for assemblies indicated and with fireproofing manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fireproofing in a manner which will maximize adhesion between fireproofing and substrate and continuity of fire - resistive protection; use a single course of fireproofing unless otherwise recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. C. Finish: As applied, no additional finishing. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner will engage and pay an independent testing agency to conduct field inspection and testing to determine whether actual thicknesses 1_ and densities meet fire rating requirements. B. Measure thickness and density in accordance with ASTM E 605 procedures. C. Test each fireproofed structural member within one typical structural bay. For each distinct test area, bay must be selected at random. D. Testing agency shall submit written report to the Contractor and the Owner indicating results of field quality control procedures. E. The Contractor shall pay for further testing required to prove acceptability of installation. F. Patch test areas as necessary to restore integrity of fireproofing. 3.5 CLEANING A. Completely remove fireproofing from surfaces not designated to receive fireproofing while material is still wet and before it has begun to set. 24646.00 07250 - 3 A. 'F'ollow instructions of fireproofing manufacturer to prevent damage to SODTHCENTER''CORPORATE: SQUARE TUKWILA;d SECTION 07250 SPRAYED:-ON FIREPROOFING , • 24646.00 07250 - Yf, PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetration Firestopping: Firestopping of all penetrations through fire barriers, including: a. Voids around: (1) Pipes. (2) Conduit. b. Other openings, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Other openings indicated. 2. Gap Firestopping: Firestopping (safing) of slots and gaps between fire barriers, including: a. Gaps between top of fire -rated partitions and underside of structure above. B. Work Not Included: Repairing penetrations made in error and repairing penetrations which are too large to be sealed by the methods indicated; these are to be repaired using the original material of the construction. C. Products Furnished but Not Installed: 1. Sleeves which are an integral part of the firestopping assembly but which must be set by installer of other construction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Fire Barrier: Any wall, floor, ceiling, or roof which is indicated as having a fire - resistance rating. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Preinstallation Inspection Report: Identify penetrations which need to be repaired using the original material of the assembly. B. Schedule of Firestopping: Complete list, for approval, of penetrations to be sealed, indicating location, fire rating of penetrated assembly, identification of penetration seal to be used, fire rating of penetration seal, and evidence of acceptable testing. C. Maintenance Data: Include detailed instructions for repair and for modification due to changes in penetrating items. D. Final inspection report(s). E. Project Record Documents: Drawings showing locations of all fire barriers, the actual penetrations through them, and the manner in which they have been sealed; cross- referenced to maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Requirements: Testing shall have been conducted or witnessed by an independent testing agency acceptable to governing authorities. 1. Test methods: UBC Standard No. 7 -1; tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E 814 will be acceptable. 2. Conduct tests with a measurably higher pressure inside the chamber than outside. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07275 FIRESTOPPING. 07275 - 1 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07275 FIRESTOPPING 3. The listing of the assembly to be used in the current edition of one of the following classification guides will be considered evidence of acceptable testing: a. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. "Fire Resistance Directory." b. Warnock Hersey "Certification Listings." 4. A current evaluation report by one of the following will be considered evidence of acceptable testing: a. National Evaluation Service ( "NES "). 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of products to minimize storage time at site. B. Deliver products to project site in original unopened containers bearing the name of the manufacturer, product name, type, and testing agency's identification mark. C. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. A. Coordination Meeting: Prior to the start of work which involves cutting penetrations, conduct a meeting with installers of such work to identify fire barriers and required configurations of penetrations and to discuss the proper procedures and time schedule for cutting, patching, and sealing penetrations in such assemblies, with emphasis on avoiding unnecessary cutting and patching. A. Perform firestopping work after completion of work which penetrates fire barriers, but prior to covering up or eliminating access to the penetration. Coordinate with installers of such other work. A. Manufacturers: 1. Products made by the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Hilti, Inc. b. International Protective Coatings Corporation. c. Hevi- Duty /Nelson. d. 3M Ceramic Materials Department. e. Specified Technologies, Inc. f. Rectorseal (Metacaulk). g. Tremco. B. Penetration Firestopping Materials: Provide penetration seal assemblies whose fire - resistance ratings have been determined by testing in the configurations required and which have fire - resistance ratings at least as high as that of the fire -rated assembly in which they are to be installed. 1. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the types of penetrations to be sealed and to select appropriate firestopping assemblies. 07275 - 2 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE. SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07275 FIRESTOPPING 2.. If.a tested assembly is not available for a particular penetration configuration, modify the penetration configuration to suit available assemblies; do not modify assembly configuration except as specifically stated in the test report or as approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 3. Provide products which: a. Allow normal expansion and contraction movement of the penetrating item without failure of the penetration seal. b. Emit no hazardous, combustible, or irritating by- products during installation or curing period. c. Do not require special tools for installation. d. Provide air -tight and smoke -tight seal. C. Labels: Red, permanent marking using the words "Fire -Rated Assembly - Do not disturb - See maintenance instructions" and the testing agency designation, or equivalent as approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 1. For marking firestopping assemblies, use self- adhesive tape or wired -on labels. 2. For marking fire barriers themselves, use letters at least 2 inches high. 3. Include installer's company name and telephone number on labels. 2.2 _. GAP FIRESTOPPING B. Cementitious Seal: Spray or trowel applied cementitious fireproofing. 1. Acceptable product: W.R. Grace & Co. "Monokote MK -6." C. Substitutions: Provide assemblies whose fire - resistance ratings have been determined by testing in the configurations required and which have fire - resistance ratings at least as high as that of the fire -rated assembly in which they are to be installed. 1. Partition head firestopping: a. Coordinate configuration requirements with work of Gypsum Drywall Section in Division 9. b. Provide assembly which will accommodate plus and minus 1/2 inch deflection of structure above without reduction of firestopping capability. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Preinstallation Inspection: Inspect all fire barriers for penetrations of any type; mark or otherwise identify all penetrations indicating action required: 1) repair; or 2) firestopping. 1. Conduct inspection prior to covering up or enclosing walls or ceilings. 2. Submit a report detailing findings of inspection to the Owner. 24646.00 Safing Insulation: Semi -rigid mineral fiber; minimum 6 pcf density. 1. Acceptable product: USG "Thermafiber Safing." 2. Provide galvanized steel retaining clips for curtainwall safing, or sheet metal closures as required and /or detailed. 3. Seal edges and joints in foil face with USG "Thermafiber Smoke Seal" or approved. 4. Metal deck flutes over fire walls: Preformed silicone rubber foam units, friction fit in flut opening, 15/16 -inch thick; Dow Corning "Q- Stop" or approved. 07275 - 3 If the configuration of a particular penetration does not conform to the configuration necessary for the required firestopping assembly, notify the installer of the penetration for modification of the configuration to suit the assembly; do not use the firestopping assembly in other configurations except as specifically stated in the test report or as approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Installation Meeting: Prior to start of work, conduct a meeting to verify that the installation instructions and procedures required are understood by installers. 1. The following shall attend this meeting: a. General Contractor. b. Installers of firestopping. c. Firestopping manufacturers' representatives. d. Representative of authority having jurisdiction. B. Prepare penetrations in accordance with the material manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install firestopping materials in exact accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the conditions of the testing; provide all accessory materials required. B. Remove combustible forming materials, unless they are a required component of the tested assembly. 3.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION OF PENETRATIONS A. Near fire barriers, mark each exposed penetration with label identifying it as a fire - stopped assembly. B. Mark each fire barrier above lay -in ceilings with words identifying it as a fire barrier at intervals required by authorities having jurisdiction, but not less than 20 feet. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect completed installations for completeness and correct installation. 1. If installed work is to be covered in completed work, inspect prior to covering. 2. Submit report of inspection to the Owner. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean up excess material adjacent to penetrations promptly; use methods and materials approved by the manufacturers of the penetration seals and of surfaces to be cleaned. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA', WASHINGTON SECTION 07275 FIRESTOPPING 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work during curing period. B. Protect installed work from damage from construction operations using substantial barriers if necessary. 07275 - 4 L END .OF SECTION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA; WASHINGTON SECTION 07275 FIRESTOPPING Repair damaged materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions: 24646.00 07275 - 5 f. t L i i L PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plywood panel siding. B. Related Sections: 1. Rough carpentry: Division 6. 2. Flashing: Elsewhere in Division 7. 3. Sealants: Elsewhere in Division 7. 4. Painting: Division 9. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07460 SIDING A. Labeling: Each piece of wood or wood product siding shall bear appropriate grade marks evidencing compliance with specified standards. Products not so labeled shall be removed from the site. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional changes. Support stacks at several uniformly spaced points to prevent deformation. Store stacks raised above ground. Cover to protect from rain and snow. Select and arrange cover to allow air circulation under and all around stacks to prevent condensation. Maintain and restore displaced coverings. Remove from the site any wood products that have been subjected to moisture or that do not comply with the specified moisture requirements. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrates: 1. Schedule and install wall penetrations before installing siding. 2. Do not apply siding over wet or moist substrates. Apply siding only to completely dry substrates. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Painting and Other Coatings: 1. Plywood panel siding: Schedule first coat of finish specified elsewhere to be applied within 2 weeks of siding installation and complete finishing as soon as practicable thereafter. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLYWOOD PANEL SIDING A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Georgia- Pacific Corporation. B. Materials: 1. Face veneer: Douglas fir. 2. Pattern: T1 -11. 3. Groove spacing: Match exisiting. 4. Panel thickness exclusive of grooving: 5/8 inch, minimum. 5. Provide greater panel thickness if required to meet specified span rating. 6. Span rating: 16 inches on center. 24646.00 07460 - 1 2.2 SEALANTS A. Specified elsewhere. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Verify that required framing is installed and complete, including blocking and miscellaneous members as required by siding pattern, spacing, and joining. 3.2 FIELD PRIME- PAINTING OF WOOD AND WOOD PRODUCT SIDING EDGES. A. Panel Products: Prior to installation, seal panel edges including both factory edges and field cut edges using products specified elsewhere. Long edges: 3/8 -inch shiplapped. Fasteners: 1. Materials: a. Hot -dip galvanized siding or casing 2. Length and spacing as indicated. B Field finishing of siding is specified elsewhere. 3.3 PLYWOOD PANEL SIDING INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install panels such that edges occur over framing or solid blocking. 2. At panel edges and ends: 1/8 -inch space unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. 3. Install panels to avoid built -in compression stress and to allow for framing shrinkage due to drying. B. Standard Nailing: Observe the following nailing except where otherwise required: 1. Maximum nail spacing on center: 6 inches at panel edges and 12 inches at intermediate supports. 2. Siding 1/2 inch thick or less: a. Applied direct to studs: 6d nails. 3.4 SEALANTS A. Panel Siding: Apply sealant to framing before installing panel or apply bead.along in -place panel before installing subsequent panel. Do not use exposed beads of sealant except where concealed application is not possible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove scraps and debris from the site on a regular and frequent basis. Do not allow to accumulate. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION.07460 SIDING END OF SECTION 07460 - 2 1 PART 1 - GENERAL. 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. New roof to match existing. 2. Roof insulation. 3. Roof accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Flashing and sheet metal (weather protection for base flashings): Section 07600. 2. Roof drains: Division 15. 1.2 SUBMITTALS SOUTHCENTER'CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07525 BUILT -UP ROOFING REPAIRS A. Product Data: Submit technical product information, installation instructions, and recommendations for each type of roofing material Furnish additional information as necessary to demonstrate products comply with project criteria. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for prefabricated curbs. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Begin roofing installation when weather conditions are within acceptable limits according to manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's unopened, sealed containers or packages, with manufacturer's labels intact. B. Store materials in weather - protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Roof System: 1. Product names used in this section form the basis of the design and contract documents. 2. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be considered for substitution under the provisions of the conditions of the contract and Division 1: a. Firestone Building Products Company. b. GAF Building Materials Corporation. c. Performance Roofing, Inc. ( "Derbigum "). d. Siplast, Inc. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Roofing Base Sheet: Nominal 25 pound per roofing square asphalt coated fiberglass sheet meeting the requirements of ASTM D 4601, Type II. 24646.00 07525 - 1 ,SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07525 BUILT -UP ROOFING REPAIRS B. Modified Bituminous Ply Sheet, Smooth Surface: Preformed sheets of reinforced rubberized asphalt for application using applied heat (torch). 1. Acceptable product: "Firestone APP 160 "; Firestone. 2. Minimum thickness: 4mm (0.160 inch). 3. Reinforcement: Polyester or polyester and fiberglass. 2.3 INSULATION A. System Requirements: 1. Match type and thickness of existing insulation. 2. Flame spread: 75 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 3. Provide insulation overlay for plastic foam insulation (not required for non - plastic insulations B. Insulation Overlay: 1. Perlite board, 3/4 inch thick: ASTM C 728. 2. Facers: Manufacturer's standard. C. Tapered Insulation System: Provide in areas where structure does not slope to drain. 1. Minimum slope: 1/4 inch per foot. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Roofing Bitumen: ASTM D 312, Type III; roofing asphalt. B. Primer: Cutback asphalt; ASTM D 41. C. Aluminum Roof Coating: Karnak " #97AF Fibrated Aluminum Roof Coating" or approved product meeting the requirements of ASTM D 2824, Type III (asbestos- free). D. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, fluoropolymer- coated steel, or nonferrous metal. 1. Size, length, and type recommended by manufacturer as suitable for material to be fastened, substrate, and that will comply with requirements of governing authorities and listing agencies. E. Sealant: One - component urethane, nonsag, compatible with membrane and flashing materials. F. Nailers and Blocking: Fabricate from treated wood as specified in Division 6 section on rough carpentry. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where roofing is to be installed. Correct substrate surfaces which are unacceptable to the installer, and are not in agreement with manufacturer's installation instructions, before starting roofing application. 3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. General: Remove trash, debris, grease, oil, water, and contaminants from roof deck surface. 24646.00 07525 - 2 ti B. At Concrete Deck: Apply one coat of asphalt primer; coverage not less than 300 s.f per gallon. C. Install blocking, nailers, cants, reglets, and similar attachment devices as indicated or required. 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install insulation units in continuous application (full mopping) of roofing bitumen or insulation adhesive. B. Install thermal insulation with end joints staggered and joints of upper layer staggered in both directions from joints of layer below. C. Install tapered insulation system in accordance with approved layout drawings to ensure positive slope to drains. Cover plastic foam insulation with a layer of insulation overlay board in continuous application (full mopping) of roofing bitumen or insulation adhesive. 3 4 INSTALLATION A. Prevent roofing materials from damaging or spilling on adjacent construction. Replace adjacent materials damaged by roofing system installation. B. Interruptions of Roofing Work: 1. Install roofing plies, asphalt, and other roofing materials in a way to prevent roofing plies from being left exposed during precipitation or overnight. C. Torch Application: Heat underside of torch - applied roofing sheets sufficiently to ensure an even layer of fluid bitumen at point of contact with substrate. 1. Press mating surfaces together using minimum 20 -pound roller while bitumen is fluid. 2. Seams: Bitumen must flow a minimum of 1/4 inch out from seam edges. 3. Precautions: Exercise care when using torches to avoid setting fire to roofing and adjacent materials. Do not heat roofing sheets to the point of excessive smoke generation or "melt- through." Remove and replace roofing that shows evidence of excessive heating. D. Installation of Roofing Sheets: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation to ensure proper installation of sheet without irregularities such as fishmouths or wrinkles. 2. Place and press sheets during installation to ensure proper adhesion to substrate and adjacent roofing sheet. 3. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that joints are solidly adhered and weathertight. ! . 1 3.5 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07525 BUILT -UP ROOFING REPAIRS A. General: Comply with roofing manufacturer's current application instructions. B. Base Ply Installation: Install base ply in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as follows: 24646.00 07525 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA,. WASHINGTON SECTION 07525 BUILT -UP ROOFING REPAIRS 1. Adhered base ply: Install in full mopping of liquid asphalt. Install in the following locations: a. Existing roof membrane. b. New or existing roof insulation. C. Roofing Plies: 1. New roofing (over insulation and base sheet): Install two layers of smooth surface modified bituminous roofing ply sheet. Lap plies 19 inches; stagger end joints. 2. Roof repair (over existing membrane and new base sheet): Install one layer of smooth surface modified bituminous roofing sheet. 3.6.. FLASHING AND STRIPPING A. Fasten edge of membrane at terminations to receive base fleshings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. If torch -on method of application is used, take special precautions to avoid setting fire to cants, nailers, or insulation. Provide two -ply smooth surface modified bituminous fleshings. Apply using methods recommended by modified bituminous sheet roofing manufacturer. 1. Extend all plies of fleshings at terminations and curbs to height indicated, but to not less than 4 inches above top of cant or to top of curb less than 6 inches high. 2. Nail fleshings at 8 inches on center, approximately 1 inch from top edge. 3. Seal top edge of flashing at terminations and curbs with sealant. C. Sheet Metal Work: Specified in Section 07600. Provide weather protection for edges of roofing membrane and base fleshings. D. Stripping: Do not strip metal items heavier than 24 gage sheet steel, 16 -oz copper or 0.040 -inch aluminum. Do not strip metal items greater than 10 feet in length. 1. Set metal flange in a full bed of roofing cement. Prime metal surface to receive stripping. 2. Install stripping as specified for flashings above, except for nailing requirements. a. Extend modified bituminous stripping a minimum of 6 inches onto roof membrane. E. Existing Roof Membrane: Remove existing coating from surface and join to new membrane. Extend each roofing ply 6 inches beyond previous ply. (Minimum lap of new membrane over old membrane: 18 inches.) F. Coating: Apply fibrated aluminum roof coating to all membrane surfaces, flashing and stripping. Apply coating at manufacturer's recommended rate to obtain full coverage but not less than 2 gallons per roofing square (100 s.f.). G. Install other accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA Construction Details as applicable. 24646.00 07525 - 4 • • CLEANING Remove bituminous markings and roof coating from finished surfaces. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions. SOUTHCENTERCORPORATUARE: TUKWILA WASHINGTON SECTION • 3UILTUP . 1200FINGREPAIRS.: . 1 24646.00 07525 - 5 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sheet metal flashing and trim and gutters. 2. Fasteners and attachment devices. 3. Coatings and slip sheets to isolate sheet metal from dissimilar. materials. B. Wood blocking, nailers, edge strips, and battens are not specified in this section. A. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings clearly indicating component profiles, joints, transitions, fastening methods, and relationship of flashing materials to adjacent construction. Installer: A company familiar with installing products included in this section and which has completed at least 20 installations similar in scope to work included in this section. B. Quality Standard: 1. Fabricate and install sheet metal work in accordance with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," unless specifically indicated otherwise. A. Prefinished Galvanized Steel Sheet: Coil coated, commercial quality steel sheet, ASTM A 526 or ASTM A 527, G90 hot -dip galvanized. 1. Minimum thickness: 24 gage (0.0239 inch), unless indicated otherwise. 2. Finish: 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" resin finish over epoxy primer; minimum system thickness 1.0 mil. Provide manufacturer's standard prime coat on underside. a. Color: Selected by Owner, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard color selection. 3. Provide strippable plastic protective film on prefinished surface. A. Fasteners: Corrosion - resistant metal of same material as the material being fastened, or other material recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish and color of exposed fastener heads to finish and color of sheet material being fastened. B. Sealant: As specified in Division 7. 1. Use noncuring type for concealed joints. 2. Use nonsag elastomeric type for exposed joints. C. Joint Adhesive: Two - component noncorrosive epoxy adhesive, recommended by metal manufacturer for sealing of nonmoving joints. 2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Form sheet metal to match profiles indicated, substantially free from oil- canning, fish - mouths, and other defects. B. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for applications indicated. C. Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work exceeding 15 feet running length. 1. Flashing and trim: Provide movement joints at maximum spacing of. 10 feet; no joints allowed within 2 feet of corner or intersection. D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible. 1. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. E. Form a 1/2 -inch hem on underside of exposed edges. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 1. Gage: As recommended by SMACNA or metal manufacturer for application, but in no case less than gage of metal being secured. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which products of this section are to be installed and verify that work may properly commence. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been fully resolved. 1. Verify that nailers, blocking, and other attachment provisions for sheet metal work are properly located and securely fastened to resist effects of wind and thermal stresses. '} 3.2 PREPARATION A. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. A. General: Comply with sheet metal manufacturer's installation methods and recommendations in the SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 3.3 INSTALLATION B. Isolate dissimilar metals by means of an approved paint coating, adhered polyethylene sheet, or other means approved by the Owner. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL B. Sealed Joints: Form minimum 1 -inch hooked joints and embed flange into sealant or adhesive. Form metal to completely conceal sealant or adhesive. 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. 2. Moving joints: When ambient temperature is moderate (40 -70 degrees F) at time of installation, set joined members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting position of joined members proportionally for temperatures above 70 degrees F. Do 24646.00 07600 - 2 i.? • . SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE' SQUARE . . TUKWILA, WASHINGTON . ..: -' .. SECTION 07600 - • . Il i! I._ . .. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL • , . . , . . . .. : . . .. , , . . . -1, not install sealant at temperatures below degrees F Refer to section on sealants elsewhere in Division..Tfor handling *.. installation requirements for joint sealers.. ..- .- : I 3.4 ::CLEANINGAND PROTECTION • • . • . „ .. . . . . .': f! L. ' Remove protective film from prefinished sheet metal immediately after . .. • . ,-- . - , • . ' -- .,. . .. - installation. • . . / , • . • , ' - , ' . ' , . B.,. Repair or replace work which is.damagedor defaced, as directed by the I Owner . . . . , . . T 1.. Refinish marred and abraded areas of prefinished sheet using' finish manufacturer's recommended methods and materials. Replace •units which, in the opinion of the Owner, •cannot'satisfactorily be : L refinished in place. . . . . C. . ' Protect sheet metal work as recommended by the .installer-so that '' • -z. , . completed work will be clean, secured, and without damage at . .substantial completion. , . . . , • END OF SECTION :-, 1. 24646.00 07600 - 3 PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Steel: Division 5. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Requirements: Design system to safely withstand wind load, dead load and live loads indicated on the drawings (refer to Structural General Notes). 1. Deflection of Structure: Allow for deflection of structural members to which system is anchored. Environmental Requirements: 1. Provide for expansion and contraction of system components due to ambient temperature and solar heat gain. Accommodate movement due to temperature change without buckling, undue stress on structural elements, reduction of performance, or other damaging effects. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum framing and trim. 2. Translucent composite panels. 3. Flashings. 4. Anchors, fasteners, shims, and inserts as required to attach to structure. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data showing materials, fabrication, installation instructions and recommendations, and maintenance and reglazing instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, dimensions, shapes of members, details of composite members, details of interface with structure, reinforcement, expansion provisions, method and location of attachment to structural system, and glazing materials and methods. C. Samples: 1. Samples for Verification of Panel Color(s): Submit fabricated panels minimum 18 by 24 inches with faces as specified. 2. Samples for Verification of Coated Finishes: For each color, submit 12- inch -long sections of extrusions or formed sections and 6- inch - square sheets. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard product warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in product which may occur during the warranty period. 1. Warranty period: 5 years from date of project acceptance. 24646.00 07820 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07820 TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CANOPY ROOF SYSTEM /SKYLIGHT SYSTEM SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07820 TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHTS A. Aluminum Perimeter Framing, clips and trim and associated flashing: 1. Framing members and trim: Extruded aluminum. a. See drawings for profiles, dimensions, and arrangement of members. 2. Finish: Clear aluminum. B. Translucent Panels: 2 -3/4 -inch thick aluminum and fiberglass composite translucent panels. 2.2 TRANSLUCENT FACING A. Translucent fiberglass faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins by insulated skylight system fabricator specially for architectural use. 1. Color: Smooth top sheet; match Kalwall "White 25- 200 ", U- Factor 53U, L.T. 35%; matte finish bottom sheet. 2.: The face sheets shall be uniform in color to prevent splotchy appearance. Faces shall be completely free of ridges and wrinkles which prevent proper surface contact in bonding to the aluminum grid core. Clusters of air bubbles /pinholes which collect moisture and dirt are not acceptable. 3. Face sheets shall be .70" thick. Faces shall not vary more than 10 percent in thickness. B. Weatherability: 1. The full thickness of the facing sheet shall not change color more than 3.0 Hunter or CIE Units (DELTA E by ASTM D -2244) after 5 years outdoor South Florida weathering at 7 degrees facing south, determined by the average of at least 3 white samples without a protective film or coating to insure maximum, long term color stability. 2. Face sheet shall not darken more than .2 Units (DELTA L by ASTM D- 2244) when exposed to 150 degrees F for 2 weeks. 3. The exterior face shall have a permanent erosion barrier to provide maximum long term resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure and shall be warranted against fiber exposure for 25 years. 4. The exterior face shall have a self - cleaning surface molecularly bonded under factory controlled conditions, minimum 1.2 mils thick, fully field restorable if worn or damaged. 2.3 GRID CORE A. Aluminum I- beams: 6063 -T6 with provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin - mullion and perimeter to prevent high and low intersections which do not allow full bonding surface to contact face material. Width of I -beam shall be no less than 7/16 ". I -beam grid shall be machined to tolerances of plus or minus .002" for flat panels. B. Laminate Adhesive: Heat and pressure resin -type engineered for structural sandwich panel use. Minimum strength shall be: 1. 750 PSI tensile strength by ASTM C -297 after 2 exposures to 6 cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D -1037. 2. 500 PSI Shear strength average of 5 exposures by ASTM D -1002: a. 50% relative humidity at 73 degrees F b. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D -1183 c. 182 degrees F d. Full Cycle Soak e. 500 Hour Oxygen Bomb 24646.00 07820 - 2 2.4 PANEL FABRICATION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07820 TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHTS A. Fabricate panels as true sandwich panels of flat fiberglass sheets bonded to a grid core of mechanically interlocking aluminum I -beams and shall be laminated under a controlled process of heat and. pressure. Tape bond systems are not allowed. B. Grid patterns for flat panels shall be nominal 8" x 20" and symmetrical about the horizontal center line of each panel. C. Grid patterns for curved panels shall be as indicated and symmetrical about the vertical center line of each panel. D. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I -beam and have a neat, sharp edge. In order to insure bonding strength, white spots at intersections of muntins and mullions shall not exceed 4 for each 40 square feet of panel, nor shall they be more than 3/64" in width. E. Pre - assemble skylight panels and aluminum perimeter frame where practical and sealed at the factory. Panels should be shipped to the job site in rugged shipping units, ready for erection. 2.5 CUSTOM TRIM, BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM A. Extruded 6063 -T6 and 6063 -T5 aluminum screw attached clamp -tite type closure system. B. Aluminum closures supplied with 300 series stainless steel screws (excluding final fasteners to the building) and shall be factory sealed to the panels. Aluminum battens and cap plates shall be field installed. C. Exposed Finish: Architectural Class I, Clear anodic coating in accordance with AA- M12C22A41 (minimum 0.7 mil thickness). 1. Anodic coating shall be continuous, fully sealed and free from powdery surfaces. 2. Coating shall meet the specified thickness when measured in accordance with ASTM B137 or B244. 3. There shall be no residual stain in the coating when tested in accordance with ASTM B136. D. Flexible Sealing Tape: Manufacturer's standard pre - applied to closure system at the factory under controlled conditions. E. Fasteners: Compatible with aluminum; nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive, noncorrodible material. 1. Provide reinforcement where fasteners are screwed into aluminum members of less than 1/8 inch thickness. 2. Exposed fasteners: Match finish of members being fastened. F. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive material. G. Fabrication - General: 1. Perform all finishing before shipping to project site. 2. When it is necessary to begin fabrication without actual field measurements, provide adequate fabrication and installation tolerances for correct fit. 3. Fit joints tightly with adjacent members in correct relationship. 4. Avoid damage to finishes. 24646.00 07820 - 3 24646.00 ENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA r :WASHINGTON SECTION-07820 TRANSLUCENT'PANEL SKYLIGHTS Welding: Perform welding before finishing; usemethods WhiCh'Ao :discolor metal; 'grind exposed welds flush; match original finish. Provide as required to comply with:performance, requirements and for rigidity; isolate dissimilat:metalSapecified 07820 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION • . • PREP1RATION • • A. :Examine structural framing; report conditions'in writing which adversely affect ihstallatiOn:': - - . 'INSTALLATION.* - - • • A. Install 'in accordance with manufacturer's recommendationS and-: instructions. '2,Install-work'la:accordance with ApprOved drawirigs::"' . • ' Install plumb and level, square and true, in cOrrect location Support.properly and securely anchor; where anchors are intended to • allow movement, adjust for proper operation.' ' Separate 'aluminum exposed to weather from dissimilar metals; coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage cavitieS one of the : materials specified. Aluminum, stainless steel, zinc, cadmium; and small areas of white bronze are not considered dissimilar from each other. . 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean canopy roof system, soon after installationof translucent ' panels; taking care toavoid damage to finishes. • • END OF SECTION • LJ - I li • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide joint sealers and backing materials for sealing of interior and exterior joints in construction. 1. "Sealant ", "Joint Sealer ", "Calk ", "Caulk ", "Calking ", and "Caulking" are interchangeable terms for purposes of this contract. Refer to "Sealant Schedule" in Part 2 of this section for uses for each type of sealant material. B. Requirements of other sections for sealant materials and application take precedence over this section. C. Related Sections: 1. Cast -in -place concrete: Division 3. 2. Precast concrete: Division 3. 3. Sealants used in conjunction with firestopping: Elsewhere in Division 7. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS A. Product Data: Submit copies of tests and other product data verifying conformance with specified performance characteristics. Include preparation, recommended back -up material and other pertinent items as required. A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in the installation of bulk sealants of the types required, and able to show similar installations in watertight condition. B. Compatibility Testing: Obtain representative samples of exterior materials which will be in contact with sealants. Have sealant manufacturer test proposed sealants for adhesion and discoloration of sealant or substrate materials. C. Job Mock -Up: Prior to proceeding with sealing work, prime and seal representative joints of each type encountered on the Work as selected by Owner; demonstrate adhesion and other performance characteristics and obtain approval before proceeding. 1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE A. General: Deliver materials to the building in sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name, batch number or date of manufacture, and manufacturer's standard label information. B. Shelf Life: 1. Discard or remove from site, outdated sealants as indicated by shelf life from date of manufacture. Shelf life shall be as published in the sealant product data, or where not published, as follows: a. Single component sealants: 12 months. b. Multi- component sealants: 24 months. 2. Use of sealant in packages which are not labeled with date of manufacture or "use before" date: Not permitted unless manufacturer furnishes certificates correlating batch number with date of manufacture. 24646.00 07900 - 1 C. Backer rods and accessory materials: Keep backing rods dry and away from dirt and other contaminants at all times. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: Performance of joint sealing work is subject to the following environmental conditions. B. Temperature: Do no work when the temperature is 40 -deg. F. or below. C. .Moisture: Do no work when moisture is present or when surfaces to be sealed are wet. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty: 1. Furnish 5 -year warranty for materials and labor required to repair and replace faulty sealants. This warranty shall include any adhesive or cohesive failure of joints, staining of surfaces adjacent to joints by sealant or primer, and chalking or visible color change on surface of the cured sealant. 2. Provide 10 -year unconditional manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR SEALANTS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS A. Type "A" Sealant: Low modulus silicone, non -sag; meeting the requirements of ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. Minimum movement capability of plus and minus 50 percent. One of the following or approved: 1. Dow Corning "790 ". B. Type "B" Sealant: Two part, self - leveling, polyurethane sealant; meeting the requirements of ASTM C920, Grade P, Type M, Class 25. Minimum Shore A hardness: 40, plus or minus 5. One of the following or approved. 1. Sonneborn "Sonolastic SL2" 2. Tremco "THC 900" 3. Sika "Sikaflex -2c SL" 4. Mameco International "Vulkem 255" C. Color: Match color of adjacent material occurring in same plane. Where joints occur adjacent to two or more material colors in same plane, match color of lighter adjacent material, unless otherwise directed. 2.2 INTERIOR SEALANTS A. Type "B -1" Sealant: Two- component, flexible epoxy joint sealant. Minimum movement capability: plus and minus 12.5 percent. Minimum Shore A hardness: 60. One of the following or approved. 1. Sika Corp. "Sikadur 51 SL" 2. Euclid Chemical Co. "Euco 700" 3. Pecora Corporation "EP -800 Epoxy Joint Filler" B. Type "C" Sealant: Acrylic latex sealant complying with requirements of ASTM C834. One of the following or approved. 1. Tremco "Tremco Acrylic Latex Caulk" 2. Pecora Chemical Corporation "AC -20 Acrylic Latex" 3. Sonneborn "Sonolac" 24646.00 07900 - 2 • LI 2.3 NONCURING SEALANT .2.4 SEALANT ACCESSORY MATERIALS 2.5 SEALANT SCHEDULE 24646.00 07900 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS Type "D" Sealant: Mildew resistant silicone sealant complying with requirements of FS TT -S -1543, Class B. One of the following or approved. 1. Dow Corning "786 Mildew Resistant Silicone" 2. General Electric "Sanitary 1700 Silicone.Sealant" A. Tape or mastic (gun - grade) non - curing, non - hardening, synthetic rubber sealer, recommended for use by manufacturer for concealed metal -to- metal joints subject to movement or vibration. B. Tape Sealant: Solvent -free, butyl -based tape sealant with a solids content of 100 percent; meeting the requirements of AAMA 804.1 -85 (as described in AAMA 800). Packaged in rolls with release paper backing. Acceptable products include: 1. Tremco "440 Tape ". 2. Pecora "Extru - Seal ". 3. PTI "606 Architectural Sealant Tape" C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. Acceptable products include: 1. Tremco "Curtainwall Sealant" 2. PTI "404 Bed and Seal Sealant" A. Joint Filler ( "Backer" or "Backer Rod "): Closed cell, non- absorptive, polyethylene foam or polyethylene - jacketed polyurethane foam. 1. Joint filler tensile strength: 20-30 psi and as recommended for compatibility with sealant by sealant manufacturer. 2. Joint filler shape: Round. 3. Joint filler sizes: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer, with diameter never less than 30% greater than width of joint to give "hour glass" shape to the sealant. B. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Provide self- adhesive tape wherever applicable. C. Joint Primer or Conditioner: Where required by the type of sealant and the materials to which the sealant is to be applied, shall be of a type as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for particular surface. A. General: The various types of sealants shall be used in the following locations: 1. Type "A ": Exterior vertical joints, (all joints not subject to foot or vehicle traffic), between precast concrete and masonry, or exterior insulation and finish system. 2. Type "B ": Exterior and interior horizontal joints (joints subject to foot or vehicle traffic) in concrete, masonry, stone, tile, etc. except joints in interior concrete slabs. 3. Type "B -1 ": Interior horizontal joints in concrete slabs (both exposed and those to be concealed by floor finish material). 4. Type "C ": Interior vertical joints, except in wet areas as described below. 5. Type "D ": Interior vertical and horizontal joints in wet areas such as toilet and shower areas. Joints in interior ceramic work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS A. Inspect surfaces for satisfactory and proper condition to receive sealant; application of sealant materials constitutes acceptance of joint surfaces as suitable to receive sealant. 3.2 PREPARATION it A. Clean joint surfaces free from dirt, dust and other contaminants . affecting bond of the sealant material. B. Apply sealants to dry surfaces only. C. Remove lacquers and protective films from metal surfaces. D. Apply masking around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from defacement and staining during sealing operations. Remove masking tape within 10 minutes after joint has been filled and tooled. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Mix and apply sealant materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions; apply sealant before weatherproofing materials are applied. 1. Do not apply sealant until mockup applications are approved. 2. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 1193 except where exceeded by manufacturer's instructions or requirements of this specification. B. Priming: Apply primer to contact surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer for the conditions of the application; if recommended, apply full strength, undiluted in uniform coating over surfaces. Care shall be exercised to ensure that only interior of joint surfaces are primed. C. Joint Filler: Install in butt type joints receiving sealant where depth of joint exceeds manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Use a blunt rounded tool or plain faced roller for installation. 2. Force joint filler into joint. 3. Do not puncture the surface skin when installing closed cell material. Avoid longitudinal stretching of the rod during installation. 4. Install to width -to -depth ratio recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Where manufacturer does not make specific recommendation install backer to 50 percent of the joint width but not less than 1/4 -inch, below the surface of the joint. D. Bond Breaker Tape: Where depth of joint is not sufficient to require joint filler, install bond breaker tape to cover full width and length of joint cavity. In all cases, sealant shall bond to only two opposing surfaces of the joint. E. Joint Width: Provide joint width as shown, or if not indicated, provide minimum 3/8" joint width. F. Application: 1. Before applying sealant, repair damaged masking. 2. Apply sealant over backing to uniform thickness in continuous beads, filling joints and voids solid. Superficial pointing with skim bead will not be accepted. 24646.00 07900 - 4 1 • ''. ,. . . • , . :, . , . • A. 'Clean7Up: Upon completion, remove and dispose of mabking 'remove excess surfaces of all soil •'!: -.'.* .... and stain resulting:,frOm'eeeling operations. ::':::. [•'''' 2' :.',..:':::::. ' '..:. 1 and comply with recommended cleaning materials and methods of manufacturer of:burface-:requiring-Cleaning . . . .. . . .. • . END OF SECTION 3 After application, tool surface to achieve complete adhesion and contact, leave surface of sealant slightly concave. Tooling shall be completed in one continuous stroke. SOUTHCENTER. SQUARE', .,.: TUKWILA,:.WASHINGTON •SECTION .07900 JOINT SEALERS ' 24646.00 07900 - 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glazed aluminum swinging doors. 2. Aluminum framing system. 3. Furnishing and installation of glass. Related Sections: 1. Joint sealants: Division 7. 2. Door hardware: Elsewhere in Division 8. 3. Glass: Elsewhere in Division 8. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Assemblies: Design to comply with the performance criteria listed below. B. Thermal Movement: Design to accommodate expansion and contraction resulting from air temperature range of 120 degrees F, solar heat gain, and nighttime re- radiation. C. Structural Performance: Design to withstand all live and dead loads without deformation and without deflection greater than 1/175 of span. 1. Deflection in plane of wall: Not greater than that which would reduce glass edge clearance to 25 percent of design dimension or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, or that which would reduce glass bite to 75 percent of design dimension. 2. Design system to withstand 150 percent of design wind load with no failure or permanent deformation greater than 0.2 percent of span. D. Wind Loads: Framing system, including anchorages, shall be designed to withstand the wind pressures based on the 1994 UBC, Section 1613. Maximum deflection of any member shall not exceed L/175. Importance factor shall be 1.0. E. Air Infiltration: When tested in accordance with ASTM E283, at a test pressure of 6.24 psf, the air infiltration shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot. F. Water Penetration: When tested in accordance with ASTM E331, no water shall penetrate during a test period of 15 minutes when the entrances or storefronts are subjected to a rate of flow of 5 gal /hr /sq.ft. with a differential pressure across the unit of 6.24 psf. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's material specifications, drawings of standard components, and installation recommendations. B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, field measurements, composite members, reinforcement, anchorages, expansion provisions, hardware mounting, and glazing. Show compliance with specified structural performances, wind loads, air infiltration and water penetration. C. Calculations: Submit structural calculations required to show compliance with wind load and deflection requirements, including anchorages. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 08415 - 1 SOUTHCENTER.CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT D. Warranty on Fabricated Products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard for Wind Load Testing: ASTM E 330. B. Standard for Air Infiltration Testing: ASTM E 283; report result as cubic feet per minute per unit of measurement indicated, at pressure differential indicated. . Standard for Water Penetration Testing: ASTM E 331; report result at pressure differential indicated. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Take field measurements before starting fabrication. 1.6 WARRANTY' L A. Fabricated Products: Submit a written warranty, guaranteeing to correct failures in work which occur within 5 years from date of substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the Owner may have under the contract documents. 1. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship, failure to meet the specified performance requirements, faulty operation, and deterioration other than normal weathering. Correction may include repair or replacement. 2. Warranty to be signed by manufacturer, installer, and Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Where product brand names are given, the design is based on the products indicated. B. Aluminum Framing Systems: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Kawneer Company, Inc. b. Vistawall Architectural Products Division /Butler Manufacturing Company. C. Glazed Aluminum Doors: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Kawneer Company, Inc. b. Vistawall Architectural Products Division /Butler Manufacturing Company. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Aluminum Framing System: Extruded aluminum. 1. Style: Kawneer "Trifab 451 ", Vistawall "Series 3000" or approved. 2. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the judgment of the Owner, such differences do not detract from design concept or performance. 24646.00 08415 - 2 1 ' L.J 3. Glazing method: Resilient gasket glazed, with provision for replacement of glazing without disassembly of framing. 4. Finish: a. Class I color anodized finish. (1) Color: Dark bronze to match existing. Field verify and submit samples for Owner's approval. 5. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes as recommended by aluminum framing manufacturer. 6. End Dams: Provide end dams as recommended by aluminum framing manufacturer. 2.3 SWINGING DOORS A. Stile and Rail Doors: Glazed doors with tubular extruded aluminum frame members. 1. Frame joints: Either concealed mechanically fastened, using tie rods or j -bolts and reinforcing plates; or welded. 2. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches. 3. Stile width: 2 inches nominal. 4. Full glazed, with one intermediate mullion. 5. Glazing stops: Snap -on extruded aluminum, designed to allow replacement of glazing without disassembly of frame. Provide nonremovable exterior stops. 6. Glaze doors in factory. 7. Finish: a. Class I color anodized finish. (1) Color: Dark bronze to match existing. Field verify and submit samples for Owner's approval. B. Weatherstripping: 1. At fixed stops: Replaceable, compression type molded gaskets of neoprene or EPDM rubber complying with ASTM C 864 or of polyvinyl chloride complying with ASTM D 2287. 2. At other edges: Replaceable woven polypropylene, wool, or nylon pile, with aluminum or nylon fabric backing, complying with AAMA 701. 3. At door bottom: Adjustable molded EPDM or vinyl sweep, continuously contacting threshold; concealed mounting. 4. Provide weatherstripping on all exterior doors. 2.4 MATERIALS - GENERAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT A. Aluminum Members: ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet /plate; alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for the strength required, for corrosion resistance, and for the finish required. 1. Class I color anodized finish: AA- M12C22A42/A44 (nonspecular, as- fabricated mechanical finish; medium matte etched chemical finish; integral or electrolytically deposited color, architectural Class I anodic coating minimum 0.7 mil thick). B. Fasteners: Compatible with aluminum; aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive, noncorrodible material. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners. C. Concealed Flashing: Fully annealed, soft stainless steel, 26 gage minimum; or extruded aluminum, 0.032 inch minimum. D. Miscellaneous Concealed Metal Members: High- strength aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel; hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123 may be used for members which are not exposed to weather or abrasion. 24646.00 08415 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT E. Concrete Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or steel hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. F. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive material. G. Gaskets: Comply with ASTM C 864; style as recommended by manufacturer. H. Glass and Glazing Accessories: Provide products specified elsewhere in Division 8. I. Joint Sealers: Provide products specified in Division 7. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Any dimensions which may vary are indicated on drawings, with amount of dimensional variation allowed. B. Framing System: Pre -cut and perform all finishing in factory or shop. 1. Fit joints tightly with adjacent members in correct relationship. C. Doors: Factory- fabricate doors and factory - install all hardware except surface - mounted items. 1. Perform fabrication required for hardware before finishing. D. Welding: Perform welding before finishing; use methods which do not discolor metal; grind exposed welds flush; match original finish. E. Reinforcing: Provide as required to comply with performance requirements for rigidity and to support hardware; isolate dissimilar metals as specified in "Installation." F. Avoid damage to finishes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine structures; report conditions in writing which will adversely affect installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Install plumb and level, square and true, in correct location; support adequately and securely anchor. C. Separate aluminum exposed to weather from dissimilar metals; coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage cavities using one of the materials specified. Aluminum, stainless steel, zinc, cadmium, and small areas of white bronze are not considered dissimilar from each other. D. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of the materials specified. E. Install surface - mounted hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions. 24646.00 08415 - 4 : Install joint sealers between exterior sill members and the surface below: as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. Comply with Division 7 requirements for installation of joint sealers. Install glass using methods specified elsewhere in Division 8: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE 'rUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08415' ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT: .3 ,' ADJUST AND CLEAN Adjust each operable unit for correct function and smooth, free operation and so doors close tightly. B. ' Clean exterior and interior soon after installation of glass, taking care to avoid damage to finishes. L L 24646.00 08415 - 5 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08700 BUILDERS'- HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Door and related hardware specified or indicated on drawings . to complete project. Accessories, tools and fasteners required for installation and maintenance. 24646.00 Related Sections: 1., 08110 Steel doors and frames. . 08415 Hardware for aluminum entrances, not specified herein. 1.2 REFERENCES A.. General: The publications listed below form a part of this specification; comply with provisions of these publications except.' as otherwise shown or specified. Door. and Hardware Institute (DHI): 1. 'Recommended Location for Builders' Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames, 1990 Edition. C. Uniform Building Code (UBC): 1. 1994 Edition with Washington State Amendments D. .National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. Standard 80 "Fire Doors & Windows ", 1992 Edition. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Door Hardware Schedule: 1. Submit 4 reproducible copies of schedule on 8 -1/2 inch by 11 inch sheets. 2. Furnish cover sheet listing name of project as shown on Contract Documents, name of Owner, name of Architect, name of Contractor, name of hardware consultant and date of submittal or revision of submittal. 3. Furnish a vertical listing of hardware items used followed by manufacturer's name either on cover sheet or immediately following cover sheet; i.e., "hinges - manufacturer's name ". 08700 - 1 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE Schedule hardware items for each door separately in typed vertical form; a. Under each heading completely describe each opening. b. Doors with like hardware may be grouped under a single heading. j c. Owner will review schedule and will return 1 copy to Contractor with comments. ;! d. Resubmit only corrected copies of those sheets requiring j( correction and update all distributed copies with corrected sheets. e. Hardware schedules not complying with above will not be reviewed and will be returned for proper formatting. f. Door hardware schedules will not be reviewed by Owner until they have been reviewed and approved by Contractor. 11 t ; C. Templates: 1. Furnish hardware made to template; send template information to respective door and frame manufacturers or fabricators no later than 14 days after approval of door hardware schedule. 2 Coordinate templates between manufacturers of different hardware items to allow installation of various hardware items without interference between items. Special templates may be necessary. D. Keying Schedule: 1. Upon receipt of approved hardware schedule, arrange an interview with Owner to obtain necessary keying information. 2.. Submit 3 copies of keying schedule indicating door numbers in numerical sequence, lock or cylinder number and its particular keying. Obtain approval before proceeding. E. Contract Close -out Submittals: 1. At time of acceptance of Work, deliver hardware templates, instruction sheets, schedules, installation details, and similar data to Owner. 2. Submit data in a clearly identified 3 ring binder, organized by hardware type in BHMA sequencing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Contractor is responsible for proper application and fit of all door and specialty hardware in locations as indicated on drawings or as specified. 2. Coordinate dimensions between hardware items where installation of an item affects operation or installation of another item. 08700 - 2 :, J SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08700 BUILDERS! HARDWARE Storage: Store hardware in a dry, locked area. 1 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Package each item of hardware separately with necessary screws,• bolts; tampins, keys and installation templates. ,' packages clearly, identified with heading number as approved on hardware schedule. r L 1. l I. 1 Tools: 1. 'After final adjustment of door hardware turn over to Owner, tools furnished during construction for installation and adjustment. Tag and identify each item as to its use and applicable piece of door hardware. 24646.00 MAINTENANCE .PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers and Alternates: 1. Door hardware items are specified from following manufacturer's catalogs with acceptable alternate . manufacturers listed opposite for each listed hardware type. 2. Unless noted otherwise, only similar units of equivalent size, weight, type, function, design and finish will be approved provided templates and accessories can be furnished permitting installation without conflict with other specified hardware. Hardware Scheduled Mfr. Alternate Mfr. Hinges Stanley Hager, Lawrence, McKinney Exit Devices Adams Rite As approved Closers LCN Norton Stops & Holders Builders Brass Works As approved Pulls Builders Brass Works Quality, Tice Threshold & Pemko National Guard Weatherstripping Products, Reese, Sealeze, Zero Miscellaneous As Listed As approved 08700 - 3 2.2 14ATERIALS A. Door hardware isspecified`by use of a manufacturers'•numbers and are for purpose of establishing design, function, finish and quality. B. Except where scheduled otherwise, products with each hardware category are to be by one manufacturer, i.e. hinges, locks, closers, exit devices, etc. 2.3 DOOR HARDWARE A. HINGES: 1.. Provide hinges sized per hinge manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide quantities as noted in hardware sets. •SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE:SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE Equivalent Materials: Except as listed in hardware schedule, no substitutions will be allowed, unless approved by Owner. LOCK & LATCHSETS: 1. Include wrought box strikes or ANSI strikes with dust boxes, . each with curved lips sufficient to protect door frame and trim. 2. Provide through bolted trim with 03A levers for mortise locks. C. EXIT DEVICES: 1. Center exit device cases and trim on door stiles unless required otherwise by manufacturer's template. D. PULLS: 1. Provide through bolt fasteners and coordinate location with vertical rod exit devices. E. CLOSERS: 1. Provide sizes as recommended by manufacturer for conditions of installation and otherwise as required to insure latching of doors with weatherstripping. 2. Provide closers capable of adjustment to forces scheduled in Part 3 of this section. 3. Provide closers with arms designed to permit opening of doors as far as job conditions will permit; closers with arms restricting opening swing of doors will not be accepted. 4. Provide spacers for attachment of fifth screws for Cush -N -Stop arms. 5. Provide drop plates and accessory items or attachments for coordinating installation of closers with frames. F. DOOR STOPS & HOLDERS: 1. Provide fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 24646.00 08700 - 4 Li 1_ 1_ 1 •'' 2.5 FINISHES 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE ' vAS8INGTO0 SECTION 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE A. Provide hardware, including exposed fasteners, attachments, and accessory items, in following finishes, except as noted otherwise in Hardware Schedule: Hardware Item Finish Hinges UG1O8 Exit Devices US33D Cylinders DS36D Pulls US32D Closers KPDDARK Stops US26D Thresholds Extruded Aluminum Weatherstripping Clear Anodized Aluminum Miscellaneous DS36D 08700 - 5 G. THRESHOLDS: 1. Unless otherwise noted, provide in lengths to match widths H. rgING & SEALS: Provide in lengths to matob door and frame widths or heights as applicable. 2.4 KE ` ' ��: Arrangement: ' l Provide 6-pin cylinders for locks or oobeduleditemo`requiriug cylinders for proper operation. ' ` 2. Key to existing Schlage master key system and otherwise .key as later directed. B. Construction Keying: `1, During construction de locks keyed to a,000tzuotioo ` . masterkey ayoten; maintain locks operative for .access and exit by keys. - 2. At time of completion convert oouotzuctiookeyiog to building key system under supervision of Owner or Owner's authorized eu� �i ze�rea a ve. C. Keys: ` 1. 'Provide 3 keys to each lock or keyed alike group unless otherwise required by approved keying schedule. 3, After conversion to building keying system adjust locks for proper key operation, file keys in individual envelopes ' furnished by lock manufacturer and mark each with door number, key number, and master key set to facilitate their integration into a key control system. 4, Deliver change keys to Owner. Send masterkeys by registered mail directly from manufacturer to: Owner as later directed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 INSTALLATION. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE : TUKWILA, WASHINGTON . SECTION 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE 08700 - 6 A. Verify doors and frames are ready to receive work, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by Li manufacturers. A. General: 1. Install each hardware item in accordance with each manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2. Install no hardware until substrate finishes are complete. 3. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or otherwise finished, install each item completely then remove and store during application of finishes; reinstall upon completion of finishing operations. 4. Set items level, plumb, and true to line and location. 5. Drill and countersink items which are not factory prepared for fasteners. 6. Space fasteners and anchors per manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with industry standards. 7. Attach wall mounted hardware to concealed wall blocking. Do not install wall mounted hardware where wall blocking has not been installed and arrange for blocking to be installed before proceeding. B. Installation Clarification: Direct questions regarding placement of hardware to Owner for clarification prior to installation of items under question. C. Locations: Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or listed below, locate hardware in accordance with DHI recommended locations. D. Hardware & Specialties: In addition to installation requirements specified above, install hardware as follows: 1. Hinges: a. Where shimming is necessary for proper door /frame installation, use only metal shims. 2. Exit Devices: Install cross bar or push pad centered 38" above finished floor unless shown otherwise on drawings. 3. Pulls: Mount to not conflict with vertical exit device rods. 4. Closers: a. Mount per manufacturer's instructions, and special templates for coordination with other scheduled hardware. Adjust closers to control door swing and latch door. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. .3 C I. C L C L L L L I. L L I 1 24646.00 •SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE b. After air handling system has been balanced, arrange to have closer manufacturer's representative make final adjustment of their closers on job. c. Adjust closers to take 3 seconds minimum for door to swing from a 70 degree position to 3" from latching position. d. Adjust closers not to exceed following opening forces: Interior Doors 5 lb. Exterior Doors 8.5 lb. 5. Door stops: a. Install stops to permit maximum degree of swing allowed by job conditions. b. Locate floor stops so as not to create a tripping hazard, and to catch door at a point 6 inches in from latch edge, but in no case any further than 1/3 door width measured from latch edge. 6. Thresholds: a. Cut and fit to profiles of door jambs. File burrs smooth. b. At exterior doors and elsewhere as indicated, set thresholds in bed of butyl rubber sealant; completely fill voids to exclude moisture, taking care not to plug drainage holes or block weeps; remove excess sealant. c. Install thresholds level. 7. Weatherstripping & Seals: a. Install per manufacturer's instructions. b. Do not cut or interrupt extrusions for weatherstripping by any door closer attachment, i.e. soffit shoe. 3.3 ADJUSTING: A. Adjustment & cleaning: 1. Adjust and check each item of hardware and each door, to insure proper operation and function of each unit. 2. Lubricate moving parts with graphite -type lubricant, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 3. Replace hardware which cannot be lubricated and adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. B. Final Adjustment: 1. Whenever hardware installation is made more than 1 month prior to acceptance of Work, make final adjustment and check of hardware during week immediately prior to acceptance. 2. Make final adjustment of locking, latching devices and closers to compensate for operation of heating and ventilating systems under supervision of manufacturer's representative. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. After installation, clean metal surfaces on both interior and exterior of mortar, plaster, paint and other contaminants. After cleaning, protect work against damage. 08700 - 7 5 ; .DOOR:HARDWARE 'SCHEDULE . . 24646.00 END OF SECTION 08700 - 8 SOUTHCENTERCORPORATE'' SQUARE, ' •'• TUKWILA,' WASHINGTON SECTION .08700' - ,:'BUILDERS! HARDWARE Provide following hardware sets for doors shown .on the, drawings. HW-1 :(Exterior atrium exit doors) • • 3 ' ; Pair Hinges FBB199 NRR, 5 x 4-1/2 2 . Exit Devices 8604 x cyl dogging • 2 Offset Pulls 2950 (US32D) : 2 Closers 1460 x 3077L Series x top jamb push side xntg • 2 • Floor Stops 7280 • • Threshold • .- ' 172A-• • ' HW-2: -.(Building exit doors into atrium) , 3 Pair Hinges FBB199, 5 x 4-1/2. 2 Exit Devices 8604 x cyl dogging ; 2 s‘ - Offset Pulls 2950 (US32D) 1 Closer 1460 x 3077L Series .x top jamb push side mtg • , Closer 1460 Series x top jamb push side mtg • 2 Floor stops 7280 1 Threshold 172A HW-3: (Exterior elevator machine room door). 1-1/2 . Pair Hinges FBB199 NRP, 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 1 Storeroom Lock L9080 1 Closer w/ stop arm 1460 Cush-N--Stop Series 1 Threshold 1700A 1 Rain Drip 345A s full width frame 1 Set weatherstrip 2891AS 1 Door sweep w/ rain drip 3952CP HW-4: (Interior storage room door) 1-1/2 Pair Hinges FBB179, 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 1 Storeroom Lock L9080 1 Closer P1460 Series 1 Wall Stop W12X 1 Threshold 270A 1 Set Gaskets PK55D LJ 1 ) PART 1 - GENERAL '1.1 .SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulating glass. 2. Glazing sealants. 3. : Glazing accessories. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Insulating Unit Warranty. B. Weathertight Warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE '.TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 GLAZING B. Types of work in this section include work for: 1. Exterior storefront. 2. Aluminum entrances. A. Exterior Glazing: Provide glazing assemblies which will withstand normal conditions without failure, loss of weathertightness, or deterioration. 1. Design to accommodate thermal movement resulting from:. a. Air temperature range of 120 degrees F. b. Material temperature range of 180 degrees F. B. Deterioration includes: 1. For insulating glass: a. Moisture or dirt between panes. b. Development of condensation between panes. c. Damage to internal coating, if any. d. Development of other visible indication of seal failure. A. Standard for Sealed Insulating Glass Units: ASTM E 774, with compliance certified by independent certification program. 1. Label each unit permanently on spacer or on one pane. 2. Certification agency: B. Certified Safety Glazing: Provide Category II products which comply with test requirements of 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1 and permanently marked with label of: 1. Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC). A. Protect products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; specifically, avoid damage to glass edges; prevent damage due to temperature changes, sunlight, and moisture. A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install glazing when either air or substrate temperature exceeds the range recommended by manufacturer or when substrate is wet, damp, or covered with snow, ice, or frost. B. Install bulk sealants only at air and substrate temperatures above 40 degrees F. 08800 - 1 1.7 WARRANTY A. Submit a written warranty guaranteeing to correct failures in glazing which occur within the period indicated after substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the Owner may have under the contract documents. 1. Warranty on insulating glass: 5 years. 2. Weathertight warranty: Signed by installer and Contractor, for 5 years. Failure is defined as water leakage through glazing assembly. Correction may include repair or replacement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 GLAZING A. Glass Manufacturers - General: 1. Obtain materials from only one manufacturer or fabricator for each type; obtain tinted primary glass (if any) used for each type from only one manufacturer. 2.2 GLASS TYPES A. Glass Types - General: Provide glass types fabricated of the glass products indicated. 1. Select products to comply with performance requirements indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Exterior glass thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch nominal), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate glass with bite and edge clearance dimensions, including tolerances, as recommended by manufacturer and FGMA "Glazing Manual." 4. Where safety glazing is required by governing authorities, provide certified safety glazing. B. Glass Type I - 1 : Sealed insulating units. 1. Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal. 2. Exterior pane: Transparent float glass. a. Annealed float glass (untreated). b. Color: Clear. 3. Interior pane: Transparent float glass. a. Annealed float glass (untreated). b. Color: Clear. 2.3 BASIC GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Units: Factory - assembled multiple panes separated by and sealed to spacers forming air - tight, dehydrated air space(s). 1. ASTM E 774, Class A. 2. Spacer seals: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Spacer corner construction: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Drying agent: Manufacturer's standard. B. Float Glass: Quality q3, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed: ASTM C 1036, Type I. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Installation Materials - General: Select products which have appropriate performance characteristics as recommended by glass and glazing materials manufacturers and which are compatible with all materials with which they will come into contact. 24646.00 08800 - 2 r z L 1_ w 1 r 111 PART 3 - EXECUTION '3.1 EXAMINATION B. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 GLAZING B. Exterior Glazing Sealant: Silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920. 1. Demonstrate compatibility and adhesion by preconstruction testing. 2. Colors: To match substrates. C. Heel and Toe Bead Sealant: Noncuring, nonskinning, minimum 75 percent solids, butyl or polyisobutylene rubber, complying with 802.3, Type II ductile back bedding compound, as described in AAMA 800. D. Glazing Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone. 1. Setting blocks: 80 to 90 Shore A hardness. 2. Spacers: As required to provide face and edge clearances recommended by FGMA "Glazing Manual," unless greater clearances are recommended by glazing manufacturer. E. Backer Rods: Flexible, nonabsorbent, compressible polyurethane foam, either open -cell or non - gassing closed -cell, unless otherwise restricted by sealant manufacturer; preformed to appropriate size and shape. A. Examine frames and rabbets in which glazing is to be installed for conditions that could be detrimental to the longevity of the glazing. In particular, check for conditions that would void the manufacturer's warranty. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive glazing just before installation of glazing. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Comply with recommendations for installation contained in the FGMA "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except when specifically not recommended or prohibited by the glass or glazing material manufacturer; comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Protect glazing from edge damage during handling and installation. C. Do not install glass that has edge damage or defects that reduce glass strength or performance or diminish appearance. D. Install glass so that visual characteristics, such as pattern, bow, and roll wave distortion, are uniform. 3.4 GLAZING IN FRAMES A. Use the following glazing methods in the locations indicated in other specification sections: 1. Sealant, both sides. B. Use continuous heel or toe bead at all exterior glazing. C. Permanently adhere setting and edge blocks to frame. D. Do not block weep holes. 08800 - 3 • Wash both sides of glazing, using manufacturer's recommended .,procedures not more.than210 days • ,. , :'...00mpletion. , ... - , ' ',. • . :.• ,..,, ...: . . . . _ . ., „ • • . .. , •,,: • " . . . END OF SECTION . • I , . ,• . 1. Rernove applied coatings from surfacestinletha such coatings have been tested to show acceptable adhesion,and:OompatibilitY: 2. Use continuous spacers. a. Exception: For lights of less than 100 united inches, •. •.non-continuous spacersmay:be'Use&Hvith backer rods to form,. proper sealant shape'. Use primer where required for proper adhesion: Tool sealant, eliminating air.pOckets,:with .a definite ,:Slope away from glazing. - - - PROTECTION AND CLEANING • DO-.notapply tape or labels to glazing; remove temporary !.labels. B. FrOtect_glazingduring subsequent construction opprations;. remove ,clirt'contaminants,'. staining agents and other deposits promptly using Manufacturer' s recommended procedures. 1. Clean off excess sealants as work progresses using methods which, will not damage glazing. • Replace glazing that is damaged. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER'CORPORATE'SQUAkk • TUKWILA,''WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 • GLAZING 08800:- 4 Iw 1- 1. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.. 1 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS A. Section Includes: 1. Gypsum wallboard. 2. Gypsum wallboard patching and repairs. 3. Drywall finishing. B. Related Sections: 1. Cold- formed metal framing: Division 5. 2. Painting: Elsewhere in Division 9. A. Regulatory Requirements: At locations indicated on drawings, provide fire -rated assemblies tested in accordance with ASTM E 119 and acceptable to authorities for ratings required. Provide assemblies as listed in the following: 1. GA -600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." 2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.'s (UL) "Fire Resistance Directory." A. Deliver materials in original and unopened packages, containers, or bundles, with brand names and manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in dry location, fully protected from weather and direct exposure to sunlight. C. Stack gypsum board products flat and level, properly supported to prevent sagging or damage to ends and edges. D. Store corner bead and other metal and plastic accessories to prevent bending, sagging, distortion, or other mechanical damage. A. Environmental Conditions: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. B. Ventilation: Provide controlled ventilation during joint finishing operations, to eliminate excessive moisture. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too quickly. 24646.00 09260 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt joints in each area receiving finished gypsum board. 1. Fire- resistant type (Type X or equivalent), where required for fire- resistant rated assemblies. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch, except as otherwise shown. 2.2 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, provide trim and accessories by manufacturer of gypsum board materials, made of galvanized steel or zinc alloy and configured for concealment in joint compound. 1. Include corner beads, edge trim, and other trim units necessary1 for project conditions. Provide accessories as required in order to achieve details indicated, whether or not specific accessories are shown on the drawings. Control Joints: At locations indicated, provide manufacturer's standard one -piece control joints of extruded vinyl, zinc alloy, or other noncorrosive metal. 2.3 JOINT TREATMENT A. General: Provide products by manufacturer of gypsum boards. Comply with ASTM C 475 and with manufacturer's recommendations for specific project conditions. B. Joint Tape: Manufacturer's standard paper reinforcing tape. C. Drying Type Joint Compound: Vinyl -based type for interior use, and as follows: 1. Taping compound: Type specifically formulated for embedding tape and accessories and for prefilling. 2. Topping compound: Type specifically formulated for finishing drywall over taping compound. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspection: Verify that project conditions and substrates are appropriate to begin installation of work of this section. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 2 _} A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum products. B. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self - drilling type; lengths as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Exterior applications: Cadmium - plated. LY 3.2 PREPARATION 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS • A. Coordinate installation of anchorage devices for suspended ceilings /soffits, verifying that spacing and rated strength are correct for anticipated load conditions. A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216 except where exceeded by other requirements. 1. Wherever possible, install gypsum board to minimize butt end joints. 2. Apply ceiling boards prior to installation of wallboards. Arrange to minimize butt end joints near center of ceiling area. 3. Install wallboards in a manner which will minimize butt end joints in center of wall area. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of walls. 4. Butt all joints loosely, with maximum of 1/16 inch between boards. 5. Place wrapped edges adjacent to one another; do not place cut edges or butt ends adjacent to wrapped edges. 6. Support all edges and ends of each board on framing or by solid substrate, except that long edges at right angles to framing members in non - fire -rated construction may be left unsupported. 7. In double -layer ceiling work, apply base layer with long edges perpendicular to framing members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. 8. In double -layer wall applications, apply base layer with long edges parallel to framing members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. B. Control Joints: Form control joints by means of 1/4 -inch space between adjacent gypsum boards, with each edge supported on separate framing member, ready to receive trim accessory, and located as shown on the drawings and as follows: 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls which are not intersected by other walls for 50 feet or more. 2. On ceilings with perimeter relief, not more than 50 feet apart in both directions. 3. On ceilings without perimeter relief, not more than 30 feet apart in both directions. 4. At exterior soffits, not more than 30 feet apart in both directions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation of trim items. Except for items intended by manufacturer to be left exposed or semiexposed, install trim units for concealment in joint finishing compound. Wherever possible, fasten metal trim items to substrate with same fasteners used to install gypsum board products. B. Corner Bead: Install metal corner bead at all external corners unless details clearly indicate its omission at specific locations. C. Edge Trim: Install edge trim at locations indicated and wherever edge of gypsum board otherwise would be exposed. D. Control Joints: Install one -piece control joints at required locations. Do not remove tape until finishing operations are complete. 24646.00 09260 - 3 3.5 :FINISHING • 24646.00 09260 - 4 •.. . . SOUTBCENTER CORPORATE. SQUARE TUKWILA WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM. BOARD 'SYSTEMS • • • . deneral.: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other. requirements. • , . • • -. 1.. Do not,mix joint compounds except as recommended by manufacturer. • . • B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with the following level of finish • pen-GA-214, except where indicated ptherwise-on the drawings: 1. Level 4: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints andinterior angles. Provide three separate coats .of compound:at.all : joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Provide smooth surfaces.. free of tool marks and ridges. . • , Joint Treatment: Tape and finish joints in accordance with _:-,-- manufacturer's instructions for compounds used, using proper hand'. ' tools designed for the purpose. 1-., Avoid raising nap of face paper when sanding; carefully sponge • ..,.:•-- down any areas roughened by sanding process. , . , , • . . , D • Penetrations: .Fill cutouts and openings around fixtures and . '. penetrations jointcompound. . .. . , . 3.6 •H:CLEANING : • - . • : • ' ' . : • - ' . - • . . . . . .• . . . A.-. Promptly remove any residual gypsum drywall materials :from adjacent or adjoining surfaces, leaving .spaces ready for subsequent finishing :. . operations and decorating. r. C t L L 1_ L c 1 1 PART 1 - GENERAL '1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile; 1.2 REFERENCES A. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of America, (TCA) 1996. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples for Verification Purposes: 1. Submit each tile type selected board with joints filled using 2.. Trim and accessories: Samples B. Qualifications Documentation: Written confirmation that companies executing work in this section comply with experience requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Material Source: Furnish each type, finish, and color of tile product and accessory materials from a single supplier. B. Installer: A company with not less than 10 installations of tile work similar in size and complexity to the work of this project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store tile products and setting materials in manufacturer's sealed packages. Protect material from damage and store in dry location. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 'SOUTHCENTER:CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA; WASHINGTON SECTION 09311 CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE Inc. Submit the following: mounted on a minimum 12 inch square selected grout. of actual units in selected color. A. Provide temperatures in tiled areas during installation and after completion as required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions, but not less than 50 degrees F. B. If necessary to use temporary heaters, vent units to exterior to protect tile work from carbon dioxide accumulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Tile Installation Materials Standard: ANSI standard referenced for setting and grouting materials. 1. Tile trim and accessories: Match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. B. Color Blending: Factory -blend tile products which have a natural color range so products taken from one box will have the same range as products from a separate box. 24646.00 09311 - 1 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Factory- Mounted Flat Tile: 1. The design is based on the following product: a. Tile: (1) Manufacturer: Unglazed Floor Tile! "; American Olean (2) Color: W68 -Black (U). 2. Trim units: Match color and finish of adjacent flat tile: a. Shapes and sizes: Manufacturer's standard as indicated; coordinated with adjacent flat tile, where applicable: (1) Corner bead. (2) Cove. (3) Surface bullnose. 2.4 GROUTING MATERIALS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE • TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09311 CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS Latex- Portland Cement Mortar: One - component dry grout mix, field -mixed with water; or two - component, dry grout mix and liquid latex additive, field- mixed; complying with ANSI A118.4. 1. All components premeasured and prepackaged. 2. Dry latex additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate. 3. Liquid latex additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion. 4. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. A. Latex- Portland Cement Grout: One - component dry grout mix, field -mixed with water; or two- component, dry grout mix and liquid latex additive, field- mixed; complying with ANSI A118.6. 1. All components premeasured and prepackaged. 2. Dry latex additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate. 3. Liquid latex additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion. 4. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Colors: Selected by Owner, after contract award, from . manufacturer's standards. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to tile manufacturer and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation or Ceramic Tile Institute. 2.6 MIXING MORTAR AND GROUT A. Mix mortar and grout to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's mixing procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify with the installer that substrate areas where tile is to be installed have been prepared correctly, and that all backing materials have been installed. Correct unacceptable conditions before start of tile work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Factory - Blending: Before start of installation verify that tile with an anticipated range of colors has been correctly blended to achieve a uniform color range from tile package to tile package. 24646.00 09311 - 2 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 3.4 TILE APPLICATIONS 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09311 CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE A. Tile Installation Standard: ANSI A108 series, for setting and grouting materials listed. B. Installation Methods: Comply with TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for type of applications indicated. C. Install tile under or behind equipment and fixtures. D. Carefully cut, drill, and grind tile to fit around items projecting through tile surface, so that escutcheons or cover plates conceal cut edges. E. Joint Patterns: Lay out tile according to patterns indicated on drawings, or if not shown, in a grid pattern with floor joints aligning with wall and trim joints. Install joints straight and of uniform width. F. Sealant - Filled Joints: Install expansion, control, and isolation joints where indicated on drawings. Saw -cut joints are unacceptable. 1. Expansion joint installation method: TCA EJ 171. G. Grout Installation Standards: 1. Ceramic tile grouts (sand - portland cement, dry -set, commercial portland cement, and latex - portland cement): ANSI A108.10. A. Interior Floor, Thin -Bed: 1. Installation method: a. Concrete subfloor: TCA F113. b. Bond coat: Latex - portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.5. 2. Grout: Latex - portland cement. A. Clean tile surfaces after installation is complete. 1. Wipe latex - portland cement residue from tile with a damp cloth or sponge as soon as possible after tile installation. 2. Only clean unglazed tile with acid solutions when recommended by the tile manufacturer. If acid solution is an acceptable cleaner, wait minimum 14 days after installation to clean tile. Protect materials other than tile from the acid solution during cleaning process. B. Replace any broken, chipped, marred, or otherwise damaged tile before final acceptance. C. Protection: Apply neutral protective cleaner to tile after installation if recommended by tile manufacturer. Overlay completed tile installation with kraft paper for protection from subsequent construction activities. 1. Do not allow any traffic on completed tile floors for minimum 7 days after completion. 2. Remove protection, rinse, and dry tile installations before final review and acceptance. END OF SECTION 09311 - 3 11. c L PART 1 - GENERAL A. 1.2. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. For broadloom, show the following: a. Carpet direction, seaming plan, edge strip placement. b. Other details as necessary to clearly indicate arrangement of carpeting materials. 2. Include details for the following: a. Doorways. b. Walls /partitions. c. Carpet cutouts. B. Verification Samples: Submit the following to serve as standards for judging the completed work: 1. For each distinct color, pattern, or type indicated, submit sample 18 inches square which has been prepared from actual carpet to be installed. 2 Edging accessories: For each distinct edging accessory which will remain exposed after installation, submit sample 12 inches long. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in installation of products specified in this section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience. 1.4 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS A. Section Includes: 1. Broadloom carpet. 2. Carpet accessories. 3. Rubber base. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE 'TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09680 CARPET Fire Performance: Provide carpet materials capable of meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with methods indicated, by UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) or other independent testing agency acceptable to governing authorities. 1. Methenamine pill test (ASTM D 2859): Passes. A. Take measures as required to ensure materials are not damaged or deformed. Store products in flat position in properly ventilated, dry space. Use suitable means to prevent materials from lying in direct contact with the ground. B. Allow carpet materials to reach room temperature or minimum temperature recommended by manufacturer before installation. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work of this section with other work to ensure that installed carpeting materials are not damaged or soiled. 24646.00 09680 - 1 WARRANTY Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer, installer, and the Contractor, guaranteeing to correct failures in carpeting which. occur within 10 years after substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which Owner may have under the contract documents. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship or faulty materials. Correction may include repair or replacement. PART 2`- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Single Source Responsibility: Obtain.,all of each different material from a single manufacturer. MATERIALS A. "Carpet ": 1. Manufacturer: Shaw Commercial Carpet. 2. Product name: "Earls Court B1 ". 3. Product number: Style No. 50092 4. No substitutions. 5. Color /texture /pattern: #92530 6. Installation method: Direct glue -down. 7. Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber. B. "Carpet Border ": 1. Manufacturer: Shaw Commercial Carpet, 2. Product name: "Cypress Point IV ". 3. No substitutions. 4. Color /texture /pattern: #85352, Deep Olive 5. Installation method: Direct glue -down. 6. Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber. C. Rubber Base: 1. Style: Coved. 2. Manufacturer: Roppe 3. Color: "93 Bik Brown 2.3 ACCESSORIES :SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE TUKWILAWASHINGTON SECTION09680 .CARPET A. Provide accessories recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Vinyl or Rubber Edge Guard: Minimum width of anchorage flange 2 inches, size and shape indicated, colors selected by the Owner from manufacturer's standards. C. Carpet Installation Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended water- resistant adhesive manufactured for use with type of carpet and . substrates indicated, and complying with fire performance requirements indicated for carpet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Verify that substrates are completely dry, free of harmful substances, and in satisfactory condition to receive carpeting 24646.00 09680 - 2 1 L `_i 24646.00 materials. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON .SECTION 09680 CARPET Notify the Owner in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin installation until these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected. C. Start of installation work constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. D. Perform moisture and acidity tests on concrete surfaces where recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Follow carpet manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that each substrate is properly prepared to receive carpeting. Fill all cracks, gaps, and depressions using carpet manufacturer's recommended materials and methods. 1. Glue -down installation: Maximum variation in substrate 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Level off all high spots or ridges to prevent uneven carpet wear. C. Determine whether substrates are susceptible to dusting. Apply sealer where required to prevent formation of dust. D. Vacuum -clean substrates thoroughly, just prior to beginning installation. E. Maintain temperature of floor and relative humidity of rooms where carpet materials are to be installed at levels and for periods recommended by carpet manufacturer before, during, and after installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. 1. Maximize consistency of carpet appearance, particularly in terms of lay of pile and its direction. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for placement of seams. 2. Continue carpet into recessed spaces such as closets, and underneath obstacles with open bases. 3. Follow manufacturer's instructions for cutting carpet, using tools designed to cut type of carpet materials being installed. B. At door openings, orient carpet seam perpendicular to traffic direction; doorway seam must be located directly underneath door in closed position. 3.4 INSTALLATION - GLUE -DOWN CARPET A. Before applying adhesive to substrate, prefit carpet in areas where it is to be installed. Where cutting is necessary, provide properly prepared, straight, and unfrayed edges. 1. Seams: Conform to submitted seaming plan. B. Apply even layer of adhesive to substrate, using trowel of carpet manufacturer's recommended notch size. 09680 - 3 ,SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09680 CARPET C. Install prefitted carpet; butt edges snugly at seams and against vertical obstructions. 1. Stretch carpet tightly over substrate, so that it lies flat, is uniformly smooth, and free of bulges. 2. Apply seaming cement to butted edges. D. Install edge guards at exposed carpet edges unless indicated otherwise; provide secure attachment to substrate. E. After installation, lightly roll carpet as recommended by carpet manufacturer. F. Immediately remove adhesive from surface of carpet by method which will not damage carpet. 3.5 INSTALLATION - BASE A Installation of Base: 1.. Install base using maximum lengths available to minimize joints. Tightly bond base to substrate with full spread of adhesive, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. Adhere base in straight lines with top edges level and true and bottom edges fitted tightly to flooring material. 2. Install premolded corners before installing straight runs. 3. Form inside corners from straight pieces by cutting an inverted V- shaped notch in toe of base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base as necessary for snug fit to substrate. 4. Extend base into closets and alcoves off spaces with same flooring material. Install base where floor intersects vertical surfaces, including cabinet toe spaces, free standing columns, pilasters and walls. 5. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove carpet remnants which are not usable; comply with Owner's instructions for final disposition of usable remnants. B. Use commercial - quality vacuum cleaner to thoroughly clean installed carpeting; trim loose yarns where required. C. Eliminate stains; Contractor shall pay for and replace carpet from which stains cannot be eliminated using carpet manufacturer's recommended products and methods. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installation with a nonstaining building paper. Do not use a moisture barrier such as plastic film. B. Do not permit foot traffic or place furniture on glued -down carpet for a minimum of 48 hours after installation. 1. Do not wet -clean any glued -down carpet within 60 days of installation. C. Ensure that carpet will be clean and without deterioration or damage at date of substantial completion. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 09680 - 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Painting and finishing of exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Painting and finishing of exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Field painting of architectural exposed structural steel members. 4. Field painting of precast concrete elements. 5. Field painting of exposed electrical items. C. Related Sections: 1. Shop priming of architectural exposed structural steel: Division 5. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. DFM (dry film mils): Thickness, measured in mils, of a coat of paint in the cured state. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data sheets for each coating. 1. Material analysis including vehicle type and percentage by weight and by volume of vehicle, resin, and pigment. 2. Application instructions including mixing, surface preparation, compatible primers and topcoats, recommended wet and dry film thickness, recommended application methods. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: 1. All coating materials required by this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer, unless otherwise required or approved. B. Applicator: Firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in painting work similar in scope to work of this project. 1. Maintain throughout duration of the work a crew of painters who are fully qualified to satisfy requirements of the specifications. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers bearing coating name and color, material composition data, date of manufacture, legal notices if applicable, and mixing, thinning, and application instructions. B. Storage: 1. Store materials in an orderly fashion and in clean, well - closed containers with labels intact. 2. Maintain above 40 degrees F. Do not allow materials to freeze. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING Section does not include: 1. Factory finishing of manufactured products. 2. Painting of concealed surfaces, unless specifically indicated. 3. Prefinished metal surfaces. 09900 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2:1 MANUFACTURERS 2.2 PRODUCTS 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING PROJECT CONDITIONS Apply coatings only under the following environmental conditions:. 1. Air and surface temperatures are between 50 and 100 degrees F, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F above dew point. Relative humidity is less than 85 percent. Do not apply coatings during inclement weather except within enclosed, conditioned spaces. 1. Provide temporary lighting to achieve a well -lit surface with.a level of at least 80 footcandles measured mid-height. 2. Provide continuous ventilation and heating to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes and to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during; and for 48 hours after application of finishes, or longer if required to obtain fuel cure as indicated by manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 COORDINATION A General: Perform work in proper sequence with work of other trades to . avoid damage to finished work. Coordination: Where special coatings will be applied over shop coatings specified in other sections, coordinate work of such other sections to ensure that only approved, compatible primers are applied. 1. Furnish the Owner with product data on both coatings demonstrating coating compatibility. A. The brand -name products listed in the schedule at the end of this section and made by the following manufacturer are the basis of the contract documents: 1. Sherwin Williams Company. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered in accordance with standard substitution procedures: 1. The Glidden Company. 2. Benjamin Moore & Company. 3. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. 4. Sherwin Williams Company. 5. Miller Paint Company. A. Colors: 1. For multicoat systems, apply each coat using a successively darker tint or shade, unless approved otherwise. 2. Top coat colors: As shown on drawings. 09900 - 2 • 11 • • Li L PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION •3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready for work in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prior to commencement of work, examine surfaces scheduled to be finished. 1. Report any unsatisfactory conditions in writing. 2. Do not apply coatings to unsatisfactory substrates. 3. Beginning painting work on an area will be deemed construed acceptance of surfaces in that area. A. Apply coatings to surfaces that are clean and properly prepared in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified. Remove dirt, dust, grease, oils, and foreign matter. Prepare surface for proper texture necessary to optimum coating adhesion and intended finished appearance. Plan cleaning, preparation, and coating operations to avoid contamination of freshly coated surfaces. 1. Do not apply coatings to labels that identify equipment, fire- resistance ratings, etc. 2. Remove hardware, cover plates, and similar items before applying coatings. 3. Provide protection for non - removable items not scheduled for coating. After application of coatings, install removed items. Use only skilled workmen for removal and replacement of such items. 4. Protect surfaces not scheduled for coating. Clean, repair, or replace to the satisfaction of the Owner any surfaces inadvertently spattered or coated. B. Wood: Water blast, sand and remove any sap or pitch deposits from surface and clean with mineral spirits. Seal any knots and pitch pockets with a suitable product recommended by the coating manufacturer. Sand rough spots. Remove dust. 1. After first coat has dried, fill holes, cracks, or depressions with a suitable wood filler recommended by the coating manufacturer. Sand filler when dry. 2. Sand surfaces lightly between successive coats. Remove dust. C. Ferrous Metal: 1. Clean and prepare surface profile in accordance with the applicable SSPC specifications for hand tool or power tool cleaning. 2. Intricate fabricated shapes may be pickled in lieu of hand or power tool cleaning. 3. Before hand or power tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residue, and salts by solvent cleaning. After hand or power tool cleaning, reclean surfaces if necessary. 4. Before touching up coatings damaged by handling or welding, reprepare damaged surfaces. D. Galvanized Metal: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC specifications. E. Gypsum Board: 1. Latex -fill minor defects. 2. Spot -prime defects after repair. 09900 - 3 3.3 MIXING AND THINNING 3.4 APPLICATION 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER.CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900 - 4 F. Mildew: 1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. 2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. A. Remove and discard any skin formed on surface of coatings in containers. Discard any containers where skin comprises 2 percent or more of the remaining material. Do not add thinner except as specifically recommended (not merely permitted) by the coating manufacturer for proper coating application under the circumstances prevailing at the project site when application equipment recommended by the coating manufacturer is employed. Use only the quantities and the types of thinner recommended. B. Mix materials using mechanical mixers in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. Agitate mixed materials during application if recommended by manufacturer. C. Combine multi- component paints in quantities needed for use within the manufacturer's recommended pot life at the anticipated application temperatures. Discard remaining mixed material after pot life has expired. D. Strain pigmented coatings after mixing except where mechanical application equipment is provided with effective strainers. E. Tinting: Except where coating materials cannot be tinted, tint each successive coat of paint a sufficiently contrasting color to facilitate identification of complete coating coverage. A. General: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and using application method best suited for obtaining full, uniform coverage of surfaces to be coated. 2. Employ only application equipment that is clean, properly adjusted, in good working order, and of the type recommended by the coating manufacturer. 3. Apply each coat to achieve the dry film thickness per coat recommended by the coating manufacturer. Application rates in excess of those recommended and fewer numbers of coats than specified will not be accepted. 4. Completed coatings shall be free of defects such as runs, sags, variations in color, lap or brush marks, holidays, and skips. 5. Apply coatings according to the schedule at the end of this section and as otherwise indicated. Coat all similar surfaces not specifically mentioned unless specifically exempted. a. Ensure that all surfaces receive a dry film thickness equivalent to those of flat surfaces. 6. Coat front and back of miscellaneous items such as covers, access panels, and grilles. Apply fully finish coats behind movable items of furniture and equipment before installation. Apply prime coat only behind non - movable items of furniture and equipment before installation. 7. Sand gloss coats before applying subsequent coatings. B. Remove coatings not in compliance with this specification, reclean and re- prepare surfaces as specified, and apply coatings to comply with the contract documents. ti: 3.6 FINISH COATS 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER.CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA; SECTION 09900 PAINTING Scheduling:.. 1. Apply first coat of material to properly prepared surfaces without delay. a. Apply successive coats within the time limits recommended by the manufacturer. D. Electrical Items: 1. Paint electrical items exposed to view in finished spaces and in equipment rooms. 2. Finish color to match color of surrounding surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Paint the following electrical items: a. Conduit and fittings. b. Panel enclosures. c. Others as indicated on drawings. 3.5. PRIME COATS A General: 1. Field apply bottom coats scheduled except where the contract . documents require shop coating of ferrous metals. 2. Where first coat shows signs of suction spots or poorly sealed areas, reapply first coat material to adequately seal surface before proceeding with successive coats. 3. Ferrous metals that have not been shop primed shall be field primed promptly after arrival at the site or shall be stored away . from the effects of weather. 4. Reprepare and retouch damaged prime coats using approved, compatible primer. B. Primers for Wood and Wood Products: 1. Apply first coat to wood upon receipt at the site and before wood is exposed to sun or rain. 2. Before installation, prime both concealed and exposed surfaces of interior wood, including cut ends. 3. Finish tops, bottoms, edges, and cutouts of exterior wood doors as scheduled for exterior face. A. Number of Coats and Minimum Coating Thickness: 1. Apply not less than the number of coats indicated. 2. Apply each coat to achieve not less than the dry film thicknesses indicated per coat. 3. Apply additional coats at no additional cost to the Owner when necessary to achieve complete hiding, uniform texture, or uniform sheen and appearance. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: 1. Clean work area on a daily basis; dispose of spent materials and empty containers. If requested, turn over the Owner all empty coatings containers used during the course of each day. 2. Remove all trace of coatings from adjacent surfaces not scheduled to be coated. Remove by appropriate methods that do not damage surfaces. B. Protection: 1. Protect work against damage until fully cured. Provide signs identifying wet surfaces until surfaces are adequately cured. 09900 - 5 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION. 09900 PAINTING 2. Shortly before final completion of the project, examine: surfaces for damage to coatings and restore coatings to new, undamaged condition. 3. .. Touch -up of minor damage will be acceptable where result is not visibly different from surrounding surfaces. Where result is different either in color, sheen, or texture, recoat entire surface 3.8 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR INTERIOR NONTRAFFIC SURFACES A. Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Acrylic Latex, semigloss. a. Bottom coat: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Wall Primer B28 W 200; 1.1 DFM. b. Intermediate coat: .Same as top coat. c. Top coat: Proclassic 100% Acrylic Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21 W 201; 2.0 DFM. Wood: 1. Acrylic Latex, gloss. a. Bottom coat: Preprite Classic Latex Primer; B28 W 101; 2.0 DFM. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: Proclassic 100% Acrylic Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B31; 2.0 DFM. 2. Varnish, satin. a. Bottom and intermediate coats: Polyurethane Varnish, High Gloss A67 V 1; 1.0 DFM. b. Top coat: Polyurethane Varnish, Satin A67 F 1; 1.0 DFM. Ferrous Metal: 1. Latex, gloss. a. Bottom coat: Latex Metal Primer B42 N 8; 3.0 DFM. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: Proclassic 100% Acrylic Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21 W 201; 2.0 DFM. 3 9 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR EXTERIOR NONTRAFFIC SURFACES A. Ferrous Metal: 1. Architectural Exposed Structural Steel Members. a. Finish: Satin - Overall Coating Mil Thickness: 6.0 to 10.0 dry mils in addition to the shop applied primer.. b. Intermediate coat: Tnemec Series 66 -AA90 Epoxoline Primer (Dry mil thickness - 3.0 to 5.0 mils). c. Top Coat: Tnemec Series 175 Endura - Shield Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane (Dry mil thickness - 3.0 to 5.0 mils). B. Galvanized Metal: 1. Alkyd, gloss. a. Bottom coat: Galvite Paint B50 W 3; 2.0 DFM. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: Industrial Enamel B54 Series; 2.0 DFM. C. Precast Concrete Caps: 1. Surface Preparation: Clean and Dry. 2. Finish: Tenemec "Series 55 Tneme- crete ", Flat, smooth (8.0 to 10.0 Mils). 24646.00 09900 - 6 : SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE.:: • • - TUKWILA, WASHINGTON • SECTION 09900 PAINTING Miscellaneous Wood: • 1'. lAcrylic Latex, flat. , • ' a. . Bottom coat: A-100 Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer; B49; 2.0 b. - Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. C. . Top coat: SuperPaint Exterior .Acrylic Latex Flat House l& • Trim; A80, 2.0 DFM. E. Wood Siding (T1-11): • : • 1. ,1 'Acrylic Latex, flat, • , ' ' Bottom coat: A-100 Exterior Wood Primer; B42;2.0 Intermediate coat: Same*as:,top',coat.', ' •- Top coat:, .SuperPaint Exterior:Acrylic Latex Flat,House &: Trim; A80; 2.0 DFM. . . 3.10 COLOR SCHEDULE PT-1: Sherwin-Williams, Sculpture Gray SW 1030 LRV 55t. „ "„ • , B. 'PT72:, Dover White SW 1648 LRV 85'E. • . • C. PT73: Sherwin-Williams,.Heavy Metal SW 1035 LRV 9. D. PT-4:' Sherwin-Williams, Dolphin SW 1034 LRV 25'&. E. .PT Benjamin Moore 294. • :. , • . . • • F . Precast Concrete' Caps:' Tnemec "Tea Biscuit" YB11, :LRV 57.2%. 24646.00 09900 - 7 PART 1 - GENERAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 GENERAL Conform to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and related work in other Divisions for all work in Division 16. See Division 1 for sequence of work. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK It is the intention of this Division of the Specifications and the accompanying drawings to describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and fully operational condition all equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete electrical system, together with such other miscellaneous installations and equipment hereinafter specified and /or shown on the drawings. The work shall include all materials, appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete, fully operational installation of all electrical systems shown on the drawings or described herein. Equipment and devices furnished and installed under other Divisions of this specification (or the Owner).shall be connected under this Division. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding as if called for in both. 1.3 WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS See all other divisions of specifications for other work which includes but is not limited to: Temporary Power Cutting and Patching Painting, Refinishing and Finishes Equipment Wiring 1.4 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. If any conflict occurs between government adopted code rules and this Specification, the codes are to govern. Nothing in these drawings and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming with the governing codes. Also, this shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the drawings or specifications which may be in excess of requirements of the hereinbefore mentioned governing codes and rules and not contrary to same. B. The electrical systems shall be installed based on the following current Standards. 24646.00 NFPA 70 1996 National Electrical Code as adopted and amended by the State of Washington AND City of Tukwila Uniform Building Code International Conference of Building Officials as adopted and amended by the Local Jurisdiction. 16010 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS The Contractor is required to familiarize himself with the detailed requirements of these standards and any local codes and ordinances as they affect the installation of specific electrical systems. 1.5 PERMITS AND FEES The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of work by the inspectors and shall give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection. 1.6 COORDINATION A. The Contractor responsible for accomplishing Division 16 work shall coordinate his work with that of the other Contractors and /or other trades doing work on the project and shall examine all drawings and specifications of other trades including the mechanical, architectural, and structural for construction details and necessary coordination. B. Obtain submittals and shop drawings of all equipment with electrical connections furnished under other divisions of the specifications. Provide all wiring in accordance with requirements indicated. Advise the Architect of any changes which may affect the contract price. C. Special attention is called to the following items and all conflicts shall be coordinated prior to installation. 24646.00 1. Door swings to the end that switches will be located on the "strike" side of the door. 2. Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. 3. Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. 4. Recessing and concealing electrical materials in CMU walls, concrete construction, precast construction and similar construction methods. 5. Electrical characteristics (HP, KVA, voltage, phase) of actual equipment furnished under other divisions being different from that shown on the electrical drawings. D. The Contractor will not be paid for relocation of work, cuttings, patching and finishing required for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation. 1.7 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Raceways, boxes and ground connections are shown diagrammatically only and indicate the general character and approximate location. The layout 16010 - 2 3 .1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS does not necessarily show the total number of raceways or boxes for the circuits required, nor are the locations of indicated runs intended to show the actual routing of the raceways. The Contractor shall furnish, install and place in satisfactory condition all raceways, boxes, conductors and connections and all other materials required for the electrical systems shown or noted in the contract documents to be complete, fully operational and fully tested upon completion of the project. B. The drawings do not show all requirements of the specifications. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for (or shown) in either is required to be provided as if called for in both. C. The horsepower of motors and apparatus wattages shown on the drawings are estimated requirements of equipment furnished under other Divisions of this contract and bid shall be based on these sizes. Overload elements shall be provided to suit actual equipment nameplate current. Advise Architect of any equipment changes or substitutions affecting electrical systems. Conform to Substitution Requirements, Section 16100. D. Any minor changes (lees than 6' -6" horizontal) in the location of the raceways, outlets, boxes, devices, wiring, etc., from those shown on the drawings shall be made without extra charge, where coordination requires or if so directed by the Architect before rough -in. E. Contractor shall consult the architectural drawings for the exact height and location of all electrical equipment not specified herein or shown on the drawings. F. Outlet locations shown on the drawings are approximate. Contractor shall study the building drawings in relation to spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet so that the outlet is correctly positioned and symmetrically located for proper usage. Lighting fixtures are to be symmetrically located according to ceiling tile and room layout. G. When inserts or sleeves for outlet boxes, conductors, cables and /or raceways are required, Contractor shall provide and shall fully coordinate the installation thereof with other trades. H. Electrical drawings to be utilized for electrical construction only. These drawings do not show the work of other trades 1.8 ITEMIZED SCHEDULE OF COSTS Furnish a contract cost breakdown by specification section to the Architect with a copy to the Engineer to allow evaluation of partial payment requests. Refer to the Supplementary Conditions of General Contract for details, and conform thereto. 1.9 WARRANTY The Contractor shall guarantee all work installed under this specification. He shall make good, repair or replace, at his own expense, any defective work, materials or parts which may show 24646.00 16010 - 3 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS themselves within one year after final acceptance, if in the opinion of the Architect said defect is due to imperfection in material, design or workmanship. Incandescent lamps are not warranted, but all shall be operating at time of final acceptance. 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS Continually record the actual electrical system(s) installation on a set of prints kept readily available at the project during construction. These prints shall be used for this purpose alone. Accurately locate with exact dimensions all underground and underslab raceways and stub - outs. At the completion of the work, Contractor shall furnish the Architect a set of reproducible record drawings (xerox type) and the set of mark -ups. Final payment to the Contractor will not be authorized until these prints have been submitted to and accepted by the Architect. 1.11 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. The Contractor shall prepare four (4) O &M manuals for all equipment furnished under Division 16 of the specifications. B. The information included must be the exact equipment installed, not the complete "line" of the manufacturer. Where sheets show the equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such sheets. C. These 0 & M manuals shall contain all the information needed to operate and maintain all systems and equipment provided in the project. It shall be presented and arranged in a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner's operating personnel. The information provided shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, size, etc. 2. Equipment nameplate data. 3. Description of system configuration and operation including component identification and interrelations. A master control schematic drawing(s) may be required for this purpose. 4. Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided as appropriate. 5. Manufacturer's recommended operation instructions as appropriate. 6. Manufacturer's recommended lubrication and servicing data including frequency as appropriate. 7. Complete parts list including reordering information, recommended spares and anticipated useful life (if appropriate). Parts lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Relabeled and /or renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier not acceptable. 8. Shop drawings. 16010 - 4 9. Wiring diagrams. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 10. Signal equipment submittals shall contain step -by -step circuit description information designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment operation in each mode of operation. D. Wiring diagrams for each system shall be complete drawings for the specific system installed under the contract. "Typical" line diagrams will not be acceptable unless properly marked to indicate the exact field installation. E. The information contained in the manuals shall be grouped in an orderly arrangement by specification index. The manuals shall have a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories with identifying tabs. The completed manuals shall be bound with hard board covers. The covers shall be imprinted with the name of the job, Owner, Architect, Electrical Engineer, Contractor and year of completion. The back edge shall be imprinted with the name of the job, Owner and year of completion. Hard board covers and literature contained may be held together with screw post bindings. Bayless Bindery (206) 622 -6395 acceptable. F. A preliminary copy, complete except for the bound cover, shall be submitted 60 days prior to completion of the project for checking and review. Four (4) bound, final, corrected copies shall be provided. Deliver one (1) to Sparling, Inc. Deliver three (3) to the Owner via the Architect 20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward a copy of the receipt to both the Architect and Engineer with the completed form. 1.12 INSTRUCTION PERIODS After substantial completion of the work and 20 days after the 0 & M manuals have been delivered to the owner and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction; the Contractor shall demonstrate the electrical systems and instruct the Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various electrical systems. The Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's representatives shall be superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and suppliers representatives when so specified. 24646.00 Scheduled instruction periods shall be: 1. Lighting Control 2 hours 1.13 FINAL ACCEPTANCE REQUEST The Contractor shall submit to the Architect, with a copy to the Engineer, a Job Completion Form (form attached in this section) properly filled out prior to the time final acceptance of the electrical work is requested. At this time also submit copies of final inspection certificates and receipts for loose materials (keys, etc.) turned over to the Owner. 16010 - 5 .. :., ,.. ..,. -: PROJECT NAME: PROJECT LOCATION: DATE: 24646.00 Name Name 1. Lighting & Power Systems Contractors Rep. Signature SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS JOB COMPLETION FORM A. Electrical Inspectors Final Acceptance Copy of certificate attached. B. Fire Marshal's Final Acceptance of Fire Alarm System Copy of certificate attached. C. The following systems have been demonstrated to Owner's representative. D. Record Drawings Attached Transmitted previously to E. 0 & M Manuals Attached Transmitted previously to F. Test Reports Attached Transmitted previously to 16010 - 6 Agency Date Agency Date Owner's Rep. Date Date Date Date G. The work is complete in accordance with contract documents and authorized changes except for and the architect /engineer's representative is requested to meet with at • on Supervisor of Electrical Work Time Date Date Note: Additional copies of this form are available from Sparling, Inc., 720 Olive Way, Suite 1100, Seattle, WA 98101. 1.14 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS When the following abbreviations and definitions are used in relation to the work for Divisions 16 they shall have the following meanings: 24646.00 Item Accepted AHJ ANSI Approved ASTM Boxes Code Compression Connection EMT Exterior Location Furnish ICEA Install KCM Mfr. NEC NEMA SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS Meaning Reviewed with no exceptions taken to submittal material. See "Submittal" below. Authority Having Jurisdiction American National Standards Institute Inspected and accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction American Society for Testing Materials Outlet, Junction or Pull Boxes All codes currently enforced at project location. Compressed using a leverage powered (hydraulic equivalent) crimping tool Electrical Metallic Tubing or All materials and labor required for equipment to be fully operational. Outside of or penetrating the outer surfaces of the building weather protective membrane. Fully Oper- Tested and approved and operating to the satisfaction ational of the AHJ, manufacturer and contract documents Deliver to the jobsite Insulated Cable Engineers Association To enter permanently into the project and make fully operational. Thousand circular mils (formerly MCM) Manufacturer National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association Publication #70 (latest adopted edition with amendments) National Electrical Manufacturers Association 16010 - 7 24646.00 Shown Wiring •• „ • ' • • - - - - • SOUTMCENTER coRpoRATE• SQUARE • - SECTION 16010 GENERAL. PROVISIONS NFPA National Fire Protection Association Noted Shown or specified in the contract documents PVC Polyvinyl Chloride Provide Furnish and install RGS Rigid Galvanized Steel Required As required by code, AHJ or contract documents for the particular installation to be fully operational. Shop Drawing Hand drafted document which fully details the equipment and intended installation relative to this specified project. As indicated on the drawings or details. Submittal , Material for Engineer review which may contain catalog cuts, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, etc., of the actual material being furnished. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Raceway, conductors and connections END OF SECTION 16010 - 8 Li L! F"4 • r i !J PART 1 - GENRRAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16030 TESTING 1.1 DESCRIPTION Test and provide written certification that the entire electrical installation complies with contract documents, code and proper system operation. Perform acceptance tests in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA 70B and International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) testing specifications NETA ATS -1991. 1.2 SCHEDULE Perform all testing after installation. All systems shall pass tests prior to substantial completion or owner occupancy. 1.3 RECEPTACLE AND DEVICE TEST A. Receptacle Polarity Test: Test every receptacle installed or reconnected under this contract with a receptacle circuit tester. Tester shall test for open ground, reverse polarity, open hot, open neutral, hot and ground reversed, hot or neutral and hot open. Rewire receptacles with faults and retest. Submit test report signed by electrician that performed the test. B. Ground -Fault Receptacle Circuit Interrupter Tests: Test each receptacle or branch circuit breaker having ground -fault circuit protection to assure that the ground -fault circuit interrupter will not operate when subjected to a ground -fault current of less than 4 milliamperes and will operate when subjected to a ground -fault current exceeding 6 milliamperes. Perform testing using an instrument specifically designed and manufactured for testing ground -fault circuit interrupters. Apply the test to the receptacle. "TEST" button operation will not be acceptable as a substitute for this test. Replace receptacles that do not shutoff power with 5/1000 of an ampere within 1 /40th of a second and retest. C. Operational Tests: Demonstrate the operation of each switch, circuit breaker and other item of electrical control with the systems fully energized and operating. Each shall be demonstrated three times. 1.4 600 VOLT WIRING A. Scope: Test all electrical feeders whose operating voltage is 600 volts or less that are installed or reconnected under this contract. B. Test for continuity of each circuit. C. Test for grounds in each circuit which shall consist of the physical examination of the installation to ensure that all required ground jumpers, devices, and appurtenances do exist and are mechanically firm. D. Perform a 500 volt megohm meter test on each circuit between the conductor and ground. The insulation resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms for circuits under 115V, 6 megohms between conductor and ground on those circuits (115V -600V) with total single conductor length of 2,500 feet and over, nor less than 8 megohms for those circuits 24646.00 16030 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16030 TESTING (115V -600V) with single conductor length of less than 2,500 feet. If conductor fails test replace wiring or correct defect and retest. E. Perform torque test for every conductor tested and terminated in an overcurrent device or bolted type connection; torque all connections per manufacturers recommendations and tabulate the results on a tabular form. 1.5 POWER SYSTEM TESTS A. Scope. Inspect and teat entire electrical systems provided by this contract to verify equipment and controls are correctly operating. B. Load Balance Tests: Checks all panelboards for proper load balance between phase conductors and make adjustments as necessary to bring unbalanced phases to within 15% of average load. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall provide all apparatus and material required for testing. The Contractor shall use installation tools and test equipment which are designed for the specific task and shall use this equipment per the manufacturer's instructions. All test equipment shall have current calibration certification by a third party calibration laboratory, and shall have a signed and dated calibration sticker affixed to the device. Calibration shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards and be less than 6 months since last calibration. Defective test equipment and installation tools shall not be used. Installation tools such as torque wrenches shall be calibration certified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE Notify Architect 10 working days prior to performance of any test. 3.3 TEST REPORTS A. The Contractor shall prepare test reports including description of project, description of equipment tested, description of test, test results, conclusions and recommendations, retesting results and list of test equipment used and calibration date. B. One copy of each test report shall be delivered directly to the electrical engineer and Owner within 7 calendar days of the test. C. Insert a copy of each test report in the operation and maintenance manuals. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 16030 - 2 PART 1 - GENERAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section contains the general requirements for materials and installation methods which apply to all sections of Division 16. All materials and equipment shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and U.L. requirements. 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials to be new, free from defects and not less than quality herein specified. Materials shall be designed to insure satisfactory operation and operational life in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed. B. Each type of materials furnished shall be of the same make, be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials and be the manufacturer's latest standard design. C. All materials and equipment installed, including lighting fixtures, shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories or other approved testing organization and shall be so labeled unless otherwise permitted by the Code Inspector (AHJ) and the Architect. 2.2 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Listing of materials is not intended to prevent listing of other material provided the substitute product is submitted for listing and has been reviewed and listed in accordance with the following Substitution of Materials requirements. 24646.00 1. No Substitute: It is the intent of this specification to require new materials to be compatible with the existing installation and to this end certain materials and systems are indicated "No Substitute" and shall be provided as specified. 2. Listing Prior to Bid Opening: Listing of products other than those specified will be issued after the following requirements are met: Requests to be original material, clearly indicating the product fully complies with contract documents and be neatly marked with yellow felt tip marker to clearly define and describe the product for which listing is requested. Include certified laboratory test report for lighting fixtures. Samples shall be submitted if requested. Requests shall be received prior to 10 days before bid opening. Requests containing insufficient information to confirm compliance with contract documents will not be considered. 3. After Award of Contract: 16100 - 1 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Substitution of products will be considered after award of contract only under the following conditions: a. The Contractor shall have placed orders for specified materials promptly after contract is awarded. b. The reason for the unavailability is beyond the Contractor's control, i.e., due to strikes, bankruptcy, discontinuance of manufacture, acts of God. c. Requests for substitutions shall be made in writing and shall be accompanied by complete description of the material or equipment. B. In all cases, should a substituted material result in requiring electrical system or building modifications; the Contractor alone shall pay all costs to provide these modifications including all costs to the Engineer and Architect for redesign time required to accommodate the required modifications. 2.3 COMPLETE SYSTEMS All the systems mentioned shall be complete in every detail and fully operational upon completion of the project unless specifically noted otherwise. Mention of certain materials in these specifications shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing all labor required to provide complete and fully operational systems. 2.4 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submittals: Within 30 days after award of contract, submit common brochure(s) with index and divider tabs by specification section, containing all required catalog cuts, to the Architect in a three ring binder with hardboard cover. The data shall indicate listing by U.L. or other approved testing agency and contain sufficient information neatly highlighted with yellow or blue marker to demonstrate that the materials being submitted fully comply with contract documents. Each item submitted shall have been stamped "Reviewed and Approved" by the Contractor prior to review by the Architect. (Note: Submittals and shop drawings which are incomplete or which contain insufficient information will be returned for resubmittal.) See General Conditions for format, quantity, etc. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted as soon as available but not later than 45 days after award of contract. Shop drawings shall show the ratings of items and systems and how the components of an item or system are assembled, interconnected, function together and how they will be installed on the project. System layout drawings shall show floor plans with complete device layout and point -to -point wiring and connection diagrams between all components of the system. Show wire sizes and color coding. C. The contractor agrees that submittals and shop drawings processed by the Architect are not change orders; that the purpose of submittals and shop 16100 - 2 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS drawings by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. The Contractor alone accepts all responsibility for assuring that all materials furnished under this Division of the specifications meet in full all requirements of the contract documents. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and contract documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project plans and specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes and for techniques of assembly. D. Submittals are required for: Contract Cost Breakdown Raceways, Wire and Cables Wiring Devices Lighting Fixtures and Ballasts Lighting Control PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CUTTING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. Obtain permission from the Architect and coordinate with other trades prior to cutting. Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills or concrete saws except where space limitations prevent the use of such tools. B. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade. 3.2 EXCAVATIONS A. Excavations shall not disturb or injure walls, footings, existing underground utilities or other property. B. Remove all surplus earth not needed for backfilling and dispose of same as directed. 3.3 PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED ELEMENTS Must be provided such as to retain that rating. 3.4 PAINTING A. Painting in general will be covered under another Division of this specification, except items furnished under this Division that are scratched or marred in shipment or installation shall be refinished. 24646.00 16100 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE . SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS . Exposed raceways and /or Wiremold (when allowed) in finished areas, shall be painted with two coats of oil based paint. Paint color shall match color of surface the raceway is attached to. 3.5 CLEAN UP Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc., created by his work. Such clean up shall be done daily and at sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard to the public, other workmen, the building or the Owner's employees. Before acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, lighting fixtures, wiring devices, cover plates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applied. 3.6 WORKMANSHIP AND OBSERVATION A. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent and experienced electricians shall be employed and shall be under the supervision of a competent and experienced foreman. All completed work shall represent a neat and orderly appearance. B. All work and materials shall be subject to observation at any and all times by representatives of the Architect. 3.7 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION A. For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications, or by owner; provide complete all electrical connections necessary to serve such equipment and provide required control connections to all equipment so that the equipment is fully operational upon completion of the project. Whenever the drawings show an equipment connection the Contractor shall provide the code required disconnect switch. B. Prior to rough -in, obtain submittals and shop drawings for all equipment requiring electrical connections being furnished under other divisions of the specifications and by the owner. Provide all wiring per the wiring diagrams and requirements indicated. 3.8 INTERFACE WITH OTHER TRADES A. The Contractor shall continually interface and coordinate the electrical work with the work of other trades. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 16100 - 4 i ii PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION Provide all raceway systems complete and in conformance with code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS 2.1 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RGS) AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) A. Hot dipped galvanized steel. Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy threaded fittings compatible with galvanized conduit. Erickson couplings, watertight split couplings, similar to OZ permitted. Set screw and running thread fittings not permitted. B. Wherever rigid galvanized steel conduit is specified, intermediate metal conduit is permitted unless noted or required otherwise. 2.2 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Hot dip galvanized, electrogalvanized or sherardized, steel tubing. B. Couplings and Connectors: Raintight; steel or malleable iron type using a split corrugated compression ring and tightening nut or stainless steel locking disc. Steel set screw fittings are permitted. Indenter, drive -on and pressure cast or diecast type fittings are not permitted. 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Galvanized, or zinc coated flexible steel for dry locations. Aluminum and flexible metallic tubing not permitted. Fittings: malleable iron or steel, similar to Thomas and Betts "squeeze" type. B. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. PVC weatherproof cover over flexible steel conduit. Fittings: similar to Thomas and Betts "Super - Tite". 2.4 METAL SURFACE RACEWAY Formed steel type. Standard Factory painted finish. Where color choice is available, consult Architect for selection. Manufacturer: Wiremold. 2.5 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (PVC) Schedule 40, rigid polyvinyl chloride type, unless noted otherwise. Type EB permitted for underground rebar reinforced concrete duct banks. PVC elbows not permitted. 2.6 EXPANSION FITTINGS Malleable iron, hot dip galvanized allowing 4" ( +/ -2 ") conduit movement. O -Z /Gedney type AX series. 2.7 RACEWAY PENETRATION SEALS Thruwall and Floor Seals: New Construction - OZ /Gedney FSK Series, existing construction - OZ /Gedney CSM Series. 2.8 RACEWAY SEALING FITTINGS 24646.00 ...._ .,� .. µ..,,.«...... _..__._ ._.... 16110 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS For one through four conductors: OZ /Gedney CSB Series. For greater than four conductors: OZ /Gedney EYA Series with sealing compound. Low Temperature or Hazardous Locations: OZ /Gedney EYA Series with sealing compound. 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide raceways concealed in construction unless noted otherwise or unless specifically authorized by the Architect. B. Supports, bending, reaming and threading of raceway shall conform with code. 3.2 RIGID METAL AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT All connections watertight. Shall be used for: 1) all raceways where subject to damage, 2) all stubups in concrete, 3) all stubouts through concrete walla or from slabs, 4) where exposed to weather. 3.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) Provide for wiring in masonry or frame construction and for wiring in furred ceilings and above suspended ceilings. May be used for exposed work in unfinished areas where not subject to damage. Where construction involves masonry work, assemble and install at the same time as the wall is erected. Avoid surface cut masonry units wherever such masonry units are to remain unplastered or uncovered in completed construction. EMT not permitted to be encased in concrete slabs. 3.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT Provide flexible raceway connection with 90 degree loop minimum for isolation to 1) motors 2) transformers and 3) to all other equipment subject to vibration, (i.e. control equipment, such as solenoid valves, pressure controls, aquastats, pneumatic electric relays, etc.). Provide liquid tight for pumps, for equipment in areas which are regularly washed down, and for equipment in damp or wet locations. Provide code bonding jumper. 3.5 METAL SURFACE RACEWAY Verify exact mounting and locations with Architect prior to rough -in. Install parallel to a building surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, floor). Fasten to surface as recommended by manufacturer. Mount so raceway is in the least obvious location. Ream all cuts smooth. Provide all required boxes, extensions, fittings, elbows and devices for a complete installation. Provide bushings in ends of Wiremold 500 and 700 runs at all boxes and devices. 3.6 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. When permitted by code, may be used underground, or where completely encased with 2" of concrete (or as required by code). Exception: Use rigid steel for elbows, penetrations through floors and walls and stub ups. Raceway size may need to be increased to include code required 16110 - 2 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS ground wire. Provide expansion joints per code. Field bends limited to less than 44 degrees, formed with manufacturer's recommended heater. B. Fire alarm and clock systems in raceway shall be in steel raceway. 3.7 RACEWAYS UNDERGROUND A. Rigid galvanized steel with a 15 mil. PVC jacket (repair abrasions with two coats PVC base paint). Option: Two applications of Scotchrap primer and 51 tape, 1/2 lapped, each application. Rigid nonmetallic raceways may be used where permitted by code unless noted otherwise. B. Arrange and slope raceways entering building to drain away from building. C. Provide marker tape over underground raceways. Marker tape to read "Caution - Electric Line Buried Below" as manufactured by Terra Tape or accepted equal. Install 1' -0" below grade. D. Install underground raceways a minimum of 24" below final grade (36" on public property) unless otherwise noted or required. E. Provide backfill around underground raceways. Use clean sand 6" above and below raceways. Backfill above 6" shall be free of debris or rocks greater than 1" in diameter. Space raceways 7 -1/2" minimum between centers and 3" minimum between raceways. F. Anchor raceways encased in concrete to prevent floating during pour. 3.8 RACEWAYS THAT STUB UP THROUGH FLOOR Install at such depth that the exposed raceway is vertical and no curved section of the elbow is visible. 3.9 RACEWAY PENETRATION SEALS A. Exterior wall surfaces above grade: Provide watertight seal around all raceways. For concrete construction above ground level, cast raceway in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement. For other types of construction use method acceptable to Architect. B. Exterior surfaces below grade: Provide watertight seal around all raceways. Cast raceway into wall (or floor) or use manufactured seal assembly. C. Roofs: Provide flashed and hot mopped weatherproof seal, or a pitch pan filled and sealed to be weatherproof where raceway penetrates roof membrane. Provide a weatherhead on all raceway stubups penetrating roof. D. Fire rated construction: Seal penetrations to maintain fire rating of construction penetrated. Caulk around penetration with Thomas & Betts Flame -Safe Compound, 3M Fire Barrier Caulk, Nelson Electric Flameseal or Dow Corning Silicone RTV foam. Install as recommended by manufacturer. 24646.00 16110 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS 3.10 RACEWAYS SEALING FITTINGS A. Provide watertight seal in the interior of all raceways which pass through building roof, ground floor slab or through outside walls of the building above or below grade. Seal on the end inside the building, using raceway sealing fittings manufactured for the purpose. Seal poured type fittings with a non - hardening compound manufactured for such service. B. Provide sealing fittings for all raceways entering freezers and refrigeration units. 3.11 HANGERS FOR RACEWAYS A. Raceways 1" and larger: Provide lay -in pipe hangers on 3/8" all threaded rods attached to metal ceiling inserts or to structural members at not greater than 10' -0" on center and within 12" of each change in direction. B. When more than two raceways will use the same routing, group together on a patented channel trapeze support system supported by 3/8" (minimum) threaded rods attached to metal ceiling inserts or structural members. C. Suspended ceiling systems: Do not attach raceways to ceiling suspension system hangers. Raceways 3/4" and smaller serving equipment located within ceiling cavity or mounted on or supported by the ceiling grid system may be supported by dedicated #9 ga. galvanized, soft annealed mild steel wire hangers. Two raceways maximum per hanger. Attach raceways with clips manufactured for the purpose. Attach hangers to structure and to ceiling system. 3.12 PULL CORDS A. Provide a pull cord in all raceways for communications and telephone systems. B. In other raceways, provide a nylon pull cord in those which are left empty at end of the project, greater than 25 feet in length. 3.13 PROXIMITY TO HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES Maintain 12" minimum clearance. 3.14 RACEWAY FILL Raceways not sized on the drawings shall be sized per NEC Table 3A. Raceways for signal and communications systems shall be sized per the shop drawings and code. 3.15 EXPANSION FITTINGS Provide expansion fittings for raceways crossing expansion joints, building separation walls, and seismic joints. Provide bonding jumper. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 16110 - 4 PART 1 - GENERAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS D. Conductor insulation color code: 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16120 CONUCTORS AND TERMINATIONS 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all conductors, splices and terminations, complete. B. Refer to Section 16700 and specific sections following for limited energy wiring and conductors. 2.1 POWER CONDUCTORS A. Copper, 600V insulation, UL labeled, brought to project in original containers. Aluminum or copper clad aluminum conductors not permitted. B. Interior and above grade: All conductors to be type THW or RHW. Type THWN /THHN or XHHW conductors may be utilized at Contractor's option, subject to code requirements. Conductors #8 and larger stranded, #10 and #12 solid. C. Underground: Rome -XLP type USE /RHW insulation or equal. Exception: Underground conductors completely contained in code recognized raceway and boxes may be type THW, THWN or XHHW. Type OF direct burial not permitted unless shown on the drawings. 208Y/120V: A- Black, B -Red, C -Blue, N- White, G- Green. 480Y/277V: A- Brown, B- Orange, C- Yellow, N- Natural Grey, G- Green. Colored tape acceptable on #8 and larger. Tape 3" at ends. 2.2 SPLICES A. Above Grade: Solderless type. Preinsulated "twist -on" type (limited to size #10 and smaller). Bolt or compression set type with application of preformed insulated cover, heat shrinkable tubing or plastic insulated tape acceptable for all sizes. B. Below Grade: Provide in handholes with watertight epoxy resin type splicing kits similar to Scotchcast. 2.3 TERMINATIONS A. Compression set, bolted or screw type lug or direct to bolted or screw type terminal. B. Conductors #12 and smaller: Provide eye or forked tongue compression set terminator at bolted or screw set type terminal block or terminal cabinet. 2.4 PLASTIC CABLE TIES Nylon or equivalent, locking type. 16120 - 1 3.1' GENERAL A. Install conductors in raceway unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise. . ' pART 3 - EXECUTION SOUTHCENTER SQUARE SECTION 16120. CONUCTORS AND TERMINATIONS • Conductors from one system shall not be intermixed in same raceway as another system unless shown in same raceway. Examples of circuits not to be intermixed are 480/277 with 208/120, emergency power with normal power, 120V with low voltage, intercom with nurse call, etc. . Install splices and terminations in enclosures as required or shown. D. Tape ends of future circuit conductors in each enclosure. 3.2 CONDUCTOR SIZE Number 12 AWG minimum for power and lighting circuits. 3.3 CONDUCTOR SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS Copper, type TRW, unless noted. Aluminum conductors not permitted. 3.4 RACEWAY SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS Raceway sizes (when shown) are for TRW copper conductors unless shown otherwise. Size raceways per code unless specifically shown larger on • drawings. 3.5 TAPING, if used, shall be halflapped synthetic tape. 3.6 CONDUCTORS IN PANELS, SWITCHBOARDS AND TERMINAL CABINETS Install neatly grouped and formed in a manner to "fan" into terminals with regular spacing. 3.7. CONDUCTORS SUPPORTS Provide conductor support devices per code in vertical cable runs. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 16120 - 2 t A 1 PART 1 - GENERAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 1.1 DESCRIPTION Provide lighting system complete and fully operational. Conform with code and U.L. listing requirements. 1.2 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE SERIES NUMBERS Are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the exact catalog number, size, voltage, wattage, type of lamp, ballast, finish trim, ceiling type, mounting hardware or special requirements as specified hereinafter or as required by the particular installation(s). Acceptable manufacturers and series numbers are listed. The manufacturer listed shall provide complete fixtures equaling or exceeding the written specifications. Verify these requirements and order fixtures as required to give a complete and fully operational installation per the contract documents and per code. Provide fixture to correspond with the number of lamps, wattage and /or size shown on the drawings. 1.3 LIGHT FIXTURE VOLTAGE To match voltage of circuit serving the light fixture. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Include certified laboratory test report prepared by a recognized independent testing facility. Manufacturer's test report is not acceptable. A complete fixture housing and trim supplied with 8' cord, plug and specified lamp shall be submitted if requested either during prior approval or during submittals. Original material, neatly and clearly marked to indicate light fixtures, ballasts and lamps fully comply with contract documents. B. Submittals for each light fixture shall be prepared by the authorized manufacturer's representatives serving the project area. A list of manufacturer's representatives (including address, telephone and fax numbers) identifying which light fixture types they represent shall be included with submittals. This same requirement applies to approvals prior to bid. Submittals not meeting these requirements will be rejected. C. Submittals for other than as specified manufacturers and /or fixtures shall meet all requirements as specified herein and shall be received for review within the prior approval period. Submittals not meeting these requirements will be rejected. D. Submittals are the contractor's, distributor's, manufacturer's and manufacturer's authorized representatives agreement that the fixtures will be provided and installed per contract documents. 24646.00 16500 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 2.1 METAL PARTS AND HOUSING A. Interior Light Fixtures: U.L. listed, steel or aluminum with 300 degrees F., baked enamel finish, brushed aluminum with baked acrylic clear lacquer finish, or stainless steel with a brushed finish, manufacturer's standard color unless specified otherwise. B. Exterior Fixtures: U.L. listed for wet or damp locations as required. Constructed of corrosion resisting metal, (non - ferrous, aluminum or stainless steel) and in all cases suitable for outdoor service without tarnishing or other damage due to exposure. Gasketed for bug tight operation. C. Recessed Fluorescent Fixtures: Specular Alzak aluminum reflector cones shall be self flanged and Color -Chek processed to reduce iridescence; parabolic louvers shall be low iridescence, low brightness semi - specular or specular Alzak as specified. D. Recessed incandescent fixtures with thermal device per NEC 410 -65c. E. Recessed fixtures shall be prewired and approved for a minimum of 8 #12 AWG branch circuit pull- through wiring. 2.2 LIGHT TRANSMITTING COMPONENTS Shall be U.V. stabilized. Unless noted otherwise, shall conform to the following: A. Where the fluorescent fixture requires an acrylic prismatic diffuser, the lens shall be 100% virgin acrylic not less than 0.125 inches overall. B. Light fixtures containing lamps which require protective shielding shall have tempered glass lens or approved unbreakable lens, U.L. listed for the application. 2.3 SPECIAL PARTS A. Provide adapters, plates, brackets and anchors where required by manufacturers and /or construction features of the building to suitably mount lighting fixtures. All such appurtenances and mounting methods shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to fabrication and installation. Provide end plates for all individually hung fluorescent light fixtures and for row ends of continuous rows of light fixtures. B. Provide plaster frame for recessed light fixtures mounted in other than T- bar ceilings. Contractor shall verify mounting with architectural reflected ceiling plan before ordering light fixtures. 2.4 CANOPY Provide for each light fixture or hanger except where light fixture conceals the outlet box directly without a canopy. 24646.00 16500 - 2 • - , . 2.5 LAMPS A. Manufacturer: General Electric, Sylvania, Osram, Philips, Venture, or as listed specifically in Light Fixture Schedule. B. Provide for each light fixture in the exact number and type for which the light fixture is designed or as noted. C. All lamps shall be replaced with new at close of job. D. Fluorescent Type: Bi -pin, T -8 rapid start; 3500 ° K color temperature unless otherwise noted. Bi -pin, T -12, rapid start; 3500 ° K color temperature unless otherwise noted. Compact TT and DTT; 3500 ° K color temperature unless otherwise noted. E. Incandescent Type: Inside frosted, 125V, filament lamps rated for 2500 hours of life (extended service type). F. High Intensity Discharge Type Metallic Vapor - 10,000 hours life minimum. G. Tungsten Halogen - Low voltage (MR -11, MR -16) a compact Tungsten Halogen lamp operating at low voltage (12V), shall consist of a precision faceted dichroic glass reflector allowing heat to be transmitted backwards while reflecting light forwards in a controlled beam. Lamps shall have the following lamp life characteristics: H. Spare Lamps. Provide one case of each type used on project. Turn over to owner and obtain signed receipt. 2.6 SOCKETS A. Incandescent - Porcelain, medium base except where mogul base lamps are standard for the light fixture specified. B. Fluorescent - Suitable for lamp type employed. C. H.I.D. - Porcelain, mogul or medium base, pulse rated as required by light fixture. Keyed for all position oriented lamps. 2.7 MAGNETIC BALLASTS AND WHIPS - FLUORESCENT Universal, Valmont, Advance, Robertson or as specifically noted in the light fixture schedule. A. Standard application for all fluorescent light fixtures: 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING MR -11 (20 and 35 watt) 3000 hours MR -11 (50 watt) 2000 hours MR -16 (35, 50 and 75 watt) 4000 hours Refer to light fixture schedule for lamp beam spreads. 1. Suitable for lamp type employed. 16500 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 2. UL and CBM (where applicable) labels, non -PCB, Class P, high power factor type. Provide Multi -tap when available. 3. Low Heat, energy saving type. Secured with bolts or one bolt and opposite flange.. 4. Each ballast individually protected by an in -line GMF fuse in a Sussman type HLR fuseholder. Provide six spare fuses of each type used. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. 5. "A" sound rating for 430 ma. and 265 ma. 6. Provide 6' -0 ", 3 -wire flexible conduit connections (whips) for dual level switching as shown on the drawings, light fixtures recessed in accessible suspended ceilings. 7. Provide high power factor ballasts for all compact fluorescent twintube /PL type lamps. B. Low temperature and /or outdoor application. Provide ballasts suitable for low temperature where light fixture is located outdoors, in freezer or refrigerator or other location where space ambient is expected to be below 50 degrees F. C. Dimming ballasts (when applicable): type required by dimmer manufacturer for proper operation and to maintain U.L. listing of dimming system components utilized. D. Warranty. Ballast shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of not less than three years. E. Spare Ballasts. Provide six of each type used on project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. 2.8 ELECTRONIC BALLASTS - FLUORESCENT Rapid Start Series: EBT SSB1 /LH Series; Motorola MRN Series; Valmont SR /G01 Series or as specifically noted in the light fixture schedule. A. For light fixtures as identified in the Light Fixture Schedule. 24646.00 1. Suitable for lamp type and quantity employed. 2. U.L. and CBM (where applicable) labels, non -PCB high power factor type. 3. Each ballast individually protected by an in -line GMF fuse in a Bussman HLR fuseholder. 4. Provide 6' -0 ", 3 -wire flexible conduit connections (whips) for dual level switching as shown on the drawings, light fixtures recessed in accessible suspended ceilings. B. Ballasts shall meet the following regulatory requirements: 16500 - 4 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING - IEEE publication 587, category A (transients) FCC part 18 - Minimum efficiency standards of Public Law No. 100 -357 C. Reduced light output ballasts are not acceptable except as noted in the light fixture schedule. D. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 20% of the input current. Current crest factor shall not be greater than 1.6. Operating frequency shall be between 20 and 60 KHZ. E. Dimming ballasts (Lutron or as noted in the light fixture schedule) shall be compatible with dimmer manufacturer for proper operation and to maintain U.L. listing of dimming system components utilized. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10%. F. Dual light level ballasts (Motorola Adjustable Potentiometer Series or Magnetek LLSS Series, or as noted in the light fixture schedule) shall be operated by two SPST switch, low voltage (24VAC) EMS, occupancy sensor or photocell as indicated on the drawings. G. Warranty. Ballast shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of not less than three years. H. Spare Ballasts. Provide 24 of each type used on project; except dimming, provide six. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. 2.9 BALLAST - HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE A. Valmont, Osram, Zumtobel, Jefferson, Advance, Widelite, Universal. Constant wattage (CW) or Constant Wattage Autotransformer (CWA) HPF type (minimum power factor 90 %), non -PCB or electronic as specifically listed in the light fixture schedule. Provide multi -tap when available. Provide "low noise" or "extra quiet" type ballasts for each light fixture. Noticeably noisy ballasts to be replaced. Each ballast shall be individually protected by an in -line fuse in a Bussman fuseholder type HLR for 120 and 277 volt, type HEX for 208, 240 and 480 volt. Provide six spare fuses with each type used on project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. B. Spare Ballasts. Provide six of each type used on project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. 2.10 EXIT SIGNS A. Unless shown otherwise to be two circuit, universal mounting, universal arrows, green letters with single or double face as required. See "Light Fixture Schedule ". B. Fronts: Cutout stencils made of minimum #20 gauge sheet steel or sheet aluminum with green glass or plastic back of the cutout; mount fronts either on concealed hinges or pull -out type with chain catch. Removable cutout arrows to indicate direction of travel. 24646.00 16500 - 5 2.11 HANGERS FOR PENDANT FIXTURES Painted rigid raceway type, not less than 5- thread engagement at each end, consisting of painted steel pipe, with brass or aluminum tubing casing, or painted tubing not less than 0.040 inches thick. Provide swivel -ball aligners for each pendant. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 2.12 OUTDOOR LIGHTING STANDARDS Provide 100 mph steady wind rated poles with ground lug and access handhole plate. Provide watertight insulating fuse and holder in the base of each lighting standard to individually protect each lighting fixture. Fuse holder similar to Buss style "HEX" (HEB permitted for 120V or 277V), with Buss fuse of appropriate ampacity and voltage. Provide fuse for each hot circuit wire; do not fuse neutral. Provide rebar reinforced concrete base per manufacturer's recommendations. Provide galvanized anchor bolts with length 12" shorter than concrete base length. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES, GENERAL A. Mounting height from finished floor to or center of outlet box for wall light Architect. Verify mounting provisions order of light fixtures and provide as application and location in which they bottom of pendant light fixture fixture as noted or verified with and other requirements prior to required. UL listed for the are installed. B. In accessible suspended ceilings, wiring connection by 72" flexible conduit (flexible tubing not permitted) from a rigidly supported junction box. C. All finishes unmarred upon project completion. All damaged finishes repaired or replaced. 3.2 DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES Install lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean up are completed. Remove all dirty lamps, reflectors and diffusers; clean and reinstall. When cleaning "Alzak: reflectors, use a manufacturer recommended cleaning solution. Reflectors damaged or impregnated with fingerprints shall be replaced at the contractor's expense. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT OF LIGHT FIXTURES Make all final spotlight and adjustable light settings under the direction of the Architect or Lighting Designer during a scheduled period of time prior to the completion of the project. Include in base bid all equipment and personnel expenses (including overtime) required for adjustment. 3.4 SUPPORT OF INCANDESCENT AND COMPACT FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES A. Surface or pendant type: Attach to heavy formed steel straps attached to the outlet box by means of threaded stems with locknuts, or directly to the outlet box where the light fixture is specifically so designed. 24646.00 16500 - 6 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING B. Recessed Type: Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling, with the recessed portion of the fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. Bottom of light fixture to be flush with adjacent ceiling. Fixture trim shall totally conceal ceiling opening. Provide earthquake chains when fixture is supported by ceiling suspension system. 3.5 SUPPORT OF FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES A. Recessed type: For light fixtures supported by the ceiling suspension system, provide four Caddy 0515 support clips (one each corner) which lock light fixture to ceiling tees after light fixture is installed. In addition, provide for each light fixture two 014 earthquake chains or 09 wires secured (at diagonally opposite fixture corners) to structural members above suspended ceiling. For plaster or GWB ceilings provide plaster frame compatible with light fixture. B. Surface mounted type: 1. Where mounted on accessible ceilings, support from structural members above ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved. 2. Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Laser sight to insure straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. C. Pendant Mounted Type: 1. Provide strong back channel entire fixture length unless light fixture is designed specifically for supporting itself. 2. Where suspended from accessible ceiling, support from structural members above ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved. 3. Continuous Runs of Light Fixtures: Laser sight to insure straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. 3.6 SUPPORT OF HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPED LIGHT FIXTURES As specified for incandescent light fixtures, except where special provisions are required for ballast arrangements; provide access to ballasts in all cases. Provide earthquake chains when light fixture is supported by the ceiling suspension system. 3.7 CEILING LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORT Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of lighting fixture(s) installed, provide additional framing to support as required. 3.8 SWITCHING FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES A. Except where indicated otherwise provide two level switching of all three and four lamp fluorescent light fixtures such that the center lamp(s) are on one switch and the outer lamps are on another. Required 24646.00 16500 - 7 SOUTHCENTER'CORPORATE:SQUARE 'SECTION '16500 LIGHTING switchlegs in light fixture flex connection "whips" are not shown on the ;.'drawings: . Where indicated on the drawings or as noted in the light fixture schedule, provide dual light level ballast as specified in Section 16500, 2.8.F. Required awitchlegs in light fixture flex connection "whips" are not shown on the drawings. 3.9 • OUTDOOR LIGHTING BOLLARDS Plumb.all bollards•to true vertical. Provide galvanized anchor bolts :Hand 'nuts.. Plumb using a nut above and below the-base •plate',on the `.anchor bolts. Pack grout'between base plate and 'concrete base: Bollard :..base shall be flush with grade when located in paved surface Ground .'al].components. 3.10 OUTDOOR LIGHTING STANDARDS Plumb all standards to true vertical. For bolted poles, provide galvanized anchor bolts and nuts. Plumb using a nut above and below the base plate on the anchor bolts. Pack grout between base plate and concrete base and provide drain hole below base plate to prevent accumulation of moisture inside pole base. Provide two piece or individual covers for nuts exposed above the baseplate of the same color as. the ' pole. Ground pole and light fixture. END OF SECTION u 24646.00 16500 - 8 SOUTHCENTER'CORPORATESQUARE `SECTION'16930 LIGTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 1.1 DESCRIPTION Provide U.L. listed lighting control equipment. PART : 2 PRODUCTS 2.2 2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS AND CONTROL RELAYS A. Contactors: Multipole, mechanically or electrically held as shown, rated for 480V operation. Contact rating 20A minimum or as required, with coil clearing contacts. Square D Class 8903. Control relays: Rated 600V, 20A contacts. Square D Class 8501 XMO -4 C. NEMA 1.enclosures and 120V coils unless noted otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PHOTO CONTROL Provide roof mounted (unless noted otherwise) support stand. Orient light sensor in northerly direction. 3.2 LIGHTING CONTROLS Install control equipment with required wiring to achieve lighting control noted. Outdoor lights off during daylight hours. 24646.00 PHOTO CELL Off -day, on- night, 1500 watt tungsten rated SPST contact, 2 to 5 footcandle adjustable light sensing range, time delayed switching, weatherproof. Tork #2100 or similar by Paragon or G.E. TIME CLOCK Rated 120 volt, 40 amps, SPST, 24 hour dial time, self - winding reserve . power carry over, with day omitting device, two sets of on -off trippers and auto- off -on selector switch. Tork series 7200L (modified) or similar by Paragon. END OF SECTION 16930 - 1 PART 1 - ORAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION Summary of procedures and requirements for project closeout of electrical portions of work. Conform also with other portions of the Contract Documents. Final payment to Contractor is subject to full completion of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS Reproducible, Xerox drawings. See 16010, 1.10. 2.2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (0.& M) MANUALS Hardboard, screw post, imprinted covers. Tabbed dividers between categories. See 16010, 1.11. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REQUEST FOR FINAL PUNCH LIST To request a final electrical punch list, forward a letter to Sparling, Inc. stating; "The electrical work on this project is complete, all punch list items to date are complete, items 1 - 14 in Section 16999, 3.2 are complete and the project is ready for final punch list observation ". SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16999 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 3.2 JOB CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE A. Perform the following procedures for project closeout of electrical portions of work: 24646.00 1. Perform testing, tests and documentation per 16030. 2. Refinish electrical equipment finishes which are damaged. 3. Clean up per 16100, 3.5. Clean all parts of lighting fixtures. 4. Type panel schedules with actual "as- built" circuit descriptions. Number all circuit breakers. 5. Seal all conduit penetrations. 6. Obtain final electrical inspection. Include copies in 0 & M manual. 7. Give written one year warranty in 0 & M per 16010, 1.9. 8. Furnish Record Drawings per 16010, 1.10. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 9. Furnish 0 & M Manuals per 16010, 1.11. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 10. Give instruction periods to owner's personnel per 16010, 1.12. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. END OF SECTION 16999 - 1 JUN 03 '97 03:34PM UNICO_P lii % % %�. % /N/ I / / /iiii %%Y% ili // /�/ /iii % %.i / /�i'�• /iiiiil /l,i /i% - %iiii %.ti!� / / % / /� :' //- Post -it" Fax Note 7671 � X ` `3.97 Irr4' 1 To i(^LCL1/ From Gay co./Dept. C, airy �gW/ Co. Wt / M 1 � Phone 11 7 Phone k b � F ox Y ! 3C.1.2- Fax # � 510 • • • • • PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF . NBBJ 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (206) 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 ou nter orporate PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: OWNER : ARCHITECT : STRUCTURAL : ELECTRICAL : SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE - ISSUED FOR PERMIT TUKWILA, WASHINGTON BLDG. 1 ONLY • G Lowe Enterprises Northwest, Inc. 600 University Street, Suite 2820 Seattle, Washington 98101 NBBJ COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN SPARLING DRAWINGS INDEX A -1.0 COVER SHEET SURVEY / VICINITY MAP A -1.1 ABBREVIATIONS / GRAPHICS A -2 SITE PLAN A -3 LOBBY PLANS A -4 STOREFRONT DETAILS A -5 EXTERIOR DETAILS / SITE DETAILS A -6 EXTERIOR DETAILS A -7 E.LF.S. DETAILS A -8 EXT. BLDG. ELEVATIONS S1 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES S2 BRIDGE /PAVILION FRAMIMG PLANS & DETAILS ES ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN scde COVER SHEET a r P97-O/3 aplraved By lab Wk.. 24646.00 Deda�d Dr. Chedad We 3/31/97 SEPARATE PER REQUIRED FOR''.". fO ELECTRIc. EIPLUMBING al-GAS PIPING BU DNG [Vs KWILA APPROVED a A��o CITY OF TUKWIL4 APR 0 3 1997 PERMIT CENTER DV' . o lob CURVE RADIUS DELTA LENGTH BEARING CHORD CI C2 50.00' 15.00' 90'06'49" 5415'56' 7864' 14.34' S4630'53 "W N60'42'44 ° W 70.78' 13.80' C3 C4 50.00' 15.00' 28931'52' 544556' 252.66' 14.34' S015418'W N64 "E 57.69' 13.80' 05 C6 50.00' 50.00' 8933'11" 90'06'49' 7844' 7864' 543'09'070 54650'53'W 70.64' 70.78' C7 C8 15.00' 50.00' 5445'56' 28931'52' 14.34' 252.66' N60 42'44'W 50154'18 "W 13.80' 57.69' C9 C10 15.00' 50.00' 5445'56' 8953'11' 14.34 78.44' N643120'E S4309'07E 13.80' 70.64' C11 30.00 90'17'29' 47.28 5465673 W 4253 uer A POINT OF BEGINNING FOUND LEAD PLUG /WO TAG(, 1.04' KIST OR TRUE CORNER FOUND 1/2' IRON ROD Klnl Ya10W STIC WP '156 Q61 FIST PLA OF TRUE CORNER ELECTRIC CONDUIT \SIDEWALK - L 0 REC. NO. 7610290608 - -1 ® REC. NO. 7703070907 W h I FOUND 1' IRON PIPE MTH YELLOW PLASTIC CAP, 0.09' NORM OF TRUE CORNER FOUND 1/2' '77g" nc ON 000 ' SN KTTH TflLOW vTAS C AP R 0.11' EAST OF TRUE CORNER CERTIFICATION \4 WLwLATm EAST 1 CORNER a= n i r 26. oKNSH/P v NaRnt awcE s EAST; w.u. 1 1 1 I O M N 080'0542 "E 30.00' SO14729'W 1 Ol' LEGAL DESCRIPTION EXCEPT THE EAST 30 FEET THEREOF FOR ROAD; CHAINLINK FENCE UNE THAT PORTION OF THE EAST 1/2 OF THE NORTHWEST 1/4 OF THE SOUTHEAST 1/4 OF SECTION 26, TOWNSHIP 23 NORTH, RANGE 4 EAST W.M., DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS: -BEGINNING AT THE NORTHEAST CORNER OF SAID EAST 1/2 WHICH IS NORTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS REST ALONG THE NORTH UNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4, A DISTANCE OF 1,339.34 FEET FROM THE NORTHEAST CORNER OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4; THENCE SOUTH 01 DEGREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS WEST ALONG ME EAST UNE OF SAID EAST 1/2, A DISTANCE OF 1,322.34 FEET TO THE SOUTHEAST CORNER THEREOF; THENCE NORTH 87 DEC: as 55 MINUTES 02 SECONDS WEST ALONG THE SOUTH LINE OF SAID EAST 1/2 A DISTANCE OF 659.35 FEET TO THE WEST UNE OF THE EAST 659.34 FEET OF SAID EAST 1/2 THENCE NORTH 01 DEGREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS EAST ALONG SAID WEST UNE A DISTANCE OF 1,320.30 FEET TO 114E NORTH UNE OF SAID EAST 1/2; THENCE SOUTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS EAST ALONG SAID NORTH UNE A DISTANCE OF 659.34 FEET TO THE PUNT OF BEGINNING; AND EXCEPT THE SOUTH 30 FEET THEREOF AS DEEDED TO THE 091 OF TUKWILA UNDER RECORDING NO. 9408290327; AND EXCEPT RAILROAD TRACKAGE AS RESERVED BY UNION PACIFIC RAIL^OAD COMPANY AS DISCLOSED BY DEED RECORDED UNDER RECORDING NO. 7607070502; 523. 451.30' To Transnation Title Insurance Company Lowe Northwest Investor Properties 1, L.C.C. Washington Limited Liability Company N0147 29 E AND EXCEPT THAT PORTION OF SAID SUBDIVISION DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS: BEGINNING AT A POINT ON THE WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK WEST, 6111011 POINT BEARS NORTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS WEST 1,369.34 FELT ALONG THE NORTHERLY UNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4 AND SOUTH 0' DEGREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS WEST 451.30 FEET ALONG SAID WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK WEST; THENCE FROM SAID PONT OF BEGINNING LEAVING SAID WESTERLY MARGIN, TANGENT TO 712E PRECEDING COURSE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RICHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 FEET AND A SENTRAL ANGLE OF 90 DEGREES 06 MINUTES 49 SECONDS, AN ARC LENGTH OF 7864 FEET TO A POINT ON A UNE THAT IS PARALLEL TO AND 501.40 FEET SOUTHERLY OF THE NORTHERLY UNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4; THENCE ALONG SAID PARALLEL LINE NORTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS VEST 32876 FEET; THENCE LEAVING LAST SAID PARALLEL UNE TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING COURSE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE 70 THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 15.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 54 DEGREES 45 MINUTES 56 SECONDS AN ARC DISTANCE OF 14.34 FEET TO A POINT OF REVERSE CURVATURE; THENCE TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING CURVE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE LEFT, HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 289 DEGREES 31 MINUTES 52 SECONDS, AN ARC DISTANCE OF 25266 FEET TO A POINT OF REVERSE CURVATURE THENCE TANGENT 70 THE PRECEDING CURVE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RICHE HAVING A RADIUS OF 15.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 54 DECREES 4E MINUTES 56 SECONDS AN ARC LEWD, OF 14.34 FEET TO A UNE THAT IS PARALLEL TO AND 546.40 FEET SOUTHERLY 01 THE NORTHERLY UNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4; THENCE ALONG SAID PARALLEL UNE SOUTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS EAST 327.05 FEET; 1FI0FKE LEAVING SAID PARALLEL UNE, TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING COURSE ALONG TIE ARC OF A CU TO THE RIGHT, HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 89 DEGREES 53 MINUTES 11 SECONDS AN ARC LENGTH OF 7844 FEET TO A POINT ON THE WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK 1455 THENCE ALONG SAID WESTERLY MARGIN NORTH 07 DECREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS EAST 145.000 FEET TO THE POINT OF BEGINNING; This is to certify that this map and the survey on which it is based were made(i) in accordance with M16dmum Standard Detail Requirements tar ALTA /AGSM Land Title Surveys, Jointly established and adopted by ALTA and AGSM in 1992, and Includes items 1 - of Table A thereof. and (0) pursuant to the Accuracy Standards (01 adopted by ALTA and AGSM and in effect on the date of this certification) a1 an Urban Survey. 2 3 Date: 1"21 q Signe. Regietratfan No.: t 4 VO ( 2- FOND 1/2' IRON ROD ?NTH TIIL PLASTI CAP TY 0.17 EAST OF PR LINE 7 50147'29`W 522.0• 1290.30' AND EXCEPT THAT PORTION MORE PARTICULARLY DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS: 1322.34' 377.00' BEGINNING AT A POINT 026 THE WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK WEST WHICH POINT BEARS NORTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS KEST 1,369.34 FEET ALONG THE NORTHERLY UNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4, AND SOUTH 01 DEGREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS WEST 973.30 FEET ALONG SAID WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK WEST; THENCE FROM SAID POINT 00 BEGINNING LEAVING SAID WESTERLY MARGIN, TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING COURSE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TH THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 90 DEGREES 06 MINUTES 49 SECONDS, AN ARC LENGTH OF 7864 FEET TO A POINT ON n LINE THAT i5 PARALLEL TO AND 1,02140 FEET SOUTHERLY OF THE NORTHERLY UNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4; THENCE ALONG SAID PARALLEL UNE NORTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 S ECONDS WEST 326.76 FEET; THENCE LEAVING LAST SAID PARALLEL UNE TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING COURSE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 15.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 54 DEGREES 45 MINUTES 56 SECONDS AN ARC DISTANCE 01 14.34 FEET TO A POINT OF REVERSE CURVATURE; THENCE TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING CURVE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE LEFT HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 289 0006905 31 MINUTES 52 SECONDS AN ARC DISTANCE OF 25266 FEET TO A POINT OF REVERSE CURVATUR THENCE TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING CURVE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 15.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 54 DEGREES 45 MINUTES 56 SECONDS AN ARC LENGTH OF 14.34 7707 TO A LINE MAT IS PARALLEL TO AND 1,06840 F67 SOUTHERLY OF THE NORTHERLY DUNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/$ THENCE ALONG SAID PARALLEL. UNE SOUTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS EAST 327.05 FEET; THENCE LEAVING SAID PARALLEL UNE TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING COURSE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL 414060 OF 89 DEGREES 53 MINUTES 11 SECONDS, AN ARC LENGTH OF 7844 FEET TO A POINT ON THE WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK WEST; THENCE ALONG SAID WESTERLY MARGIN NORTH 01 DEGREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS EAST 145.00 FEET TO THE POINT OF BEGINNING SITUATED IN THE CITY OF 7UKWILA, COUNTY OF KING, STATE OF WASHINGTON. c CURVE DATA EASEMENT AND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THEREOF: a, EASEMENT AND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THEREOF: PURPOSE Alb A AFFECTED: RECORDING NO.: RAILROAD TRACKAGE AND APPURTENANCES AS LOCATED ON SAID PROPERTY 7607070502 COVERS EXISTING TRACKS EASEMENT AND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THEREOF: PURPOSE: AREA AFFECTED: RECORDING N0.: UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC UTIUTY SYSTEM NOR1, 12 - 13 FEET 7610290608 • EASEMENT AND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THEREOF: PURPOSE: RAILROAD AREA AFFECTED: RECORDING NO.: 0 EASEMENT AND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THEREOF: PURPOSE: AREA AFFECTED: AS THEREIN 7703070907 BUILDING 1 2 STORY F.F. =22.50 10,708 S.F. BUILDING 4 2 STORY F.F. =23.50 10,803 S.F. BUILDING 12 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,8455.9. BUILDING 2 2 STORY F.F. =22.50 10,921 S.F. 1111.01 5 A BUILDING 3 2 STORY F.F. =23.50 10,709 S.F. BUILDING 10 2 STORY. 9.7 =24.00 10,807 S.F. 172.6, 0 800.05045 5 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,791 S.F. COVERED ATRIUM BUILDING 7 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,833 S.F. BUILDING 9 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,819 S.F. BUILDING 11 2 STORY F.F. =24.50 17,062 S.F. 276.44' L � , RESERVATIONS AND EXCEPTIONS (1RANSW 7771E INSURANCE COMPANY PREILRIARY 1111E REPORT, ORDER NO 865917 DATED COMER 30. 1906) PURPOSE: RAILROAD LEAD ONES AND SPURS, ROAD AND UNDERGROUND STORM AND SANITARY SEWERS AREA. AREA AFFECTED: SOUTH 30 FEET RECORDING NO: 5973722 69.00' Ii UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC TRANSMISSION AND /0R DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 7 FEET IN 9400 AS PRESENTLY STAKED OR AS MAY BE CONSTRUCTED, EXTENDED OR RELOCATED IN THE FUTURE RECORDING N0.: 7801130816 COVERS ENTIRE PARCEL 1 45.00' AMC GNALS ❑ 0.00 30.00' 0 REC. NO. 5973722 30.00' 50147'29'W 00.00' SCALE • 50 0 25 50 100 - - . EQUIPMENT ADDRESSES BUILDING 11 BUILDING 12 BUILDING 13 BUILDING f4 BUILDING 15 BUILDING 16 BUILDING 17 BUILDING 18 BUILDING 19 BUILDING 110 BUILDING 111 BUILDING 112 4, VERTICAL DATUM: NGNO 1929 (FEET) 1 Inch = 50 ft. {.EGEND A FIRE HYDRANT - AUTO ARE CONNECTION 54 WATER VALVE ® WATER METER K1, POST INDICATOR o- WATER BLOKOFF - -W-- WATER PAINT MARK 011417 POLE W/LIOHT E - GUY ANCHOR B m 3. PARKING SPACE COUNT: STANDARD COMPACT 764 483 5. PARCEL CONTAINS 17.45 ACRES UTILITY POLE POKER METER POKER VAULT POKER TRANSFORMER TELEPHONE VAULT TELEPHONE RISER O TELEPHONE MANHOLE - T - TE/EPHLWE PAINT MARK a WS METER ? WS VENT -G- WS PAINT MARK VICINITY MAP T.S. ❑ CATCH BASIN O STORY MANHOLE - -SD-- STORM uNE O SERER MANHOLE ® aR 0715 Box • FOUND BRASS CAP YON. M YONUYENT BOX FOUND MONUMENT AS NOTED LOCATION OF 117LE REPORT EXCEPTION EVERGREEN TREE DECIDUOUS TREE CONCRETE WALK FIELD MEASUREMENTS FOR THIS SUR WY WERE PERFORMED WITH A WILD TOTAL STATION INSTRUMENT. ALL PRIMARY MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT UTILIZED HAS BEEN COMPARED TO AND ADJUSTED AGAINST A NATIONAL GEODETIC BAS LJNE WITHIN THE LAST ONE YEAR. HANDICAP 21 CITY OF TUK'NILA A PPROVED JUN 3 1997 BUILDING DIVISION ION 8 9 200 REFERENCES 1. REFERENCE SURVEY PLATS; VOL 128/27 -28 VOL 104/8 -10, VOL. 31/73 -74, VOL 83/22 -25 REFERENCE SURVEYS; 54/212, 43 /115 128/26. 2 SHORT PLAT N0. 17J SP 91 -9 SS RECORDED UNDER RECORDING N0. 9208261819, RECORDS OF KING COUNTY, WASHINGTON. 545 ANDOVER PARK NEST TUKWILA WASHINGTON 98188 565 ANFIGVER PARK T TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 575 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 555 ANDOVER PARK NEST TUKNILA, WASHINGTON 98188 625 ANDOVER PARK NEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 645 ANDOVER PARK NEST TUKIWLA, WASHINGTON 98188 655 ANDOVER PARK. NEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 635 ANDOVER PARK NEST 00998L4, WASHINGTON 98188 685 ANDOVER PARK NEST 0006604. WASHINGTON 98188 360 CORPORATE DRIVE NORTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 375 CORPORATE DRIVE SOUTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 370 CORPORATE DRIVE NORM TUKWILA. WASHINGTON 98188 GENERAL NOTES 1. SUBJECT PARCEL IS ZONE X - OUTSIDE 500 YEAR FLOOD PLAIN PER FIRM MAP 5303, 2 BUILDING SETBACKS PER CITY OF TUKWILA: FRONT - 15; SECOND FRONT - 15, SIDE •• 10; REAR - 10' RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWIIA APR 0 3 1997 PERMIT CENTER Qf g U 4 g K < Y SHEET. 1 1 1 1 I -i �� s jgdfigli1114110 aillifil iiii4611110113: c MiPg 336i• R �Msss� AssEs > >g> i* 1.>aaV� g E 333:�:a its ottia 10 h U >e kt : : : !II 1 1 _ 11/ e Ica a� J. a :!!)11 m3 a !ma lallAse0co ,m.. sg.A es W3 36REi nslisW s l° Alliii6W E t Alliglas Ma383116 iNgigs0EIE WEIEllialig111EAM - -9pa el OP Agri los"ssA 400 iI 111 1 III 1 g ;511 9 mshi EEA ac.iW !a i3 sE OooIss DIE ITRIEle d €Iklitd 111613 stuai E EW1 Cssi ¢ :2 ogiadilith 1300 AsaW3Eia 1 111111 1111 11111 1116 ll I s � g � fill I 1 sat =1 muoo.a,..s vg $4 gm2hEEil a __ta . ..1.110iiiiiii tt$ -,Ahri Yata &o.,3. J_.73IME5s3Em 2E111110 9S W�W�i��nEaa i3ii� adW I j I !! � �� s ag ,1 1 - 1g 1111;1 ' it # � 41 .. lit ; W $ � Q s Is# 1AI 11111 11111111111!! J 11ii1! $t 111 1 3€ t11t0ttt tI!a !a!!!s11 s X111111 LLtl g ffill: Ii ; 15 A i !III 11 yI .A1,4 g µ all 9� 511 3 p .A1 s411WgOl Ali mgg -wsi c.15551,1 `Cieimsimi 3m oo sa0,Y455 iaggg5 1 $ $a5A W� 3 $3'�3 , 1 it . t. sa s 0- al 1 li i; . is i 1 I t Y� l .Y g 6;I 8ii 11 ¢ I 0 17,13 Ii igs; 1 I !hiHI!I h 11111114111)11/ii � t€ g � # ii III! III 1 h Ih .11101 MEIN mdMialgigesamEEE il3 EinE u_ _ Y3mEge dEi ±LL Pale ER t APNIan ft tag mteh EE co- sast!.E.3Aiasgail s a$i3 ummunm 11..1•..0. 11111111111111111111 ■ G a ga 1 t tii" f 0 �11�1 b S 8 l !id i 31/0 C� 1 iN 1 f ij ;i1 r II g 4D p Le 1 Iii ;I - - I i ! i.oc"58wuga000 Ooo98g1Yggh$ a`a$ 1 1 11 1 11 if 11 11 11 11 11 I H E f h 11 a x MIA! ill - � ono LbCJ 1 k i 111 A 1 0 <co W 5 0 2 03.4 bao 1 1 8 1 w : Q C!0 w CC 0 0 0 W 0 0 0 0 z� Cl) 1— : ENTRY PAVILION - SEF SHi. A -5 7 STRIP 2' -4 WOE REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FlXNRE EXIST. CURB CURB TO BE REMOVED 1CONC. 21 NBBJ RY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.12 MEN 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (2(6) 223 - 5555 Fox (206) 621 -2300 ,08'5'bL M „6,L17o1OS :,.IDYL LXIJ i. AS RED. (SHOWN DASHED) NM. I TRENCH DRAIN E%IST. CONC. CONC. SEAT 'CONC. 21 KONG 11 / NEW WRB WT WHEELCHAIR OMIT 2Pa�E EXIST. TRASH ENCL. TO REMAIN -PAINT TO MATCH NEW ENCL. 1 SI T E PLAN SG" f00' B NEW POT.E MWNTED- . I , DIS Ia -- PKG. SHAT' ►o NEW PLANTINGS PT. r1LL FOL NEW ACCESS STALL - T.5' 0'Wi I WSS PAM ' NEW WRB CUT @ WHEETCHAR RAMP 1:12 SLOPE REMOVE EXI (/ COLVC. P S TO= 3 (SHOW RED. INWVIISL a +5i (SHOWN OASHFD AMOOM w 0 ENCR DRAIN _ - z CONC SEAT ' ICWC. 21 ��. ENTRY PAVILION SEE SHT, ; A -5 LOBBY 1/10 V IVH I RY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.10 = 1' -o• -1 -AREA OF WORK -1 200' EAST. CURB 111111111 ENTRY PAVILION SEE SHT., A -5 •TV. STRIP WIDE NEW POIE MOUNTED DISABLED PKG: SIGN NEW WRB NEW CURB CUT 4HEELCHAIR RAMP 1 :12 SLOPE PT 5 -0' WI. ACCESSIBLE PATH NEC TRASH ENCLOSURE DEMO &T REMOVE / EXIST. TRASH ENCLOSURE ,Oc - 1/16 ANDOVER PARK WEST M „6 - REMOVE - El AS RED. (SHOWN DASHED ENCH DRAIN CONC. SEAT IDNC. 21 REMOVE EXIST. TREE ICONC.11 NEW PLANTINGS ICIXIC. 21 RY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.4 ENTRY PAVILION - SEE SHT. A -5 REMOVE E%IST. AS PANNG AS W D. (SHOWN DASHED) DRAIN REMOVE EXIST. LIGHT FIXTURE NEW POLE 1 MOUNTED DISABLED PKG. SIGN ' PT. SYMBOL NEW IACCE2 PT. 5 VA , ACCESS PATH 1/16 = 1' -O 611111 NMIIINIMN■■ EXISTING BUILDING 17 2 STORY F.F. =24.50 30,208 GSF OMIT ( ■ / 4 L/7 I . o � 21 Q O 14 19 117 RASH 1 (RASH ENCL. OLD- I ' 1j II1 , 00'LLc EXISTING BUILDING 9 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 20,421 GSF PREP. &PAINT EXIST. MIL ROOFING 11 I I E X I S T I N G TO MATCH EIFS -1 J BUILDING 7 (NF). 2 STORY 19,42 OMIT F.F = GSF 1 GSF -I - tea EXISTING BUILDING 6 L , 2 STORY 1 F.F. =24.00 20,421 GSF / T 1 - - .1 T - , , iuiT j p EXISTING ()IVII I �', ,--F, BUILDING 5 2 STORY ®MIT 19° REMOVE EXIST TRASH ENCL. EXISTING BUILDING 8 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 20,421 GSF OMIT 60 PEI REMOVE EX ST TRASH ENCL. EXISTING BUILDING EMIT 2 STORY W� F.F. =24.00 19,421 GSF aA� EXISTING BUILDING 2 2 STORY F.F. =22.50 19,421 GSF EXISTING BUILDING 3 2 STORY F.F. =23.50 20,421 GSF EXISTING \ BUILDING 12 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 19,421 GSF EXISTING BUILDING 1 2 STORY F.F. =22.50 20,421 GSF EXISTING BUILDING 4 2 STORY F.F. =23.50 19,421 GSF NEW TRASH ENCLOSURE DEMO & REMOVE EXIST. TRASH -� ENCLOSURE 5Z LE,!ON PARKING ANALYSIS 31.RI ARY TOTAL PARKING STALLS PLANTINGS RY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.3 EXISTING 1261 PROPOSED 1257 TOTAI. HANDICAPPED STALLS 22 22 NOTE: STALL DIMENSIONS SHAI.L FOLLOW CITY OF TUKWILA ZONING CODE 18.56. PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOU T HCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE - ISSUED FOR PERMIT TUKWILA, WASHINGTON BLDG. 1 Irac 2 1 TP.3IRIP 2'�4' MADE NEW WRB WT ) & WNEFiCHIR RAMP1:12 SLOPE AREA OF WORK TRENCH DRAIN TYP. STRIP 2' -4' WIDE NEW POLE MID. DISABLED PARKING SI. • PT. SYMBOL FOR NEW ACCESS STALL - ►: PL 5-0" VA. ACCESS PATH NEW PLANTINGS Dee 1/1t = T By 0.4f6 K. of FeVvae NEW TRASH ENCLOSURE M „6Z,Lb,!OS REMOVE 01 P 22 AS REM (SHOWN DASHED 1CONC. 11 CDC. SEAT 1EI2 NC REM UCHT FI XTURE EXIST. NEW WRB W & WHEELCHAIR RATAP 1:12 ROPE NEW CURB TO MATCH EXIST. RY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.2 DEMO & REMOVE EXIST. TRASH ENCLOSURE S=e ine SITE PLAN s2 i" = 40'- 0 twov=d By D=22=d SM PAINT TO MATCH EIFS -2. - ua = JC a=bed Dee 3/31/97 ENTRY PAVILION SEE SHT A -5 1CONC. 21 REMOVE DIST. LIGHT FIXTURE NEW POLE MOUNTED DISABLED PKG. I SIC1! NEW CURB PT. SYMBOL FOR NEW ACCESS. STAB PT. 5' -0' W. A ACCESS. PATH ®ENTRY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.1 1/16° = DP. STRIP 2' -4' VIDE "7 Job .be< 24646.00 MEN XENERAL SITE PLAN NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR FG_LD VERIFY ALL EXIST. 51TE UTILITIES, UGHTING, LANDSCAPE IRREGA1101d & SITE DRAINAGE SYSTEM PRIOR TO START OF WORK. - COORDINATE w /OWNER REP. 2. PROVIDE POSITIVE SLOPES AWAY FROM BLDGS. 9 ALL AREAS OF NEW WORK. 3. SLOPE CONC. SIDEWALKS 9 10 AWAY FROM BLDGS., TYP. 4. PAINT ALL ELECT. BOXES & TRANSFORMERS TO MATCH EES -2 COLOR (VI F.) OMIT DEMOLISH AND REMOVE EXISTING COVERED WALKWAY STRUCTURE & LIGHT FIXT., CLOSE EXIST. ELECT. LINES AS REDD. - PATCH AND REPAIR PAVING TO MATCH EXISTING AREA OF WORK NEW TRASH ENCLOSURE - EXTEND EXIST CURB & PLANTING DEMO EXIST TRASH ENCLOSURE: (5 TYP.) REMOVE EXIST STRUCT. -PATCH & REPAIR EXIST PARKING PAVING. EXTEND OR EXIST LANDSCAPE ISLAND AS SHOWN TO MATCH EXISTING. LEGEND EXISTING JUNCTION BOX O FOUND MONUMENT -SEE SURVEY EXISTING EVERGREEN TREE EXISTING DECIDUOUS TREE EXISTING CONCRETE WALK Se0 Nnbe REMOVE EXIST. CONC. PANNG AS EQ'1. (SHO R DASHED) TRENCH DRAIN I CONC. SEAT 1COILC. 21 NEW CURB CUT & WHEELCHI� L RAMP 1:12 SLOPE NEW PLANTINGS JUV 7 J • Arl n !Ur Act RECEIVED CITY OF IUHWIN APR 0 3 1997 PERMIT CENTER NBBJ Ark REMOVE aC HUNG BANNERS ABOVE REPLACE DOORS REPLACE CARPET 0 2ND FIR. BALED ABOVE OEM DASHED) ) s ATRIUM 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (2061 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 1/8" = 1' -0" LONG 2i- TYP. STRIP Y -4 RIDE KONG 11 ICONc. 21 TRENCH DRAIN L ST. CONC. CENTERUNr 0 BOORS - CONC. SEAT 4 PAVILION: Building 7 mni 1111111111n 1 A BLDG. 7 EE LOBBY BID.. 2,4,10 NOTES SIM. 0 WOMEN MEN BI DG. 6 $EE L.Y GS BLD. 1,3,12 NOTES SIM. LOBBY 2 STORY ATRIUM LOBBY G. 8 SEE LOBBY BLDGS 1,3,12 NOTES SIM. BEN SOMEN BLDG. 5 SEE LOBBY MTS. ..10 NOTE$ 9M. 1/16" = 1' -0" REPLACE � DOORS NEW CC - L IN IMGw.M I � IPA 11 ■IF a .s 0 BLDG. 7 2' -6" ATRIUM FOR TYPICAL NOTES SEE REPLACE .: CARPET REPLACE DOORS REMOVE UST. TILE INSTALL NEW CREE BORDER 7 -4' MADE W /4IX4' DIAGONAL AREA 0 CORNERS USE FULL TILES, TYP. W/ RN. EDGE. 0 CARPET TRANSIT. 8QrL REPLACE CARPET AT ATRIUM GROUND FLOOR, BRIDGE ABOVE AND LOBBIES. NOTE: RELOCATE EXISTING FURNITURE PLANTERS AS REIN- FOR NEW WORK. REPLACE DO 1S (SAME LOCH TRY PAM SEE SHT. 5. ATRIUM 1 PAVILION: Building 5 1/8" = 1 -0" EXTG. TREE TO BE REMOVED ENTRY PANUON - SEE SJT. A -5. KONG. 11 KONG 21 TIP. S1 z' -4 WTDE BLDG. 6 PAVILION: Building 6 1 /8 " = 1 0 " CLNTERUNE 0 DOORS TRENCH DRAIN CONC. SEAT IcoNC. 2] Icptc. 11 EXIST. VAULT REMOVE EXIST. 7 2. PAVING BLDG. 5 / FOR TYPICAL NOTES SEE VIP .ST. FIRE DEPT. CONNECT. TRENCH DRAIN NEW PLANTINGS KONG 21 FOR TYPICAL NOTES RaIOVE EAST. GONG PAVING G AS dAll& AMIEWAREP Y M M Eight rimosaNE �� 149• NEW CARPET 0 2ND FLR. 1ST RR SHADED REMOVE DOOR k WALLO 1ST FLOOR EXIST. C.. TO REMAIN REMOVE SGNAGE ECST, SOFFIT ABOVE TRENCH DRAIN CONC. SEAT `GONG 21 NEW POLE MOUNTED ,.._c DISABLED PKG. 9GN REMOVE SLOPED ASPHALT PT. 5-0' WI. ACCESS PATH PT. SYMBOL FOR Ty NEW ACCESS. ST. yS . NEW PLANTINGS NEW CURB CUT Et NHEFLCHAIR RAMP 1:12 SLOPE NEW CU MATCH ST. LOBBY /ENTRY: Building V 1/8 ° = 1' -0" (2ND FLOOR SIM.) END NEW CP 02ND FLR REMOVE CLG HUNG BANNERS ABOVE REMOVE WALL COVERING 0 214D REMOVE SGNAGE EXIST. TILE REPLACE DOOR IN EXIST. ALUM. STN'. ERIONT AUGN EDGE OF NEW COLUMN TO .ST. FIN. FACE CONE SYA2 ' NEW PLANTINGS airk SAWCJT EXISTING CONC. S.AB TO ALLOW FOR NEW CONC. STRIPS LOBBY ppr ii °■iii =u ■ ■ ■ ■n■■■1� Tier ' lip■a iii ! _i. _■■■ iminurs va du Krim grentismikvioareAti EISSEBEITZEIRMEMBIll EXIST. CONC. 4 PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE - ISSUED FOR PERMIT TUKWILA, WASHINGTON BLDG. 1 ONLY 9 EXIST. CONC. FOR TYPICAL NOTES SEE A A -3 - 71 211D FL4: STAIN EXIST. MOOR. FRAME WINDOWS TO REMAIN KONG. REMOVE EXIST. CONC. PAVING ENTRY PANUON -SEE SHT. A -5 EXIS. LGHT TO REMAIPON E U CONC. 21- 1 STRIP 2' -4' WIDE FOR TYPICAL NOTES SEE REPIR AN PAMT DENTED WATER FOUNTAIN TRENCH DRAIN NEW PLANTINGS KONG. 21 ICDNC. 11 ENTRY NU - SEE PA SHT. A ON -5. 1022 21 SEAT 0 LOBBY /ENTRY: Building 11 1/8" = 1' -0" (2ND FLOOR SIM.) J LOBBY /ENTRY: Buildings 1, 3, 6, 8, 12 SIM. 1/8" = 1' -0" (2ND FLOOR SIM.) EXIS, REF TO REMAIN - ADD Ew VINYL N STRIP. EXIST. WATER FOUNTAIN - CONaAL WIRING MERE RECD. VI/SURFACE MINT. PLUG MOULD k RECEPT. CO., TIP. REMOVE EXIST. WALL COVERING - PREP.k PAINT BERG 2.4,70. REMOVE SILAGE, TYP. STAIRWELL PAINT Z . HANDR T AIL$ AND WOOD CAP. EDO REPLACE EAST. MT FIXTURE WAN - BLOC. 2, 4, 10. NOTE REMOVE ALL WALL MIRRORS IN LOBBIES AND HANGING BANNERS IN STAIRWELLS, TYP. WOMEN PAINT SCHEDULE: L0.1104 1ST FIR / 2ND FIR LOBBIES STAIRWELL 1ST 60 /2ND FLR VESTIBULE MEN AMEN CEILING WALLS cm cm cm GM GM AREA OF WORK nENRY 4 D ° SEE SHEET A -2 FOR NEW PAW. k PAYING LOCARWS o BLDGS 2,410 Sear TAM LOBBY PLANS NOTE: BLDG. 12 HAS ELEVATOR - '.NT DOOR k FRAME REMOVE MIRRORS. '3' -CE 2ND FL. CARPET - SCOPE 9M. TO BLOC. I, 3. EXTENT OF NEW CARPET ON 2ND FIR. BLDG 2,4,10 AND 1ST FR BLDG. 4 1RANSIRON OF NEW CARPET TO EXIST. FLOORING TO OCCUR AT CENTER UNE OF EXIST. DOORS, BLDG2. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF EXISTING DOORS IN FIELD. PREP. T k STAIN FlN, E%IS. DOOR AND FRAME PAINT EXTG. FRAME REPLACE RUBBER BASE, TYP. PREP A• STAIN DOOR. AND FRAME 10 REMAIN 0 BLDG. 4 WALK OFT MAT LOCATION - AUCN TO DOOR .8S. WA. OFF MAT TO BE' INTEGRATED WITH CARPET, SEE SPEC. - COORIDINATE W/ OWNER'S REP. 0004 ATOR DOORS k ELEV FRAME � REPLACE STOREFRONT WINDOWS OOHS. MATCN COST. DPo(. , � BRONZE COLOR - SFL SHT. 4-4 EXIST, PLYWD FIN WALL (REPLACE SIGNACE) REPLACE EXIST. EXPOSED AGGRAGATE CONE. NOTE' PROVIDE NEW CARPET MI AT SECOND FLOC LOBBY AS PER FIRST ROOR LAYOUT SHOWN HERE NOTE: .C.10- NO CARPET REGD. FOR FlPST FIR. STAIN DOOR AND FRAME ADJACENT TO ELEVATORS. NOTE PROVIDE 10" WIDE CARPET BOR. C112 AROUND PERIMETER OF 1ST k 2ND RR LOBBIES WHERE © OC CURS EXCEPT STAIRWAY LOBBY/ENTRY: Buildings 2, 4, 5, 7, 10 SIM. 1/8" = 1' -0" (2ND FLOOR SIM.) 5949 1/8 = L- APPrwad By lob .L6 24646.00 DeCOIad SM Nam JC tlerked SM DAN 3/31/97 NEG 6806 W.0 NOTE, I. CONTRACTOR FIELD VERIFY All DIMENSIONS AND ...ME CONDITIONS PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. NOR, OWNER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR CONn1CTS PRIOR TO START OF WORK. 2- GENERAL SCOPE U WORK FOR 1ST k 2ND FLOOR LOBBY REMODEL IS SAME FOR BLOCS 1 RRU 12 SFE PLAN 2 FOR T ",CAL NOTES 3 COORDINATE ALL ELF.CT/MEH. PLUMBING k Fl� PNOIECTION SYSTEMS AS REDO. W/ OWNER. 4. COORDINATE NEW DOORS k HARDWARE W /OWNER'S SECURITY SYSTEM REP. 5. RESTROOM FINISH SCHEDULE: NOTE: REMOVE EXISTING WALL COVERING AND PREPARE ALL NON -11LE WALLS FOR SEMI -.0SS PAINT. GAS WALL: TOILET PTN WALL GAN COUNG: 1= CEXINTFPTOPS: REPLACE EXIST. PLASTIC LAMINATE WITH: NEVAMAR, ARP SURFACE, ENGUSN LACE TEXTURED, 5- 2 -85T, 6. NEW CONC. INSTALL., MIR ALL TOOLED JOINTS k MED. BROOM FINISH -SEE 2011/4 -6. 7. REMO. EYAST. CONC. AREAS AS HOWN. PREVF3JT SPASWNC BY DOUBLE SAW CUTS OR REMOVING WHOLE SECTIONS 0 EXIST. WD. JOINTS - "rt SECS. Seel IJnim L.1/i 1;1 Ii1 JLI /1 3 r • A -3 cinPOF APR 0 3 1967 NBBJ 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (2061 223 -5555 Fax (2061 621 -2300 EXIST GWB GWB TO MATCH MULLION GLAZING O JAMB AT STOREFRONT = EXIST PLYWD SIDING TO REMAIN. 4 1/2" BLDG. PAPER E.LF.S. ON 1" FOAM 1/2" SEALANT & BACKER ROD 1/4" SEALANT & BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES ()STOREFRONT MULLION = GLAZING AS SCHED. PREFIN. ALUM MULLION GLAZING AS SCHED. PREFIN. ALUM MULUON PREFIN. DOOR FRAME *DOOR JAMB AT STOREFRONT r_ ALIGN MULLION w /EXIST GWB INT. FIN. OHEAD AT STOREFRONT 'S 3' -1 -D' ° e I • ° 13 SILL AT STOREFRONT 3" = 4 1/2" 4 1/2" GLAZING AS SCHED. TUKWILA, WASHINGTON BLDG. 1 ONLY EXIST BLKG. TO REMAIN. EXIST PLYWD SIDING TO REMAIN. 1/4" SEALANT & BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES PREFIN. ALUM MULLION - OUTSIDE GLAZED GLAZING AS SCHED. PREFIN. ALUM MUWON - OUTSIDE GLAZED PREFIN. ALUM PAN, WATER- TIGHT ON ALL SIDES, SET IN SEALANT ��- 1/4" SEALANT & BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES w /WEEPS 24" O.C. EXIST FDN JNT. PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE - ISSUED FOR PERMIT 4 1/2 " PREFIN. ALUM MULLION PREFIN. DOOR FRAME MULLION BEYOND 10 DOOR HEAD AT STOREFRONT ° ODOOR SILL 3 =1. -0' TRANSOM GLAZING AS SCHED. MULLION BEYOND PREFIN. DOOR FRAME ALUM THRESH w/ BEV EDGE ACCESSIBLE PER MFR -SET IN SEALANT EXIST FDN JNT. A.4 10' -4 1 /4' (BLDGS. 1 3 9 112L 9' -6 1/4" (BLDGS. 2, 4, 10) EQ. EQ. GL \ / \ / I GL \ OC NOTE: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS & CONDITIONS ALL CLEAR GLASS, TYP. -SEE SPECS. TYP. STOREFRONT ELEV. 3 /8" = 1' -0" STOREFRONT DETAILS scde AS NG,LD Appwad a kb Neter 24646.00 DmyedSM ao.aNJH Checked Date 3/31/97 \ A.4 DOOR Stoat N.kn AIM SYMBOL OF ACCESS MNT. TO EXTERIOR OF GL w/ ADHESIVE. A -4 R ECEIVD CITY OF TU APR 0 3 1990 PERWT CENTER C) NBBJ I O I ®LIGHT COLUMN PLO 1/2 111 South Jackson Street Seattle, Washington 98104 (206) 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621-2300 , 1' -11 1/21 S REINF. CONC. FOUNDATION -SE STRUCT. LIGHT COLUMN ELEVATION 1/2• = 1' -0• PRECAST CONC. AP -SEE DTL. 17 CAST -IN P T FIXT. E DTL 15 UGHXT. (SHOWN TOTTED) PRECAST CONC. CAP -SEE DTL 17 RECESSED ELECT. BOX & CONDUIT THRU CMU -SEE ELECT. SPECS. 1 1/2 = 1' -0' EMBED PL PER STRUCT. -GALV. FIN. PRECAST CONC. -PT FIN. REINF. CMU COLUMNS w /8x8x16 NOM. CORNER UNITS 2' -3" SKYLIGH{ PNL & FLASHING SLOPE TO DRAIN 1/8" PER FT. 12 EXIST. EXT WALL (V.I.F.) TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHT DIM. VARIES SEE PLANS 1' -6" 1 1' -6" I . SCUPPER = 1' -0' PRECAST CONC. CAP ii TYP. SCUPPER SECTION DTL. 12 OPEN —� C12 CHAN. - -SEE STRUCT. OPEN TRENCH DRAIN BEYOND -SEE D11_ TYP. ENTRY PAVILION: SIDE ELEV. SCUPPER: 12 GA. BENT MET GALV. & PAINT FIN. 9.5 PREEN ALUM FLASH SS SCREW w /NEOPRENE SEALANT TRANSLUCENT PANEL 1/4' BENT P WELDED CONNECT. 1 1/2" = 1' -0" SURFACE MNT. LIGHT FIXT -SEE ELECT. SPECS. L NOPY DETAIL @ BRIDGE 3" - 1' -0 ()PRECAST COLUMN CAP AXOMETRIC i L. LIGHT FIXT. 1 1/2" = 1' -0• SECTION T /STEEL ▪ 16 -4" TS 3 1/2" 55 -SEE STRUCT. . PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON BLDG. ADDRESS NUMBERS: (VARIES) 'GARAMOND BOLD ITALIC' FONT 3/8" CUT STEEL PL GRIND SMOOTH WELD CONNECT. -SEE STRUCT. - PREFIN. 'SILVER METALLIC' GALV MTL SCUPPER, PT -5 (OPP. HAND) - SEE DTL. 16 T /MASONRY + 8' -6" PRECAST CONC. CAP - SEE DTL. 17 CANOPY DETAIL @ LIGHT FIXT. SURFACE MNT. UPLIGHT FIXT. (DASHED) -SEE ELECT. REINF. CMU COLUMNS w /8x8x16 NOM. CORNER UNITS T /FIN FLR TRENCH DRAIN BEYOND (DASHED) REINF. CONC. FOUNDATION - SEE STRUCT. NOWT : ALL EXPOSED STEEL CONNECT. TO BE CDNTIN. WELD & GRIND SMOOTH -PAINT FIN. ( PT -5 ) BLDG. ADDRESS NUMBER PL L WELD TO C CHAN FOR NUMBER PL -SEE STRUCT. ELECT. BOX BEYOND THRU BOLT CONNECT. °ER LIGHT FIXT. MFR. SURFACE MNT. UPLIGHT FIXT. -SEE ELECT. SPECS. r. NOTE: ALL PREFIN 16 G FIXTURE HOUSING w/ 1 ED & REINF. CORNER 'REFlN. FASTERS TO M CH. SOUDIIET WAY ARCH TOP N. ROUND HEAD PER SIDE. w//16 PERFORATED O MET: S ON /16" STAGGERED CTRS. 8" 7x7x3/4" BASE PL L 1x1x1/8" PREFlN. BASE CONNECT. EMBED PL IN CONC. CAP ELECT. CONDUIT THRU COL TS FRAME BEYOND SST LINER SET IN SEALANT HIGH POINT OF GUTTER BEYOND TS 3 1/2" SQ. 3 1/2" = 1' -0' TER DETAIL @ BRIDGE TAPERED 5TL. T E.I.F.S. ON BLDG. PAPER BRACKETS BEYDND GUTTER DETAIL @ BRIDGE (SCUPPER DETAIL @ PAVILION Q. OPEN SIDEWALK O OPEN TO SKYLIGHT BEYOND �- - C12 CHAN. -SEE STRUCT. ELECT. CONDUIT THRU CMU (DASHED) -SEE ELECT. EL' VARIES ISSUED FOR PERMIT BLDG. 1 ONLY TYP. ENTRY PAVILION: FRONT ELEV. TRANSLUCENT PAN N. ALUM FLASHING SKYLIGHT MFR. SK YLIGHT L SUPPDRT R TS FRAME BEYOND SLEE CONE FROM GUT TER 70 N DO WNSPOUT DOWNSPOUT BEYOND I E.I.F.S. ON BLDG. PAPER EXIST PLYWD SIRING FLASH & UNTER FLASHIN EQ OPEN ANSLUCENT PANEL PREFlN. ALUM FLASHING BY SKYLIGHT MFR. 1/4' BENT PL GUTTER & SKYLIGHT SUPPORT SLEEVE CONNECT. FROM GUTTER TO DOWNSPOUT TS FRAME BEYOND CONNECT 50 ETST YON DRAIN SYSTEM (6.1.1.) SST LINER SET IN SEALANT -SLOPE TO DRAIN. TRANSLUCENT PANEL PREFlN. ALUM FLASHING 2" CDNTIN. 1/4' BEN CANOPY SUPPORT TS 3 1 I. BEYDND /2' SO � x: 12 GA. GALV. STL GUTTER ATTACH TO STL CHAN 6 1/2" Des. of Revs FACE OF EXIST BLDG. - VARIES (511) TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHT w/8 "x20" GRID, TYP. TS 3 1/2 S0. FRAME BELOW (SHOWN DASHED) C12 CHAN. (4 SIDES) -SEE STRUCT. 0 10.11111111111 • vJi' 1 1 1112 11 1E14111 vt 111 III -1" 1' TS 3 1/2" SQ. FRAME BELOW (SHOWN DASHED) MET GUTTER & SCUPPER -SEE BLDG. PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. TAPERED STL BRACKETS BELOW (SHOWN DASHED) SURFACE MNT. UPLIGHT FIXT. BELOW (2 TYP.) 3 1/2" r- - PRECAST CONC. CAP (4 TYP.) -SEE DTL 17 BLDG. ADDRESS NUMBERS BELOW 1 ' - 3" 1' -11 1/2" E.I.F.S. ON BLDG PAPER ON EXIST. PLYWD SIDING FLASH & COUNTER FLASH -SEE DTL. 12 SS SCREW w /NEOPRENE SEALANT TRANSLUCENT PANEL BENT PL w /BLOCKING -SEE DTL 16/S2 3/4' ROD & SEALANT E.I.F.S. ON BLDG. PAPER ON EXIST. PLYWD SIDING TS FRAME BEYOND ()CANOPY DETAIL @ BLDG WALL CONTIN. 1/4' BENT PL CANOPY SUPPER' TS 3 1/2' S0. BEYOND $eel lAN EXTERIOR DETAILS EQ. EQ. sole AS NOTES A{prned ey AN w,6e 24646.00 Dag,ad SM Dm.n NJH Chied Dete 3/31/97 1 EQ. EQ. 8' -11" ®TYP. ENTRY PAVILION ROOF PLAN 1/2' = 1'-0• CANOPY TOP DETAIL CANOPY EDGE DETAIL 3" = 1 s wibn TRANSLUCENT PANELS (WHERE OCCURS) - SEE BLDG. PLANS TRANSLUCENT PANEL ALUM. FLASHING SEALANT T /STEEL 1/8' CDNTIN. BENT PL WELDED TO TS FRAME TS 3 1/2' SQ. -SEE STRUCT. TS FRAME BEYOND TRANSLUCENT PANEL ALUM. FLASHING TS 3 1/2' SO. -SEE STRUCT. 1S FRAME BEYOND A -5 TRANSLUCENT PAdN POa jUHI•✓I OVER JUN 3197 ir�c on' TS FRAME MEMBER, TYP. 3 1/2' SQ. M PAVILION TS FRAME BEYOND ®TYP. CANOPY PANEL JNT. DETAIL 3 = 1' -0' RECEIVED clry aE ru,cwlu APR 0 3 1097 PERMIT CENTER NBBJ 3/4' = 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (206) 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 5' -0 CLR. TO BLDG. & EQUIP. 4 "0 EXTRA STRONG GALV STEEL PIPE w /CONC. FILL. PT. FIN. (YELLOW) T /PAVING OR LANDSCAPING --L INTERGRAL CONC. CURB ALL SIDES 15 "0, 2500 PSI CONC. FOOTING TYP. BOLLARD DETAIL 1' -6" 1' -6" 14 TYP. TRENCH DRAIN SEC. 3/4" = PAVILION COL BEYOND RIVER RUN STONES r 0 MAX. T /PAVING OR LANDSCAPING 2x8 TREATED WD CRUSHED STONE 6 "0 PERFORATED PVC PIPE - CONNECT. TO EXIST SITE DRAINAGE SYS. (V.I.F.) PAVING 1" RAD. MAX. TOOLED CONTROL JNT. - SEE PLANS BROOM FIN. CONC. PER PLAN 83 BARS 9 24" O.C. EA WAY - SET IN 2 FROM EDGE, TYP. EXIST SIDEWALK AS OCCURS I. . T�?. PROVIDE 2-0" SLIP DOWELS 8" ® JOINTS, TYP. 1x8 TREATED WD M JNTS. 4 6" 4" MIN. FREE DRAIN GRAVEL NOTE: PROVIDE ((ON2) RIENF. SECTS 11 ION SID EWALK SECTION - SEE PLANS. 3/4" = r -0" 1 3' -0" MIN. FLUSH TRANSITIONS TO ADJ. PAVING PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SLOPE TOP TO DRAIN SMOOTH ARISI. FIN CONC. ALL SIDES . 1 RAC. MAX. 83 BARS @ 24 O.C. EACH WAY T /SIDEWALK OR GRADE FREE DRAIN GRAVEL p,E8A]tg{ SECTION TYP. BENCH ELEVATION /SECTION 3/4' = G SLOP "TOP TO DRAIN M 1 4 PER FT. EA WAY SMOOTH ARCH. FIN. CONC. ALL SIXES T /GRADE OTYP. CURB SECTION 1-1/2.= r -Q" INTERGRA CONC. CURB & ',AD w/ REINF. STL -SEE D11_ 11 EXIST ASPHALT -PATCH AS REO. 15 "0 2500 PSI CONC. FOOTING. TR SH ENCLOSURE SECTION 1 -1/2" = 1' -0" ISSUED FOR PERMIT BLDG. 1 ONLY EXTRUDED CURB -MATCH -EXIST PROFILE (V.I.F.) EXIST AC PAVING TO REMAIN -PATCH AS REQ. REMOVE EXIST AC PAVING AS REQ. 22 GA GALV MTL FLASHING FASTEN w/ 1 1/2 GALV NAILS M 2" O.C. 2x4 TREATED WD FRAME w /2x4 STUDS @ 16" O.C. 5/8" T -111 PLYWD EA SIDE -PT TO MATCH EIFS -2 2 1/2 "0 STD GALV ST1 PIPE COL SET IN CONC. -BOLT WD FRAME TO PIPE, TYP. CONTIN. 22 GA GALV MTL FLASHING EA SIDE CONC. PAD -SEE DTL. 11 PLANTING AREA -SEE PLAN EXTRUDED CURB -SEE DTL. 7 1/2 FULL ox..00x4 of ke.:dau EXIST ASPHALT PLANTING TYP. TRASH ENCLOSURE: ELEVATIONS 1/4" = 1' -0" D! ........ 6' -0" 2-0"_ 18' -0" 3' 25'-0 ®TYP. TRASH ENCLOSURE: PLAN 1/4" = 1' -0" Sheet Tole EXTERIOR DETAILS SITE DETAILS NM AS NOTED A By Darted SM CLR T -111 SIDING, TYP. PT FIN. CURB CUTS 0 OPNGS. w/ 1:12 SLOPES �-- T -111 SIDING, TYP. PT FIN. Sheaf Nrt6w 3' -6" LEAVES w/ 1 1/2" PR HEAVY DUTY BUTTS 2x4 FRAME w 2x CROSS BRACING & D OPCANE BOLT. NSIDE ENCLOSURE,yTYP. COL w /CONC, FT1. PIPE (7 TYP. M CORNERS) SCREEN WALL ENLOSURE w /T1 -11 SIDING EA SIDE. NEW EXTRUDED CONC. CURB MITER CORNER CONNECT. (VIF) EXIST CONC. CURB TO REMAIN. op OF tUKWILA 4FPr:OVED JUN 3 1997 A -v BUILDING DIVISION GTY APR 0 3 1997 PERMIT CENTER NBBJ 111 South Jackson Street Seattle, Washington 98104 12061 223 -5555 Fax 1206) 621 -2300 EXIST MTL BOX EXIST. 'WINDOW MULLION BACKER ROD & SEALANT 1 -1/2" SQ. WD TRIM SET IN SEALANT -PT ALL SIDES TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS COLOR LINE OF EXIST WINDOW SILL BELOW 3 = 1'-0 WRAP EIFS ON / 1 -1/2" FOAM EIFS @ WINDOW JAMB 1/2" SNT & BACKER ALLOW 1" OPEN SPACE AT EA. END FOR DRAINAGE 22 GA. MET FLASHING (SHOWN M RIGHT) CONTIN. 1 -1/2" SQ. WD TRIM -PT ALL SIDES TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS COLOR EXIST MTL BOX 12 TYP. HEAD AT METAL BOX = 1' -0° 10" BLDG. PAPER OVERLAP L1 A . r EXIST. SIDING r I I if I I —7 I I FLASHING DTL. 22 GA. MET FLASHING BLDG. PAPER EIFS ON 1 i/2" FOAM, TYP. 1/2" SNT & BACKER 14 TYP. JAMB AT METAL BOX (SILL SIM.) = 1' -0 EXIST. SIDING EXIST. AM DOOR FRAME *METAL DOOR JAMB (HEAD SIM.) 3 = 1' -0" COLOR PRIME & SEALANT EIFS ON 1 1/2 FOAM w/45' TAPER TO JNT 0 FRAME & ALLOW FOR DOOR SWING, TYP. • EXIST. SIDING TO REMAIN. 30 LB. BLDG. PAPER EIFS ON 1 1/2" FOAM BLDG. PAPER OVER FLASHING EXIST SIDING 1/2 SEALANT & BACKER ROD, TYP. PARAPET FLASHING - SEE DTL 1 SADDLE FLASHING - WRAPS BEYOND ()SADDLE FLASH SECTION 3 = 1' -0" EIFS ON 1 1/2" FOAM BLDG. PAPER 1/2 SEALANT JNT ALL AROUND PIPE w/ BACKER ROD, TYP. TYP. EXIST PIPE PENETRATION EXIST. SIDING EIFS ON 1 1/2 FOAM, TYP. EIFS ON 1" FOAM 30 LB. BLDG. PAPER EXIST. SIDING TO REMAIN COND. AT TYP. PIPE PENETRATION 3 ° = ()CORNER RETURN - PLAN VIEW 3 = 1 -0" EIFS ON 1" FOAM BLDG. PAPER EXIST. SIDING COLOR PRIME BACKER ROD & SEALANT EXIST. WINDOW FRAME — 12 WINDOW JAMB i = 1' -0° ET PARAPET FLASHING - SEE DTL 1 SHOP FABRICATED SADDLE FLASHING (SHOWN DASHED) PARAPET FLASHING - SEE DTL 1 EXIST. WINDOWS TO REMAIN —� 3 = 1 -0" 3 = 1' -0 ()SADDLE FLASH AXOMETRIC = \\\\ ■• \_ \\ \_ \ \_ \ \NNW / 1 NOTE: CENTER REVEAL ON MID. WINDOW MULLIONS, OR ALIGN EDGE OF REVEAL WITH OUTSIDE EDGE OF END MULLION AT END OF WINDOW BAY. -SEE BLDG. ELEVATIONS. ()TYPICAL VERTICAL REVEAL = r -0" EIFS SYSTEM ON 1 -1/2" FOAM BUILDING PAPER EXIST. SIDING WINDOW SILL @ 2nd floor PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOU T HCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE - ISSUED FOR PERMIT TUKWILA, WASHINGTON BLDG. 1 ONLY EXISTING FLASHING - CUT TO MAINTAIN 1" TAB AS SHOWN. - WIRE BRUSH CLEAN, PREP & PT TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS COLOR. 22 GA MTL. FLASHING SET IN SEALANT -SEE DTL BELOW EXIST. WINDOWS TO REMAIN EXISTING FLASHING TO REMAIN AS SHOWN - WIRE BRUSH CLEAN, PREP & PT TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS COLOR. 22 GA MTL. FLASHING SET IN SEALANT -SEE DTL BELOW EIFS SYSTEM ON 1 -1/2" FOAM BUILDING PAPER ®WINDOW SILL @ 1ST FLOOR EIFS SYSTEM ON 1 -1/2 FOAM r1 1. FLASHING DTL. NOTE: COORDINATE PARAPET FLASHING w/ REROOFING WORK BY OTHERS. REMOVE EXIST. CAP FLASHING SYSTEM. (SHOWN DASHED) CONT. 20 GA. GALV. CLEAT OVER EXIST ROOFING. EXIST WALL & ROOF TO REMAIN. TYP. PARAPET SECTION 3° = 1' -0° EXIST WALL CONST. TO REMAIN. UNE OF SOFFIT BEYOND 3 = 1'-0 EXIST WALL CONST. TO REMAIN. 3 = 1' -0 EXIST WALL CONST. TO REMAIN. EXIST. FLASHJ21G TO REMAIN TYP. HORIZONTAL REVEAL SEC. iffeffiwzozAppyzor EX ST PLYWD SOFFIT (NOT LEVEL) -PT. TO MATCH ADJ. E.I.F.S. FIN. COLOR TYP. SOFFIT SECTION n TYP. SILL SECTION 3" = TREATED SOLID BLOCKING 24 GA GALV. MTL SNAP -ON -CAP FLASHING w /SLIP JNTS. ® 12' - O.C. -PT TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS. COIGN. 20 GA. GALV. CLEAT PLYWD FILLER AS REQ. E.I.F.S. ON 1 1/2" FOAM 30 LB. BUILDING PAPER EXISTING PLYWD. SIDING (5/8" THK) — EIFS MECH. FASTENERS ATTACH TO EXIST SIDING (TYPICAL) EIFS SYSTEM ON 1 -1/2" FOAM 30 LB. BUILDING PAPER EXISTING T -111 SIDING (5/8" THK) PLYWD FILLER AS REQ. REMOVE EXISTING CLEAT (SHOWN DASHED) SLOPE TO DRAIN ® 6:12 EIFS SYSTEM ON 1-1/2 FOAM 30 LB. BUILDING PAPER EXISTING PLYWD SIDING (5/8" THK) PLYWD FILLER AS REQ. PROVIDE STRAIGHT, LEVEL RN. EDGE -ALIGN TO LOWEST POINT OF SOFFIT. COLOR PRIME, ROD & SEALANT EIFS SYSTEM ON 1 -1/2" FOAM 30 LB. BUILDING PAPER LAP OVER TRACK EXISTING PLYWD SIDING (5/8" THK) 20 GA. GALV MTL w /WEEPS M 24 O.C. SET IN SEALANT !— REMOVE EXIST EARTH AS REQ. (NF) WIRE BRUSS CLEAN EXPOSED CONC. �— NEW GRADE LINE DETAILS Sole 1 - 1/2" = 1 -0 AnvFored ay D ®odSM Job Ne ber 24646.00 O. ,n JC ceded Dma 3/31/97 GENERAL E.I.F.S. N05 1. FINISH SURFACE 01" EXTERIOR INSUL & FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) SHALL HAVE LESS '.11AN 1/8 IN. UNDULATION PER 10 FT. FLAT BAR. 2.CONTRACTOR TO PREP EXIST T1 -11 SIDING AS REQ. FOR E.I.F.S. SUBSTRATE SPECS. REMOVE ANY DEFECTS & ADD SCREW ANCHORS TO PROVIDE FLAT SURFACE w/ 1/8" MAX. UNDULATION PER 10 FT. FLAT BAR. REPLACE DETERIORATED SIDING PANEL SECTIONS AS REQ. 3.CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXIST WINDOW CONDITIONS PRIOR TO START OF E.I.F.S. APPUCATON & CONFIRM INTEGRITY OF BLDG WATERTIGHTNESS. - NOTIFY OWNER OF ANY CONFLICTS. 4. DEMO + REMOVE EXIST TRIM & FLASHING AS SHOWN. Shot Weber A -7 RECEIVED ciry oP ruRwI6A APR 0 3 1997 PERMIT CENTER NBBJ O O O 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (206) 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 0 ®EAST ELEVATION 1/8° = 1 -0° ®WEST ELEVATION 1/8" = 1' -0" °EAST ELEVATION 1/8 = 1' -0 (3) (3) (WEST ELEVATION —, 1/8 = 1 -0" (3) 1 O (3) I3 (3) 0 -737i (3) 3 0 ®NORTH ELEVATION 1/8" = 1' -0" ®SOUTH ELEVATION 1/8" = 1' -0" ADD EIFS TO EXIST. BRIDGE STRUCT. (SHOWN DASHED) TYP O 2' REVEAL JOINT ALIGNED TO EIOST MUWONS OR TO EDGE OF SOFFIT (SHOWN AS DBL LINES) , L — J j J ALIGN EDGE OF REVEALS AT CORNER OF MUWGN JOINT (11P.) PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE a ISSUED FOR PERMIT TUKWILA, WASHINGTON BLDG. 1 ONLY ‘NORTH ELEVATION 1 / 8 = V-0" ©SOUTH ELEVATON 1/8 = 1' -0 ®TYP. ELEVATION AT REVEALS N.T.S (3) 3/6' °PARD N JOINT ALIGNED TO CENTERLINE OF EMT MUWONS OR TO EDGE OF SOFFIT (SHOWN DASHED) 0 O BUILDIN 2, By Desepl:n of ReNioe Slept Title EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS Skin application,_ color key BUILDINGS 1,3,12 Net Nuthet GENERAL ELEV. NOTES: '. INSTALL EXTERIOR INSUL & FINISH SYSTEM ( E.I.F.S.) OVER EXIST PLYWD SIDING THROUGHOUT. -BLDG. ELEVATIONS ILLUSTRATED HERE FOR GEN. SCOPE ONLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL FEILD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID. 2. SEE ELEV. 1/A -8 FOR TYP. NOTES SHALL APPLY THROUGHOUT. - SEE SHEET A -7 FOR TYP. E.I.F.S. DETAILS. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE W /FIELD CONDITIONS. 3. EXISTING DOORS & VWNDOWS TO REMAIN (0.N.0.) 4. REMOVE & REPLACE EXIST LANDSCAPING AS RED. - COORDINATE WITH OWNER REP. 5. PAINT SOFFIT @ 2ND FLOOR WINDOWS TO MATCH EIFS -1. PAINT SOFFIT @ 1ST FLOOR WINDOWS TO MATCH EIFS -2. 6. ON BLDG. 9 ONLY, PAINT EXIST PLYWD SUN SHADES TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS. 7. SUBMIT COLOR SAMPLES TO OWNER FOR APPROVAL. OWNER RETAINS RIGHT TO CHOOSE FINAL COLORS FROM MFR. FULL RANGE OF STANDARD & PREMIUM COLORS. 8. SUBMIT ALTERNATE 315 TO ADD HEAVY DUTY MESH ON WALL AREAS ADJACENT TO 1ST FLOOR BLDG ENTRANCES (2 PER BLDG.) -AREAS TO COVER FULL PANEL SECTIONS BTWN BLDG CORNERS FROM TOP OF SIDEWALKS UP TO SOFFIT OR REVEAL LINE FOR FULL 'MOTH WHERE SIDEWALK TOUCHES BLDG FACES. (V.I.F.) - COORDINATE WITH OWNER REP. COLOR KEY: O LIGHT: EIFS -1 O MEDIUM: EIFS -2 O DARK: EIFS -3 A -8 1 RpRnv)2D JUN 319,9;' t ,i' DIN oN Scde 1/8" = 1' -0" RECEIVED Approved By Job t.b., 24646.00 ary of ruNwlu DmyedSM Ixw.e decked Dote 3/31/97 APR 0 31997 PERMIT CENTER I i I I I I I I 0 0 3 e • f L _ _J es O O ,.. e (3) (3) 3 C�� NBBJ O O O 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (206) 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 0 ®EAST ELEVATION 1/8° = 1 -0° ®WEST ELEVATION 1/8" = 1' -0" °EAST ELEVATION 1/8 = 1' -0 (3) (3) (WEST ELEVATION —, 1/8 = 1 -0" (3) 1 O (3) I3 (3) 0 -737i (3) 3 0 ®NORTH ELEVATION 1/8" = 1' -0" ®SOUTH ELEVATION 1/8" = 1' -0" ADD EIFS TO EXIST. BRIDGE STRUCT. (SHOWN DASHED) TYP O 2' REVEAL JOINT ALIGNED TO EIOST MUWONS OR TO EDGE OF SOFFIT (SHOWN AS DBL LINES) , L — J j J ALIGN EDGE OF REVEALS AT CORNER OF MUWGN JOINT (11P.) PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE a ISSUED FOR PERMIT TUKWILA, WASHINGTON BLDG. 1 ONLY ‘NORTH ELEVATION 1 / 8 = V-0" ©SOUTH ELEVATON 1/8 = 1' -0 ®TYP. ELEVATION AT REVEALS N.T.S (3) 3/6' °PARD N JOINT ALIGNED TO CENTERLINE OF EMT MUWONS OR TO EDGE OF SOFFIT (SHOWN DASHED) 0 O BUILDIN 2, By Desepl:n of ReNioe Slept Title EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS Skin application,_ color key BUILDINGS 1,3,12 Net Nuthet GENERAL ELEV. NOTES: '. INSTALL EXTERIOR INSUL & FINISH SYSTEM ( E.I.F.S.) OVER EXIST PLYWD SIDING THROUGHOUT. -BLDG. ELEVATIONS ILLUSTRATED HERE FOR GEN. SCOPE ONLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL FEILD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID. 2. SEE ELEV. 1/A -8 FOR TYP. NOTES SHALL APPLY THROUGHOUT. - SEE SHEET A -7 FOR TYP. E.I.F.S. DETAILS. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE W /FIELD CONDITIONS. 3. EXISTING DOORS & VWNDOWS TO REMAIN (0.N.0.) 4. REMOVE & REPLACE EXIST LANDSCAPING AS RED. - COORDINATE WITH OWNER REP. 5. PAINT SOFFIT @ 2ND FLOOR WINDOWS TO MATCH EIFS -1. PAINT SOFFIT @ 1ST FLOOR WINDOWS TO MATCH EIFS -2. 6. ON BLDG. 9 ONLY, PAINT EXIST PLYWD SUN SHADES TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS. 7. SUBMIT COLOR SAMPLES TO OWNER FOR APPROVAL. OWNER RETAINS RIGHT TO CHOOSE FINAL COLORS FROM MFR. FULL RANGE OF STANDARD & PREMIUM COLORS. 8. SUBMIT ALTERNATE 315 TO ADD HEAVY DUTY MESH ON WALL AREAS ADJACENT TO 1ST FLOOR BLDG ENTRANCES (2 PER BLDG.) -AREAS TO COVER FULL PANEL SECTIONS BTWN BLDG CORNERS FROM TOP OF SIDEWALKS UP TO SOFFIT OR REVEAL LINE FOR FULL 'MOTH WHERE SIDEWALK TOUCHES BLDG FACES. (V.I.F.) - COORDINATE WITH OWNER REP. COLOR KEY: O LIGHT: EIFS -1 O MEDIUM: EIFS -2 O DARK: EIFS -3 A -8 1 RpRnv)2D JUN 319,9;' t ,i' DIN oN Scde 1/8" = 1' -0" RECEIVED Approved By Job t.b., 24646.00 ary of ruNwlu DmyedSM Ixw.e decked Dote 3/31/97 APR 0 31997 PERMIT CENTER L NBBJ 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (206) 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 General Structural Notes (THE FOLLOWING APPLY UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS.) CRITERIA: 1. ALL MAT�IALS, WORKMANSHIP, DE516N AND CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE (1994 EDITION). 2 DESIGN LOADIN6 CRITERIA ROOF LIVE LOAD 25 P5F FLOOR LIVE LOAD (OFFICES) 50 P5F STAIR AND CORRIDOR LIVE LOAD 100 P5F WIND 80 MPH, EXPOSURE "B" EARTHQUAKE ZONE 5 SEE PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL LOADING CRITERIA 3. STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRANIN65 FOR BIDDING AND CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS FOR COMPATIBILITY AND SHALL NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS, MEMBER SIZES, AND CONDITIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCING ANY WORK. ALL DIMENSIONS OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION SHOWN ON THE DRAWIN65 ARE INTENDED AS 6UI12ELINIES ONLY AND MUST BE VERIFIED. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY BRACING FOR THE STRICTURE AND STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS UNTIL ALL FINAL CONNELTIONS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PLANS. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND THE METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES OR PROCEDURES REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK. 1. CONTRACTOR - INITIATED CHANGES SHALL BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING TO THE ARCHITECT AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR CONSTRUCTION. CHANGES SHOWN ON SHOP DRAWINGS ONLY WILL NOT SATISFY THIS REAJIREMENT. 8. DRAWIN65 INDICATE 6ENIERAL AND TYPICAL DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION. WHERE CONDITIONS ARE NOT SPECIFICALLY INDICATED BUT ARE OF SIMILAR CHARACTER TO DETAILS SHOWN, SIMILAR DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE USED, SUBJECT TO REVIEW AND APPROVAL BY THE ARCHITECT AND THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. A. ALL STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS HHICH ARE TO BE COMPOSED OF COMPONENTS TO BE FIELD ERECTED SHALL BE SUPERVISED BY THE SUPPLIER DURING MANUFACTURING, DELIVERY, HANDLING', STORAGE AND ERECTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH INSTRUCTIONS PREPARED BY THE SUPPLIER. 10. SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCING STEEL (FOR BOTH CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION), AND STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ARCHITECT AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF THESE ITEM5. 11. SHOP DRAWING REVIEW: DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES ARE NOT REVIEWED BY THE EN6INUEEN OF RECORD, THEREFORE MUST BE VERIFIED BY THE CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW AND STAMP DRAWIN65 PRIOR TO 550155 BY EN&IAEER OF RECORD. SUBMITTALS SHALL INCLUDE A REPRODUCIBLE AND ONE COPY; REPRODUCIBLE HILL BE MARKED AND RETURNED. SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS PROCESSED BY THE ENGINEER ARE NOT (MANE ORDER. THE PURPOSE OF SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS BY THE CONTRACTOR 15 TO DEMONSTRATE TO THE EJ6INEER THAT THE CONTRACTOR UNDERSTANDS THE DESIGN CONCEPT BY INDICATING WHICH MATERIAL 15 INTENDED TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AND BY DETAILING THE INTENDED FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION METHODS. IF DEVIATIONS, DISCREPANCIES, OR CONFLICTS BETWEEN SHOP DRONING SUBMITTALS AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ARE DISCOVERED EITHER PRIOR TO OR AFTER SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS ARE PROCESSED BY THE ENGINEER, THE DE516N DRAWIN65 AND SPECIFICATIONS SHALL CONTROL AND SHALL BE FOLLOWED SHOP DRAW1NI65 OF DESIGN BUILD COMPONENTS INCLUDING ELEVATORS SHALL INCLUDE THE DE516NIN16 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER'S STAMP, STATE OF WA551550ON AND SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE (ONPONENT DESIGNER PRIOR TO CURSORY REVIEW BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR LOADS IMPOSED ON THE BASIC STRUCTURE. THE COMPONENT THE COMPONENT DE516NER I5 RESPONSIBLE FOR CODE CONFORMANCE AND AL NECESSARY CO515501ON5 NOT SPECIFICALLY CALLED OUT ON ARCHITECTURAL OR STRUCTURAL DRANIN55. SHOP DRA51555 SHALL INDICATE MAGNITUDE AND 915005iO! OF AL LOADS IMPOSED ON BASIC STRUCTURE. DE5I6N CALCULATION5 SHALL BE MADE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST. I2. INSPECTION CON55TE CONSTRUCTION, 5505555 CONCRETE ERECTION, MASONRY CONSTRUCTION, STRUCTURAL STEEL FABRICATION AND ERECTION ( INCLUDING FIELD WELDING AND H16H- STRENGTH FIELD BOLTING), EXPANSION BOLTS AND THRE4DED.EXPANSION INSERTS, EPDXY 6ROUTFD INSTALLATIONS, PLYWOOD 5HEAR•ALL NAILING, AND DIAPHRAGM NAIL! NO 3H ,J. BE 51'PER515ED IN ACC/R ANCE WITH SECTION 1101 OF THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE AND THE FR x'ECIFICATIONS BY A QUALIFIED TESTING AGENCY DE516NATED BY TtE ARCHITECT. THE ARCHITE,T AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEER SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH COPIES OF ALL INSPECTION REPORTS 410 TEST RESULTS. FOUNDATIONS: 13. FOUNDATION NOTE: ALLOWABLE SOIL PRESSURE AND LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE ARE ASSUMED AND 7105REFORE MUST BE VERIFIED BY A QUALIFIED 501L5 ENGINEER. IF 50IL5 ARE FOUND TO BE 011-ER THAN ASSUMED, NOTIFY THE: STRUCTURAL EN6INEER FOR POSSIBLE FOUNDATION REDE516N. FOOTINGS 51-ALL BEAR ON FIRM, UNDISTURBED EARTH AT LEAST 18" BELOW ADJACENT FINISHED 6RADE. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, FOOTINGS SHALL BE CENTERED BELOW COLUMNS OR WALLS ABOVE. BACKFI11 5EHIND ALL RETAINING WALLS WITH FRED' DRAIN1N6, GRANULAR FILL AND PROVIDE FOR SUBSURFACE DRAINA6E. ALLOWABLE SOIL PRESSURE 2,000 P5F LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE 35 PGF 14. DEMOLITION: CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING 006017IONS BEFORE 00501ENCIN6 ANY DEMOLITION. SHORING SHALL BE INSTALLED TO SUPPORT EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED AND IN A MANNER SUITABLE TO THE WORK SEQUENCES. EXISTING REINFORCING SHALL BE SAVED WHERE AND A5 NOTED ON THE PLANS. SAW CUTTING, IF AND WHERE USED, SHALL NOT GUT EX157155 REINFORCING THAT 15 TO BE SAVED. DEMOLITION D;5RI5 SHALL NOT BE ALLOYED TO DAMA6E OR OVERLOAD THE EXI5TIN6 STRUCTURE. LIMIT CONSTRUCTION LOADING (1NCLUDIN6 DEMOLITION DEBRIS) ON EXI5TIN6 FLOOR SYSTEMS TO 40 P5F. A. AL NEVI OPENIN65 THROUGH EXISTING MI5, SLABS AND BEAMS SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY SAW CJTTI56 WHEREVER POSSIBLE. 5 CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL EXI5TIN6 CONDITIONS AND LOCATION OF MEMBERS PRIOR TO CUTTIN6 ANY 05061565. C. SMALL ROUND OPENINGS SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY CORE DRILLING, IF 50SSIBLE. COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN A CONSULTING STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERING CORPORATION 217 PINE STREET - SUITE 520 P: 206/343 -0460 SEATTLE, WA 98101 F: 206/343 -5691 CONCRETE 15. CONCRETE SHALL BE MIXED, PROPORTIONED, CONVEYED AND PACED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LC SECTION 1905 AND ACI 301. CONCRETE SHALL ATTAIN A 28 -DAY 5TRN6TH OF f'c = 2,500 P5I AND MIX SHALL CONTAIN NOT LF55 THAN 5z 5ACK5 OF CEMENT PER CUBIC YARD AND SHALL BE PROPORTIONED TO PRODUCE A SLUMP OF 5° OR LEE. THE MINIMUM AMOUNTS OF CEMENT AND MAXIMUM AMOUNTS OF WATER MAY BE CHANGED IF A CONCRETE PERFORMANCE MIX 15 SUBMITTED TO TIME STRUCTURAL ENGINEER AND THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT FOP APPROVAL TWO WEEKS PRIOR TO PLACIN6 ANY CONCRETE. THE CONCRETE PERFORMANCE MIX SHALL INCLUDE THE AMOUNTS OF CEMENT, FINE AND COARSE A66RE5ATE, WATER AND ADMIXTURES A5 WELL A5 THE WATER CEMENT RATIO, SLUMP, CONCRETE YIELD AND SUBSTANTIATING 5TRB6TH DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 318 -89, CHAPTER 5. REVIEW OF MIX SUBMITTALS BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD INDICATES ONLY THAT INFORMATION PRESENTED CONFORMS GENERALLY WITH CONTRACT 000IJMENTS. CONTRACTOR OR SUPPLIER 561576IN5 PULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR SPECIFIED PERFORMANCE. AL CONCRETE WITH 5URFACE5 EXPOSED TO STANDING WATER SHALL BE AIR - ENTRAINED WITH AN AIR - CONTENT 00650 MNN6 TO 1554 U.B.G. TABLE 11 -A -1. CONCRETE MAY BE PLACED BY THE "SHOTCRETE METHOD, PROVIDED THE APPROVALS, TESTS, AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED BY THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT ARE OBTAINED. SHOTCIETE MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, 550550URE5, PROPORTIONS, BATCNIN6 AND MIXING AND PLACEMENT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 506R -90 AND 1994 UBC SECTION 1922. THE "SHOTCIETE' METHOD SHALL NOT BE USED WITHWT MAKI '% 5PECIAL ARRANGEMENTS THROUGH OWNER AND ENGINEER UNLE 55 STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ARE SPECIFICALLY DETAILED TO ACCOMMODATE 5HOTCRETIN6. 16. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE DETAILED (INCLUDING HOOKS AND ENE) IN ACCORDANCE 51TH ACI 315 -52 AND 318 -81. LAP AL REINFORCEMENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH '71-E REINFORCIN6 SPLICE AND DEVELOPMENT LENGTH SCHEDULE." PROVIDE CORNER BARS AT AL WALL AND F00TIN6 INTERSECTIONS. LAP ADJACENT MATS OF WELDED WIRE FABRIC A MINIMUM OF 8' AT 51DE5 MOD ENDS. NO BARS PARTIALLY EMBEDDED IN HARDENED CGNL0TE SHALL BE FIELD BENT UNLESS SPECIFICALLY 50 DETAILED OR APPROVED BY THE STRUCTURAL 566INEER. 11. CONCRETE PROTECTION (COVER) FOR REINFf55IN6 STEEL SHALL BE A5 FOLLOWS: FOOTIN65 AND OTHER UNIFORMED SURFACES OAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH 3" FORMED SURFACES EXPOSED TO EARTH (i.e. WALLS BELOW 6ROUND) OR WEATHER (96 5AR5 OR LARGER). . . ... ( BARS OR SMALLER). A" COLUMN TIES OR SPIRALS AND BEAM STIRRUPS SLABS AND WALLS (INTERIOR FACE) SEATER OF (BAR DIAMETER PLUS 5 ") or . . . .° 18. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: SEE ARCHITECTURAL 05551N65 FOR EXACT LOCATIONS AND DIMENSION5 OF DOOR AND WINDOW OPENINGS IN AL CONCRETE WALLS. SEE MECHANICAL DRAW{I666 FOR SIZE AND LOCATION OF M15GEJ.ivN OUS MECHANICAL OPEMI56 THROU6H CONCRETE WALL5. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWIN65 FOR ALL 6ROOJE5, NOTCFES, CHAMFERS, FEATURE STRIPS, COLOR, TEXTURE, AND OTHER FINISH DETAILS AT AL EXPOSE" CONCRETE SURFACES, BOTH CAST -IN -PLACE AND PRECAST. MASONRY: 19. CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT WALLS SMALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF GRADE N, TYPE I UNIT5, 00650 MNN6 TO ASTM C90, LAID IN A RUNNING BOND. MORTAR SHALL BE TYPE "5" PER TABLE 21 -A OF THE UBC. 61R0UT SHALL CONFORM TO UBC REQUIREMENTS AND ATTAIN A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 2,000 P5I AT 26 DAY5, DE5I6N F'm = 1500 F51. STRENGTH SHALL BE VERIFIED BY PRISM TESTIN6 IN ACCORDANCE WITH UDC SECTION 2105.3, OR MASONRY UNITS SHALL BF CHOSEN IN ACCORDANCE WITH 055 TABLE 21 -D. PULL 5TRE55E5 ARE REQUIRED. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING REINFORCEMENT: STEEL: 4' WALLS 6° HALLS 8' WALLS 10" WALLS 12" HALLS ANCHORAGE: 4 948 "oc. VERT .4 9 48"oc. VERT. 4 5 9 48'o4. VET. .5 9 "oc. VERT. 0 5 9 32 "oc. VERT. g° dia. WIRE JOINT REINFORCING AT 8'oc. HOR1Z. (2) 5 4 9 48 "oc. HORIZ. (2) .5 9 48 "oc. HORIZ. (2) .5 9 48 "oc. HORIZ. (2) *5 9 40 "oc. HORIZ. IN ADDITION, PROVIDE (I) x5 ( #4 9 6" AND 4° WALLS) VERT. AT EACH SIDE OF OPE11665, AT WALL CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS AND AT FREE ENDS OF WALLS AND (2) 5 5 1(2)54 9 6' WALLS AND 5 4 9 4' WALL5) HORIZ. AT E+ EYATED FLOOR AND ROOF LEVEL5, AT TOE OF WALLS AND ABOVE AND BELOW AL OPENIN65. ALL HORIZONTAL RINFORGEENT SHALL BE PLACED IN BOND BEAMS. EXTEND 551650500ENENT AROUND OPENINGS 2' -0" BEYOND FACE OF OFENIN6. IF 2' -0" 15 UNAVAILABLE EXTEND A5 FAR A5 POSSIBLE AND HO10K. PROVIDE CORER BARS TO LAP HORIZONTAL REIN 5ORCIN6 AT CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS. FILL AL CELLS CONTAININ6 REINFORCEMENT OR EMBEDDED ITEMS AND ALL GELS saw 6RADE WITH GROUT. PROVIDE CLEANOJT HOLE AT BOTTOM OF AL CELLS CONTAINING REINFORCEMENT. 20. EPDXY- 6RCUTED ITEMS (THREADED RODS OR REINFORCING BAR) SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWIN65 SHALL BE INSTALLED U5IN6 HEA RE5IN A5 MANUFACTURED BY HILTI CORP. INSTALL IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH 1.0.5.0. REPORT N0. 4016. SPECIAL INSPECTION OF INSTALLATION 15 REQUIRED. RODS SHALL BE ASTM A -501 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 21. DRIVE PINS AND OTHER POWDER - ACTUATED FASTENERS SHALL BE LOW VELOCITY TYPE (SERIES 1500, 0.14" DIAMETER UNLESS OTHERAISE NOTED) A5 MANUFACTURED BY RAM5ET /RED HEAD OR AN APPROVED EQUIVALENT IN STRENGTH AND EMBEDMENT. INSTALL IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH 1.0.5.0. REPORT N0. 1639. MINIMUM EMBEDMENT IN CON050 E SHALL BE 1" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. MAINTAIN AT LEAST 3" TO NFARST CONCRETE EDGE. 22. EXPANSION BOLTS INTO CONCRETE SHALL BE KWIK BOLT 1I AND THREADED EXPANSION INSERTS INTO CONCRETE SHALL BE SLEEVE ANCHORS A5 MANUFACTURED BY HILTI CORP. INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH 1.0.5.0. REPORT N0. 4621 INCLUDING MINIMUM EMBEDMENT 5OJIREM0475. SUBSTITUTES PROPOSED BY CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW WITH 1.0.5.0. REPORTS INDICATIN6 EQUIVALENT OR SEATER LOAD CAPACITIES. THESE PRADUCT5 ARE 60 RATED FOR USE IN MASONRY UNITS. SPECIAL INSPECTION 15 RQJIRED FOR AL EXPANSION BOLT AND INERT INSTALLATION. 23. STRUCTURAL STEEL INCLUDING PLATES AND RCLLED SHAPES, SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A56, Fy = 36 551. STEEL PIPE SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A -53, TYPE E OR 5, 6RADE B, Fy = 35 K51. STRUCTURAL TUBING SHALL CONFORM TO A5TM A500, 6RADE B, F5 = 46 K51. ANCHOR BOLTS AND CONNECTION BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A301. 24. ARCHITECT/RALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO SECTION 10 OF THE AI% CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL 0JILDIN66 AND BRID6E5, ADOPTED SEPTEMBER I, 1186. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 25. AL WELDIN6 SHALL BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH A.1.5.0. AND A.W.5. STANDARDS AND SHALL - DE PERFORMED BY W.A.5.0. CERTIFIED 1-550550 U5ING E10 XX ELECTRODES. ONLY PREQJALIFIED WELD5 (A5 DEFINED BY A.5.5.) SMALL BE USED. WELDIN6 OF 6RADE 60 REINFORCIN6 BARS (IF REQUIRED) SHALL BE PERFORMED 05166 LOW HYDROGEN ELECTRODES. WELDIN6 OF GRADE 40 REINFORCIN6 BAR5 (IF REQUIRE) SHALL BE PERFORMED U5IN6 E10XX ELECTRODE. WELDING WITHIN 4" OF COLD BENDS IN REINFORCIN6 STEEL 15 NOT PERMITTED. SEE REINFORCING NOTE FOR MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS OF WELDED BARS. WOOD: 26. FRAMIN6 LUMBER SHALL BE KILN DRIED OR MC -19, AND 6RADED AND MARKED IN CONFORMANCE WITH 5.0.0.5. STANDARD 6RADIN6 RULE FOR WEST COAST LUMBER N0. 11. FURNISH TO THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM STANDARDS: JOISTS: (2x MEMBERS) HEM -FIR N0. 2 MINIMUM BASIC DE516N STRESS, Fb = 850 Psi, Fv = 15 P51 (3x AND 4x MEMBERS) HEM -FIR N0. 1 MINIMUM BA510 DE516N STRESS, Fb = 950 P51, Fv = 15 P5I BEAMS AND MINERS. (INCLUDING 60( AND LARGER MEMBERS) MINIMUM BA51C DE516N FREE, Po = 1350 P51, Fv = 65 P51 P05T5: (4x MEMBERS) (6x 4 LAR6EN MENBER5) STUDS, PLATES, LEPERS 4 MISCELLANEOUS L1667 FRAM1N6: NOTE: WHERE NOTED ON THE PLANS, PLATES SHALL BE DOU6LA5 FIR N0. 5 OR STUD 6RADE. 21. ALL HOOD PLATES IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH CONCRETE OR MASONRY SHALL BE PRESSURE-TREATED WITH AN APPROVED PRESERVATIVE. PROVIDE 2 LAYERS OF ASPHALT IMPRr1NATED BUILD1N6 PAPER BETWEEN UNTREATED LED6( - .R5, BLOGKIN6, ETC., AND CONCRETE OR MASONRY. 28. TIMBER CONNECTORS CALLED OUT BY LETTERS AND NUMBERS SHALL BE "STRONG -TIE" BY 51MPSON COMPANY, A5 SPECIFIED IN THEIR CATAL00 N0. 0 -96. EQUIVALENT DEVICE BY OTHER MANUFACTURERS MAY BE SUBSTITUTED, PROVIDED THEY HAVE ICBO APPROVAL FOR EQUAL OR 6RATER LOAD CAPACITIES AND ARE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL. PROVIDE NUMBER AND SIZE OF FASTENERS A5 SPECIFIED BY MANUFACTURER. CONNECTORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE 517H THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. WHERE CONNECTOR STRAPS CONNECT TWO MEMBERS, PLACE ONE -HALF OF THE NAILS OR BOLTS IN EACH MEMBER. AL BOLTS IN HOOD MEMBERS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A301. PROVIDE HASHERS UNDER THE HEADS AND NUTS OF ALL BOLTS AND LA6 SCREWS BEARING ON WOOD. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL NAILS SHALL BE COMMON. AL SHIMS SHALL BE SEASONED AND DRIED AND THE SAME GRADE (MINIMUM) AS 5E5E25 CONNECTED. AI!, J0)575 AND MULTIPLE JOIST BEAMS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO FLUSH BEAMS WITH "U SERIES JOIST HAN6ER5. 21. WOOD FRAMIN6 NOTES: THE FOLLOWIN6 APPLY UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON THE PLANS: A. AL WOOD FRAMIN6 DETAILS NOT SHOWN OTHERW5E SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED TO THE MINIMUM STANDARDS OF THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE. MINIMUM WILING, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, SHALL CONFORM TO TABLE 23 -I -Q OF THE UNIFORM BUILDING LODE AS SHOW IN DETAIL _/5__. COORDINATE THE SIZE AND LOCATION OF AL OPENIN65 WITH MECHANICAL AND ARCHITECTURAL DRAWIN65. PROVIDE WASHERS UNDER THE HEADS AND NUTS OF AL BOLTS AND LA6 B0LT5 BEARIN6 ON WOOD. INSTALLATION OF LA6 BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO UBC SECTION 2331.1.2 4 INSTALLATION OF BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO UBC SECTION 2336.1.2. 5. WALL FRAMIN6: ALL STUD WALLS SHOWN AND NOT OTHER515E NOTED SHALL BE 2x4 STUDS 9 16'oc. AT INTERIOR WALLS AND 2x6 0 24 °ac AT EXTERIOR WALLS. TWIG 5TUD5 MINIMUM SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE END OF ALL OVALS, AT EACH SIDE OF ALL OPENINGS, AND AT THE ENDS OF ALL BEAMS AND HEADERS. TWO 2x8 HEADERS SHALL BE PROVIDED OVER AL OPENIN65 NOT OTHERWISE NOTED. SOLID BL00KIN6 FOR WOOD COLUMNS SHALL BE PROVIDED THROJSH FLOORS TO SUPPORTS BELOW. ALL STUD WALLS SHALL HAVE THEIR LOWER WOOD PLATES ATTACHED TO WOOD FRAMIN6 BELOW WITH 16d NAILS AT 12'oc 5TA66EED OR BOLTED TO CONCRETE WITH V" DIAMETER ANCHOR BOLTS (EMBED 1 ') 9 6' -0 "oc UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. INDIVIDUAL MEMBERS OF BUILT -UP STUD POSTS SHALL BE NAILED TO EACH OTHER WITH 16d 9 12 'oc 5 REFER TO THE PLANS AND SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE FOR REQUIRED 5HEATHIN6 AND NAILING. C. FLOOR AND ROOF FRAMING: PROVIDE DOUBLE J01515 UNDER AL PARALLEL PARTITIONS THAT EXTEND OVER MORE THAN HALF THE JOIE LEN6TH AND AROUND AL OPENIN65 IN FLOORS OR ROOFS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PROVIDE BRID61N6 9 0' -0 "oc AND SOLID 5LOCKIN6 AT AL BEARIN6 POINTS. TOENAIL JOISTS TO SUPPORTS WITH TWO 16d NAILS. ATTACH TIMBER JOISTS TO FLUSH HEADERS OR BEAMS WITH 51MP50N METAL JOIST HAN6ER5 IN ACCORDANCE WITH NOTES ABOVE. NAIL ALL MULTI -JOIST BEAMS TOGETHER WITH 16d 9 12'oc 57566EIED. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE PLANS, PLYWOOD ROOF AND FLOOR SHEATHING SHALL BE LAID UP WITH 6RAIN PERPENDICULAR TO SUPPORTS AND NAILED WITH 8d NAILS 9 6'oc TO FRAMED PANEL ED6E5 AND OVER STUD WALLS A5 SHOWN ON PANS AND 9 12 "oc (10'oc AT FLOORS) TO INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. PROVIDE APPROVED PLYWOOD ED6E CLIPS CENTERED BETWEEN JOISTS /TRUSSES AT UNBLOCKED ROOF 5HEATHI66 ED6E5. AL FLOOR SHEATHIN6 ED6E5 SHALL HAVE APPROVED TONGUE -AND - 6500VE JOINTS OR SHALL BE SUPPORTED WITH SOLID BL00KIN6. ALLOW 'N" SPACIN6 AT ALL PANE- ED6E5 AND ENDS OF FLOOR AND ROOF SHEATHINS. TOENAIL BLOCKING TO SUPPORTS WITH 16d 0 12'oc UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. AT BLOCKED FLOOR AID ROOF DIAPHR56M5 PROVIDE FLAT 2x BL00KIN6 AT AL UNFRAMED PANEL ED6E5 AND NAIL WITH ®6E NIAILIN6 SPECIFIED. D. NAILIN6: AL NAILS SPECIFIED ON DRAWIN66 WERE DE516NED TO BE COMMON. PNEUMATICALLY DRIVEN NAILS OF THE SAME LENGTH MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR COMMON NAILS PROVIDED THEIR NUMBER 15 INCREASED (5PACIN6 15 DEGREASED) IN PROPORTION TO THEIR DIAMETER ACCORDING TO THE FOLOWIN6 FORMULA: 5' = 5 x (01/02) NAILS COMMON DIAMETER 5' = NEW REQUIRED 5PACIN6 5 = DE5I6N 5PACIN6 SHOWN ON THE DRAWIN65 DI = DIAMETER OF SUBSTITUTED NAIL D2 = DIAMETER OF COMMON NAIL SHOWN IN TABLE AT 1216HT 5405 m off Rev,4as ) DPMES vzziss DOU6LAS FIR N0. 1 HEM -FIR N0. 1 MINIMUM BASIC DE516N 5TRE55, Fc = 1300 P5I, E = 1500 K5I 0046LAS FIR N0. I MINIMUM BASIC DE516N STRESS, Fc = 1000 P5I, E = 1600 K5I HEM -F1R N0. 3 OR STUD GRADE MINIMUM BASIC DE5I6N 5TRE55, Fb = 500 P51, E = 1200 K5I Fc = 125 551 FIN'G'ER JOINTED STUDS MAY BE SUBSTITUTED ONLY IF THEY MEET PRESCRIBED 51 E55 CRITERIA. 8d I0d 12d 16d 0.131" 0.148" 0.148" 0.162" *roved By )RL kb w,. 97 -25 -02 Lii JUN 3 1997 s -c 01✓I -r.,ra S1 1 2 18 30 EAD ao 5M0 05554 ore 3/21/97 ISSUED FOR BIDS - FOR CONSTRUCTION CITyROF TUlryyl� APB 0 .i 1997 PERMIT CENTER MEM T INSINK tP> i4 L , (// tdP/ %l, TYF III t GI2, / BASEQ' -'' i V t TS to, BASED typ. T5 to GI2 " IV52 WHERE GCCURS NBBJ 111 South Jackson Street Seattle, Washington 98104 (206) 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 PLAN VIEW 0 CORNER 13 18" CONT. BENT FL — SEE ARCH. XL, EMBED fL' V"xi2 "xl' -O" -- - - W/ (2) 16 "0 x 5" WELDED S^105 0 4 "ac (TYP. 0 EA. PAVILLION PIER) COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN A CONSULTING STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERING CORPORATION 217 PINE STREET - SUITE 520 P: 206/343 -0460 SEATTLE, WA 98101 F: 206/343 -5691 t a i v typ die j %"x3 SPLICE. LOCATIONS BY CONTRACTOR b' -9 'd (CONTRACTOR VERIFY) NEC T5 3hx06x ABOVE 8 BELOW TS COLS. PER PLAN 1 3 NEW TS 3 (0 COL. LINES ONLY) NEW TS 3 (0 COL. LINES ONLY) 20/52 T -2T' *- (CONTRACTOR VERIFY) 14 15 20/52' Wx3Yx3h "= r ACH END /�- NEC T5 316x316)4 ABOVE 8 BELOW 05 3 6x116x [GAL NEC T5 3 TYP, SEE ARCH'L. ELEVATIONS new exist. EXIST. T5 COLS. PER PLAN \ T5 3 TYPICAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON d 4x3hxTe x O'-9" O' -9" LLV MIDWAY BTWN TS 316 W/ (2) 1 x THOU-BOLTS 06 "oc IN1 1 6" SLOTTED HOLES 4x BLOCKING — 6 CONN. PER 5/52 EXIST. STUD FRAMING 0 16 "oc — SLOPED 05 BEYOND typ> die l typr TS 3 WHERE OCCURS CONDITION BTWN. T5 315' ) F.IRES 1/n/9e 4 28 EXIST. STUD WALL FRAMING 0 24 "ac 4x4 BLOCKING NU — (2) A34 8 (4) Ibd FACE NAIL, EA. END d 4x316x4A x 0 -0 LLV N (2) 16 "0 THRU BOLTS 0 6 "oc Fx TS VG" WHERE OCCURS 1 's" CONT. BENT R SEE ARGH'L. FOR CALLOUTS 0 COMMON SEE 20/52 DOWELS TO — PATCH VERT. REINF. T€T 3'-0 �V4 ‹,0P 316x PER PLAN NOTE: THIS CONNECTION OCCURS AT SKEWED WALL it WALL GOR.NERS. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXIST. WALL FRAMING CONDITIONS —T5 3 PER PLAN EXIST. h" PLYWOOD SHEATHING. REMOVE AND REPLACE AS REQUIRED FOR CONN. —WT 4029 (GUT WEB PER ARCH) TYP. OF e (5). SEE ARCH. FOR LOCATION. 9/52 -8 — G0810. BENT R SEE ARGH'L. —GI2 PER PLAN PLAN VIEW 10/52 — (3) 9 4 EA. WAY TYP. ENTRY PAVILLION COLUMN 29 • typ. R to TS /-- - 4,64 BLOCKING PER 5/52 EDGE OF SOFFIT- - ABOVE a —T I0 ":1° 17 ' -0.18 EXIST BLDG, -- 1012x20.1 TYP (4) SIDES %- 5 5 16 r11 4 2x2x x 0'-3" Z DesoipRm of Radvvv Sheet Title BRIDGE FRAMING PLAN & DETAILS PAVILLION PLANS & DETAILS sods 3/4" = 0 -0" U.N.0 ?waved By TRL Dadged EAD Sown SMD EXIST. 2x4 SOFFIT FRAMING 0 24 "oc \ ® U'e "x316 "x0' - 9" _ 05 316 BEYOND 24"oc IN/ (2) /5 "0 .... THRU BOLTS 0 6"oc 151 SLOTTED HOLES, TYP. 6/52 - EXISTING 4 BUILDING (3) LOCATIONS - 5EE ARCH, "' 12 1 -0' TYPICAL BRIDGE PLAN 12 0/52 0(150. 16" PLYWOOD SHEATHING. REMOVE AND REPLACE AS REQUIRED FOR CONN. —TS 3 BEYOND SHAPED PLATE PER ARCH. 9' -55 — <3 sides Seel Krrber - --- CHANNEL PER PLAN a�esaanr , „ 411104.11 :u aR w7 rxa 9a Pat sr 26/56 ) 26/56 ENTRY PAVILION - FRAMING PLAN 24 T5 31/2x5 -- BENT It TS 315x314 TYPICAL (4) CORNERS 1 28/52 I Dote 3/21/97 ISSUED FOR BIDS - 6 (II) LOCATIONS - SEE ARCH. 'l' = 1-O' ENTRY PAVILION - FOUNDATION PLA 30 RECEIVED CITV OF TUKWIIA S APR 0 3 1997 PERMIT CENTER FOR CONSTRUCTION .c..:, a..., Veen C�1 NBBJ S PARLI N G 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 1206) 223 -5555 Fax (2061 621 -2300 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING. LIGNTN9 DESIGN TECHNOLOGY CONSULTING • 720 OLIVE WAY • SUITE 1 100 SEATTLE. W A 98101 -1863 FAX 206- 667 -0664 PHONE 206- 667 -0655 vI119>�.. TUKWILA, WASHINGT N SO THCENTER CORPORATE SS UARE G a -120V CONTROL POWER —.- NO SCALE a10 if Hand H-O-A EXTERIOR LINKING POWER 1 • LC •-I w Ib • D IEB8114IC. 1, LIGHTS ARE OFF DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS AS SENSED BY PHO 2. LIGHTS ARE ON DURING DARKNESS HOURS AS SENSED BY PHO 3. LIGHTS- ARE.MANUAL CONTROLLED BY H -O-A SNITCH. EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM - TYPICAL L -NEMA 3R DCIERIOd WIRING 1 CONTROL CABINET co IN PANEL MOP. TO EXTERIOR POLE FIXTURES (SEE SITE � ) CYMH/1I S UST o UGHTING FIXTURES SWITCH 0 +48' AFF x DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 0 18' AFF • EQUIPMENT CONNECTION • FUSED SWITCH, HEAVY DUTY ✓ TELEPHONE OUTLET a SMOKE DETECTOR ® HEAT DETECTOR RACEWAY CONCEALED IN CONSTRUCTION RACEWAY CONCEALED UNDERGROUND TYPE OA TYPE B TYPE E DeIS,eaSPD Ceaed F Ae: NOTES PROVIDE CANOPY FRAME LIGHT FIXTURES TYPE OA EUJPTIPAR, . 175W MH. PROVIDE 1 /2 21110 & /12C TO. 277 PANEL LA. PROVIDE 20A CB IN LA AND WIRE VIA UGHTING CONTROL PROVIDE POWER TO ADDRESS COLUMN UUHT FIXTURE. TYPE B. ® PROVIDE 1/2' 2/70 & 1120 ID 120V PANEL PA. PROVIDE 20A C8 IN PA AND WIRE VIA UGHTING CONTROL SEE ARCHITECTURAL DETAIL ▪ REPLACE EXISTFG RECESS'"... DOU UUGHYNG IN WALKWAY /SOFFIT PATH NEW UGHTING FIXTURE TYPE E MATCH EXISTING VOLTAGE REMOVE EXISTING SITE UGHTING POLE AND CONCRETE BASE PROVIDE PULLBOX AND SPLICE CONC_ :TORS TO MAINTAIN CIRCUIT CONTINUITY. © REMOVE EXISTING UGHTING IN WALKWAY. ® REWIRE ONE 3 POLE CIRCUIT TO !ADP FROM PANEL LA. PROVIDE NEW GENERAL NOTES 1. PROVIDE ALL ELECTRICAL WORK AND ELECTRICAL DESIGN FOR A COMPLETE AND FULLY OPERATIONAL INSTALLATION. 2. CONCEAL ALL RACEWAY IN CONSTRUCTION. 3. CONFORM TO ELECTRICAL CODE, STATE OF WASHINGTON AND CITY OF TUKVALA. 4. OBTAIN ELECTRICAL PERMIT(S) AND INSPECTION(S). 5. PROVIDE AS -BUILT ONE UNE DIAGRAM, AND AS -BUILT ELECTRICAL LOAD CALCULATIONS AND ENERGY CODE CALCULATIONS FOR EACH BUILDING AS REQUIRED BY PERMIT AND INSPECTOR. 6. PROVIDE OUTDOOR UGHTING CONTROL EACH BUILDING CONSISTING OF ONE PHOTOCELL, ONE TIME CLOCK. CONTROL RELAY AND CONTACTOR PROVIDE WIRING OF FIXTURES SO LIGHTS ARE OFF DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS AND ON /OFF AS 'SET BY TIME CLOCK. 7. OBTAIN FIRE ALARM PERMIT FOR ELEVATOR WORK. PROVIDE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS AS REQUIRED BY FIRE MARSHAL 1 I IT1NG FIXT IRF SCHFDI II F MANUFACTURER: ELUTPAR LARGE HID, M- 454 - 0175- S -06 -•- VISOR -OV LAMP: 175W MH SZE: 18 - 1/4' LONG X 14 -7/B' WIDE X 7 HIGH COLOR: DARK BRONZE FEATURES: SURFACE MOUNTED, INTEGRAL BALLAST, CUTOFF VISOR MOUNTED CUSTOM ON BOTTOM OF FIXTURE HEAD, WET LABEL TAMPER RESISTANT FASTENERS • - CONFIRM MANUFACTURER ABOUTE PET- P- 32 -PL- 120- WHT -VA. LAMP: 32W PL FLUORESCENT SIZE: 11 -3/8' HIGH X 5-3/8' MADE FEATURES: NET LABEL CAST GUARD, FURNISH WITH .REMOTE BALLAST AND WET LABEL RECESSED BOX FOR THE REMOTE BALLAST MANUFACTURER: INDY 706R -81 -SA LAMP: TWO (2)18W QUAD TUBE FLUORESCENT SZE: 6' DIAMETER X 5 -3/8' DEEP FEATURES: CLEAR ALZAK REFLECTOR, DAMP LABEL xUA ax, By (Desvplion A R..A Sheet ink Sex NAG MI. 3 -31 -97 APNF7 1 j� %(WI(A \ •, ri� JUN 31999 C , ES RECEIVED ciry of Turclviu APR 0 3 1997 PERMIT CENTER 0 0 0 S88 ° 05'42 "E 30.00' CB 2 TYPE 15 CB ,36 TYP 1 SO1 47'29" TYP 11 -54, FROP3P EX. TYPE :111 MH RIM = 22:32 1E = 16.08(121,15 BUILDING 4 2 STORY F.F. =23.50 10,803 S.F. IX" WATER METER CB 523.90 BUILDING I 2 STORY F.F. =22.50 10,708 S.F. BUILDING 12 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,845S.F. 451 .E I -?" SD w1 CB #45 TYPE ,5I GE 20178 + IE =18- 35- 12 ",10" BUILDING 2 2 STORY F.F. =22.50 10,921 S.F. BUILDING 3 2 STORY F.F. =23.50 10,709 S.F. BUILDING 10 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,807 S.F. IX" WATER METER 501 10" 50 2" WATER SERVI05.. , .r 1X ",;..WATER METER CB 127 rER TYPE 1 - I4 CB X38 METER TYPE 11 - 54" FROP EX. TY 16 GE =27.`39 IE =T720 -15" lE =77.20 =12" ATER SERV I C OUBLE CHECK DETECTOR IN : XiST'.WATC=R VAULT 2- IX' WATER METERS 2 -2" WATER SERVICE d d CB TYPE I V 54 36" _ SIGN o ct I N ° Q. � � rilk o G B ;24 {/� 0 P_E 11 -54 , P FR�j1 EX TYPE I6 t i - GE -722.44 a LE_=16.74 -8 "S ^O 1 1 1E ,16.16 15E r CB TYPE 11.- EX. TYPE 15 CE =22.28 . IE 71751 -8"N CB 32 I2 SD - - CB #31 - 1 --- - 'TYPE' f 1 X54 FROP EX TYPE 16 ' oO - - - - -- DEPTH :4.33 ANDOVER PARK WEST SO1'47'29"W • CB #30; TYP 1 - 4" EX. TYPE 15 GE= 22.20 (E= 18.59$" C8 TYPE i 15 I i BUILDING 5 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,791 S.F. BUILDING 8 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,865 S.F. 30A 7Y,El5 CB 83 1322.34' 36" SD 377.00' 522.00' io of ✓oii _5- 254TEE1$ERV10E5 BUILDING 6 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,854 S.F. BUILDING 7 2 STORY F.F.= 24.00 10,833 S.F. BUILDING 9 2 STORY F.F. =00 CB 14 10, 8 19 24. S.F. TYPE 15 CB #9A ' TYPE 15 , GE =22.33 IE= 19.67 -8" 632.02' CB ; IO I M 48 CB 9 . TYPE 111 -MM CB ;II TYPE 11 WATER METE CB #20 TYPE 1 36" SD CB 12 • TYPE I CB ; 19A TYPE 1 276.44' CB #I8 EXISTING FROP TEE TYPE II 1E= 1,7.04 C 22 TYPE I BUILDING 11 \ 2 STORY F.F. =24.50 17,062 S.F. APPROVED: CITY OF TUKWILA 69.00' 1 45.00' 44.81' AFFIL SIGNALS FOUND LEAD PLUG AND TACK, 1.04' WEST OF TRUE CORNER F 0,'JND 1/2" 190N ROD WITH YELLOW PLASTIC CAP "156'. 0.62' EAST OF TRUE CORNER ELECTRIC CONDUIT \SIDEWALI< FOUND 0 IRON PIPE WI YELLOW PLASTIC CAP, 0.09' NORTH OF TRUE CORNER FOUND 1/2" IRON ROD WITH YELLOW PLASTIC CAP "S&A ", 0.11' EAST OF TRUE CORNER POINT OF BEGINNING . 09 2 These plans have been reviewed by the Public Works Department for conformance with current City standards. Acceptance Is subject to errors and omirrrnns which do not authorize violations of adopted standards or ordinances. The responsibility for the adequacy of the deign rests totally with the designer. Additions, deletions or revisions to these drawings after this date will void this acceptance and will require a resubmittal of revised drawings for subsequent approval. Final acceptance is subject to field inspection by the F,.,bllc Works utilitie 'nspector. Date:,/,C /L5/7 B y : co/ X 9 7 -O IO - 7 F Loo,° /66c - CHAINLINK FENCE LINE ADDRESSES BUILDING #1 BUILDING # BUILDING #3 BUILDING #4 BUILDING �5 BUILDING #6 BUILDING #7 BUILDING #8 BUILDING #9 BUILDING #10 BUILDING #I1 BUILDING #I2 GENERAL NOTES 3. PARKING SPACE COUNT: STANDARD COMPACT 764 483 4. VERTICAL DATUM: NGVD 1929 5. PARCEL CD.NTA INS 17.45 ACRES CB E33 T PE 15 HANDICAP 21 NO14 r29"E 545 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 565 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 575 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 555 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 625 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 645 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 655 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 635 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 665 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 360 CORPORATE DRIVE NORTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 375 CORPORATE DRIVE SOUTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 370 CORPORATE DRIVE NORTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 1. SUBJECT PARCEL 1S ZONE X - OUTSIDE 500 YEAR FLOOD PLAIN PER FIRM MAP 53033CO328D 2. BULDINC SETBACKS PER CITY OF TUKWILA: FRONT = 15', SECOND FRONT = l5', SIDE = 10', REAR = :0' 6. All construction and materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be in accordance with the City of Tukwila Standards and Specifications the 1996 Standard Specifications and Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, english version as prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the American Public Works Association. The Standard Plans (current edition) and the 1996 Standard Specifications shall be maintained on site during this contract. Section 1 -01.3 Definitions, the term "State" and "Contracting Agency" shall be amended to read "Owner ". FOUND 1/2" IRON ROD WITH YELLOW PLASTIC CAP "S,1 ", 0.17' EAST OF PROPERTY LINE T' 7 SCALE 50 0 25 50 100 ( FEET ) 1 Inch = 50 ft. CONTACT LOWE ENTERPRISES NORTHWEST, INC. ONE UNION SQUARE 600 UNIVERSITY ST. SUITE 2820 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98101 RON M. GREENE TUKWILA OFFICE (206) 575 -2120 FAX: (206) 575 -1198 e -mail ronmgreenelvol.com G 200 1290.30' VICINITY MAP N.T.S. • FIRE HYDRANT " AUTO FIRE CONNECTION II WATER VALVE ❑ WA TER METER O POST INDICATOR o- WATER BLOWOFF - -W-- WATER PAINT MARK UTILITY POLE W/LIGHT 6 - GUY ANCHOR UTILITY POLE 5 P 07 7 1ER METER © POWER VAULT O POWER TRANSFORMER OO TELEPHONE VAUL ❑ TELEPHONE RISER OT TELEPHONE MANHOLE RECEIVED clTV of ruKwILA MAY 2 01997 PERMIT CENTER LEGEND - T - TELEPHONE PAINT MARK ® G AS METER 1 GAS VEN -G- GAS PAINT MARK ❑ CATCH BASIN ® STORM MANHOLE - - - SD- - STORM ONE O SEWER MANHOLE JUNCTION BOX • FOUND BRASS CAP MON. IN MONUMENT BOX FOUND MONUMENT AS NOTED EVERGREEN TRE$ DECIDUOUS TREE CONCRETE WALK S01 ° 47'29 "W 30.00' 0 8 PRINTED MAY 1 9 1997 W & H PACIFIC Lil Q LAJ 0 1- Q Q J 0 O> U c J_ LAJ LAJ U 0 N 0 0 d m G Y O V 0 w a = a c; a O 5 SHEET 1/1 C Wr 19 1997 13.32 07 7 M Ln Dimensions and Weights NET SIZE A B "C 0 E WT. Lbs.)" 41 7/8 25 518 461/4 28 34 314 22 1/2 231/4 31 1/8 to 1/4 13 2 12' 40 3/4 25 1/2 16 3/e i0 1/4 13 3/8 1 218.0 t01 /4 133reI 228.0 • 14 I 327.0 6 15 1 509.0 t8'65 41 3/4 37 314 15 5/6 15 L41 789.0 ✓✓M 058,Y Gale Valves (Fur Open). Note: Dimensions are nomnar Allowances must be mace '0, normal manufacturing tolerances. c 4• mem EBC0® Backflow Prevention r ' :5 856 5/96 856.PM6 w.�nwu Materials of Construction 3/4" 3ypass for Model 856 a" lorscaenc" . 7AB Industries, Inc. • Coro Fluid Control Group • P.O. Box 8070 • Fresno. CA 93747 • Fax: (209) 453 -9030 = �.mi�•ar SPECIFICATION SHEET Characteristics Physical Properties Size of Mainline Max. Working Pressure Hydrostatic Test Press. Temperature Range Materials Main Valve Body Application Non Health Hazard Fire Sprinkler Systems Model 856 Flow Curves 15 End Connections Coating Shut OH Valves Trim Eleslomer Discs Spring SEC 26, T WP 23N, ROE 4E, W. M 175 PSI 350 PSI 32° F to 140 F (0 C to 6D° C) Flanged ANSI 016 • Class 125 Ductile iron ASTM 4536 Grade 55 -35 -12 Fusion epoxy coaled internal and external AWWA C550-90 OS As " resilient wedge AWWA C509 gate valves Bronze ASTM 5554 Alloy C83600 EPDM Stainless steel 2 4 " and 3" 120 600 ® moo 1 500 1000 1500 2060 250 GPM 320 400 GPM 4•' and 6" 2000 FPM FRAME & LADDER OR STEPS OFFSET. SEE NOTE 5. FRAME & COVER ELEVATION PER RECORD DRAWINGS COUPLING TO EX. PIPE N EX. OUTLET C.M.PIPE SEE NOTES I.E. SAME AS EXISTING PIPE SUPPORT(S): 3 "X.090 GAGE BOLTED OR IMBEDDED 2" IN WALL AT MAX. 3" SPACING. MIN ONE SUPPORT. DIAMETER EQUAL TO OUTLET PIPE (12 " OR 15 ", PER PLAN) 5 1.5 DIA. MIN. Backflow DOUBLE CHECY DETECTOR ASSE %'? Preventlon MODEL 856000BLE CHECK DETECTOR ASSEMB, Agency C'lmpliance • ASSE Listed (Std 1048) • ANSUAWWA Conformance /C510 -891 • CAN/CSA 1864 5) • FM • UL' • 4 and 6' (Horizontal and Vartical) Approved Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Research at the University of Southern Califon ,c • B in Horizontal Configuration ONLY Approved by the Foundation for Cross Connect:: - Control and Hydraulic Research at the Universr1 Southern California AI [ma am. mass a anunerion pat.. ,s■ca a, MODEL 656 VERTICAL INSTALLATION 2' MIN. G STANDARD GALVANIZED STEEL LADDER /STEPS SEE DWG. N0. 39 KCRS (12" SPACING, TYP.) 8" - CLEANOUT CATE: SHEAR GATE WITH CONTROL ROD FOR CLEANOUT. (ROD BENT AS REQUIRED FOR VERTICAL ALIGNMENT /W COVER) SEE KCRS DWG 53 EX. INLET C.M.PIPE OR PIPES CATCH BASIN TYPE 11 - 54" SECTION \CB TYPE 1/ - 54" (CB'S #13,24,28,30,38,31,43) DETECTOR DOUBLE CHECK VALVE DETAILS SAWCUT TO REMOVE EXIST PAVEMENT AS NEEDED 7 REPLACE WITH: 2" CLASS B ASPALT 6" COMPACTED C.S. T. C. TYPE II -54n FROP -TEE OIL /WATER SEPARATOR 50' OF HYDRANT City of Tukwila DETECTOR DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY AND VAULT Net to .w.. DATE: 11/26/96 WS -11 COMPACTED FOUNOATICN GRAVEL UNDER VAULT PLAN VIEW CB TYPE II - 54" TO BUILOINO NOTES' 1. DESIGN FOR 4" THRU 10' DOCV. 2. SEE ATTACHED NOTES AND MATERIAL LISTING. STANDARD LADDER STEPS 54" TYPE 11 CATCH BASIN - SHEAR GATE MATFRIAI. LISTING: 1. 2. 3. 5 . 6 . 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 4' OR 6' D.I. CLASS 52 PIPE FL•FL 16. 4' OR 6` 90' BEND, FL 17. 4 OR 6" D.I. CLASS 52 PIPE, FL•FL 18. 6' 90' BEND, FL 19. UL LISTED 5' STORTZ CONNECTION WITH 30 OR 45 DEGREE ELBOW. 20. 6' O.I. CLASS 52 PIPE LENGTH AS REQUIRED FL'FL. 21, 6' 90' BEND FL. 22, SWING TYPE GRAVITY OPERATED CHECK VALVE WITH BALL DRIP VALVE TO BE INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY. DT+TFCTOR DOUBT TIMM:K ANT VATLTT ASQP►TRI,Y NOTES. 1. BACKFLOW PREVENTORS SHALL BE '6820 Y0 OR APPRO EQUAL 2. 512E VAULT BASED ON SIZE OF APPARATUSS 8 A ND MEETING MINIMUM CLEARANCES. A SEPARATE DETAIL PLAN FOR VAULT INSTALATION AND SPRINKLER UNE MUST BE SUBMIRED AND APPROVED BY THE FIRE MARSHALL PROIR TO INSTALLATION. 4. MINIMUM APPARATUS SIZE SHALL BE 4 ". 5. VAULT SHALL BE SEALED TO PREVENT WATER LEAKAGE. 6. LADDERS SHALL BE REQUIRED WHEN DEPTH FROM TOP OF UO TO FLOOR OF VAULT EXCEEDS 30'. INSTALLATION OF ALL LADDERS SHALL BE IN COMPUANCE TO 0.5.5A. 7, LOCATE VAULT IN PLANTING AREA AND NOT IN PAVING AREA, UNLESS APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. 8. FITTINGS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF ANSI /AWWA C110/42/.10 AND CEMENT LINED (SEE AMA & AWWA). 9. PIPE SHALL BE DUCTILE IRON MEETING ANSI A21.51, C1_52 & CEMENT UNED. 10. TEMPORARY SUPPORT SHALL BE PROVIDED UNDER VALVES AT THE TIME OF INSTALLATION. AFTER COMPLETE INSTALLATION INSTALL PERMANENT PIPE SUPPORT STAND. 11. PROVIDE BALL DRIP VALVES ON F.O.C. CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY OR AT BOTTOM OF F.D.C. RISER. 12. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION TO BE PROVIDED viral ONE (I) S 5TORTZ CONNECTIONS AND TWO 30 DEGREE ELBOW. 13. ALL UNDERGROUND PIPING TO BE INSPECTED, FLUSHED. PRESSURE TESTED IN THE PRESENCE OF AN INSPECTOR PRIOR TO COVER AND CONNECTION TO THE OVERHEAD SYSTEM. UPON INSTALLATION, 8ACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBUES ARE TO BE TESTED BY A CERTIFIED TESTER AND ALL TEST -COCKS ARE "0 BE PLUGED AFTER THE TEST. THEREAFTER. ANNUAL TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED AT OWNER'S EXPENSE. AND COPIES OF TESTS RESULTS SHALL BE PROVIDED. 15. CONCRETE VAULT SHALL HAVE ONE 4'4 AR TWO 3'•3' STEEL HINGED DOORS. 3, 14. 3(4" SHACKLE RODS WITH STAR BOLTS AND ASPHALT EMULSION COATING. 4 MIN. D.I. CLASS 52 PIPE. PRECAST CONCRETE VAULT WITH HINGED STEEL PLATE COVER, OIMEN5100 TO VARY WITH SIZE OF ASSEMBLY. 0.S.HA APPROVED LADDER IF OVER 30' DEEP. PIPE SUPPORT STAND UNDER EACH CHECK VALVE. 60 /658 OR BROTER. NZE BYPASS WGH AN APPROVED 0CVA. 3/4 WATER ME APPROVED DDCVA IN MAIN LINE WITH TWO RESILIENT SEATED SHUTOFF VALVES AND TEST COCKS. 10 , 8', 6' OR 4' COUPLING ADAPTER, FL 10', 8', 6' OR 4'FL•PE D.I. CLASS 52 PIPE LENGTH TO FIT. GROUT INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR ALL AROUND PIPE USING NON- SHRINK GROUT. 10', 8', 6' OR 4" CATE VALVE FL'MJ WITH POST INDICATOR VALVE. FLANGE TEE ASSEMBLY SIZED ACCORDINGLY. FLANGED 90' BEND. City of Tukwila MATERIAL LISTING k DETECTOR DOUBLE CHECK & VAULT ASSEMBLY NOTF DATE: 11/22/96 WS 11NOTE CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH KING COUNTY STANDARDS AND SPECIFICA TION, EXCEPT AS AMMENDED BY THE CITY OF TUKWILA. 2. REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF OFF -SITE THE EXISTING CATCH BASINS. 3. OUTLET CAPACITY': NOT LESS THAN COMBINED INLETS. 4. METAL PARTS: CORROSION RESISTANT GALVANIZED PIPE PARTS TO HAVE ASPHALT TREATMENT 1. 5. FRAME & LADDER OR STEPS OFFSET SO A. CLEANOUT GATE IS VISIBLE FROM TOP. B. CLIMB -DOWN SPACE IS CLEAR OF RISER AND CLEANOUT GATE. C. FRAME IS CLEAR OF CURB. 6. IF METAL OUTLET PIPE CONNECTS TO CEMENT CONCRETE PIPE: OUTLET PIPE TO HAVE SMOOTH D.D. EQUAL TO CONCRETE PIPE I.D. LESS 1/4" 7. ELBOWS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF 16 GA. CORRUGATED ALUMINUM WITH SMOOTH - ROLLED 5052 H32 ALUMINUM PLATE ON OUTLET LEG. 8. ALL JOINTS SHALL BE SHOP WELDED. ECEIVED CITY R OF TUKWILA MAY 2 0 1997 PERMIT CENTER APPROVED: CITY OF TUKWILA DATE 0 s o In z 00/ w M m